Copying and Mail Box Guide

Please read this guide before operating this equipment.

After you finish reading this guide, store it in a safe place for future reference. ENG
 0

前付け
 0

Ot¯

imagePRESS C1
Copying and Mail Box
Guide
 Manuals for the Machine
The manuals for this machine are divided as follows. Please refer to them for detailed information.
The manuals supplied with optional equipment are included in the list below. Depending on the system
configuration and product purchased, some manuals may not be needed.
Guides with this symbol are printed manuals. Guides with this symbol are included on the accompanying
CD-ROM.

• Quick Reference for Basic Operations

Easy Operation Guide
• Basic Operations
• Troubleshooting Reference Guide
• Copying and Mail Box Instructions
Copying and Mail Box
Guide
(This Document)
• Sending Instructions
Sending Guide CD-ROM

• Setting Up the Network Connection and

Installing the CD-ROM Software Network Quick Start Guide
• Remote User Interface Instructions
Remote UI Guide CD-ROM

• Network Connectivity and Setup Instructions

Network Guide CD-ROM

• Color Network ScanGear Installation and

Instructions Color Network ScanGear CD-ROM
User's Guide
• PS/PCL/UFR II Printer Instructions
PS/PCL/UFR II Printer CD-ROM
Guide
• PCL Printer Driver Installation and
Instructions PCL Driver Guide CD-ROM

• PS Printer Driver Installation and

Instructions PS Driver Guide CD-ROM

• UFR II Printer Driver Installation and

Instructions UFR II Driver Guide CD-ROM
• Mac OS X PS Printer Driver Installation and
Instructions Mac PS Driver Guide CD-ROM

• Mac OS X UFR II Printer Driver Installation

and Instructions Mac UFR II Driver Guide CD-ROM

• Installing MEAP Applications and Using the

Login Service MEAP SMS Administrator CD-ROM
Guide

To view the manual in PDF format, Adobe Reader/Acrobat Reader/Acrobat is required. If Adobe Reader/Acrobat Reader/Acrobat is not installed on
your system, please download it from the Adobe Systems Incorporated website.
 How This Manual Is Organized
Chapter 1 Introduction to the Copying Functions

Chapter 2 Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

Chapter 3 Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

Chapter 4 Special Copying and Mail Box Features

Chapter 5 Memory Features

Chapter 6 Sending and Receiving Documents Using the Inboxes

Chapter 7 Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

Chapter 8 Customizing Settings

Chapter 9 Appendix

Includes the color copy samples, combination of functions chart, and the index.

Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this manual is free of inaccuracies and omissions. However, as we are constantly improving our
products, if you need an exact specification, please contact Canon.
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
How To Use This Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
Symbols Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
Keys Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Displays Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Illustrations Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
System Configuration of imagePRESS C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
Legal Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Disclaimers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Preserving Color Copies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx

Chapter 1 Introduction to the Copy Functions

Overview of the imagePRESS C1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Switching the Copy Basic Features Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Various Copying Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Flow of Copy Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Paper Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Canceling a Copy Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Using the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Using the Stop Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Using the System Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Reserved Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Reserving Copy Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Using the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Interrupt Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Sample Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Confirming/Changing/Canceling Selected Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33

Chapter 2 Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

Various Mail Box Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Flow of Mail Box Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Storing Originals into an Inbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Printing Documents Stored in an Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

v
 Paper Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Canceling a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
While Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Using the Touch Panel Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Using the Stop Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
While Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Using the Touch Panel Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Using the System Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Reserving Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Storing Originals While Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Reserving Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Reserving Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Using the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Sample Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Storing Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47
Changing the Name of a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47
Checking a Document's Detailed Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48
Erasing a Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
Printing Lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Moving/Duplicating a Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52
Editing/Checking the Contents of a Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54
Checking an Image in a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54
Storing Multiple Documents as One Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55
Inserting a Document into Another Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56
Erasing Part of a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58

Chapter 3 Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

Exposure and Original Type Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2

Manual Exposure Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Mail Box (Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Original Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Mail Box (Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Automatic Exposure Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Mail Box (Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Exposure Adjustment during Copying/Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8

vi
 Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Mail Box (Print). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Changing the Copy (Zoom) Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Preset Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Mail Box (Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Zoom by Percentage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Mail Box (Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Auto Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Mail Box (Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Entire Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Reducing/Enlarging Using the Original and Copy/Record Sizes . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Making Copies (Scanning) with the Same XY Copy/Zoom Ratio
(Zoom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Making Copies (Scanning) with Different XY Copy/Zoom Ratios (XY
Zoom). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Setting the X and Y Axes Independently . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Mail Box (Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Poster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Determining the Copy Ratio and Number of Sheets Needed . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Specifying the Copy Ratio in Percentage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Selecting the Number of Output Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Pasting the Sheets of the Divided Image Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Collating Copies/Prints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Page Order (Collate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Mail Box (Print). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Same Page (Group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Mail Box (Print). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Page Order (Staple) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Mail Box (Print). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Two-Sided Copying/Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
1 to 2-Sided . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

vii
 Mail Box (Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45
2 to 2-Sided . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46
2 to 1-Sided . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48
Book to 2-Sided . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49
Scanning Two-Sided Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-52
Changing Color Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-56
Mail Box (Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-57
Mail Box (Print). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-58
Merging Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-59

Chapter 4 Special Copying and Mail Box Features

What are Special Features? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4

Specifying the Special Copying Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Specifying the Special Mail Box Features for Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Specifying the Special Mail Box Features for Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
2-Page Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Mail Box (Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Cover/Sheet Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Mail Box (Print). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Cover/Job Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
Booklet Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Mail Box (Print). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Booklet Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
Transparency Interleaving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Image Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Mail Box (Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Shifting the Original Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Using the Arrow Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Using the Numeric Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
Mail Box (Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40
Margin Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42
Mail Box (Print). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43

viii
Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Original Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Mail Box (Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Book Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Mail Box (Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Binding Erase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Mail Box (Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Job Done Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Different Size Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Mail Box (Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Job Build . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Mail Box (Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Scan Image Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Using Image Creation Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Inverting Images (Nega/Posi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Mail Box (Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Image Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Mirror Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Area Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Using the Edit Pen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Using the Numeric Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Tab Paper Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Mail Box (Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Adjusting the Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Image Quality Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Remove Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Prevent Bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Adjusting the Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Adjusting the Color Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Storing Color Balance Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Naming a Color Balance Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Recalling Color Balance Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

ix
 Erasing Color Balance Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-86
One Touch Color Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-87
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-88
Mail Box (Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-89
Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-90
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-91
Mail Box (Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-91
Composing Images (Form Composition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-92
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-93
Mail Box (Print). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-94
Composing Images (Image Composition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-95
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-95
Mail Box (Print). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-98
Embedding Hidden Text in the Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-99
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-100
Mail Box (Print). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-103
Page and Copy Set Numbering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-104
Page Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-106
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-106
Mail Box (Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-108
Copy Set Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-109
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-109
Mail Box (Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-110
Printing a Watermark and Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-111
Watermark Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-112
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-112
Mail Box (Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-113
Date Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-114
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-114
Mail Box (Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-115
Combining Multiple Batches of Originals with Different Copy Settings. . .4-116
Storing Scanned Originals with Copy Settings in a User Inbox . . . . . . . . .4-122

Chapter 5 Memory Features

Recalling Previous Copy Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2

Memory Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Storing Scan/Print/Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Mail Box (Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5

x
 Mail Box (Print). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Naming a Memory Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Mail Box (Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Mail Box (Print). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Recalling Scan/Print/Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Mail Box (Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Mail Box (Print). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Erasing Scan/Print/Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Mail Box (Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Mail Box (Print). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Chapter 6 Sending and Receiving Documents Using the Inboxes

Memory RX Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Memory RX Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Receiving Documents through I-Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Settings for Receiving Documents in Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Printing a Document in the Memory RX inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Divided Data RX Inbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Confirming Documents in the Divided Data RX Inbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Erasing Divided Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Confidential Fax Inboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Receiving Confidential Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Printing a Document in the Confidential Fax Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Sending a Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Chapter 7 Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

Switching to the Express Copy Basic Features Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Various Features of the Express Copy Basic Features Screen . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Operating the Express Copy Basic Features Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Automatic Color Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Adjusting Copy Exposure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Selecting Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Specifying the Copy Ratio by Percentage (Zoom by Percentage) . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Enlarging/Reducing Originals to a Standard Size (Preset Zoom) . . . . . . . . . 7-13

xi
 Automatically Setting the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy
Paper Sizes (Auto Zoom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Slightly Reducing Images to Prevent the Original Periphery from Being
Trimmed (Entire Image) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Calculating the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy Paper Sizes
(Zoom Program) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Enlarging/Reducing Originals with Copy Ratios Set Independently for
the X and Y Axes (XY Zoom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Enlarging an Image onto Multiple Pages (Poster) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
Making Two-Sided Copies from One-Sided Originals (1 to 2-Sided) . . . . . . .7-21
Making Two-Sided Copies from Two-Sided Originals (2 to 2-Sided) . . . . . . .7-22
Making One-Sided Copies from Two-Sided Originals (2 to 1-Sided) . . . . . . .7-23
Making Two-Sided Copies from Facing Pages in a Book (Book to
2-Sided) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24
Collating Copies into Sets in Page Order (Collate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-25
Collating Copies into Groups of the Same Page (Group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-27
Collating Pages and Stapling (Staple) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-29
Setting Standard Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-30
Interrupting the Current Job to Make Priority Copies (Interrupt Mode) . . . . .7-32
Sample Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-32
Recalling a Previous Copy Setting (Recall) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-34
Registering Frequently Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memory) . . .7-35
Storing Copy Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-35
Registering a Memory Key Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-36
Recalling a Copy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-36
Erasing a Copy Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-37
Scan Originals Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-38
Copying Facing Pages in a Book on Two Separate Sheets of Paper
(2-Page Separation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-39
Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-40
Feeding Different-Sized Originals Together in the Feeder (Different Size
Originals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-41
Copying while Verifying Scanned Images (Scan Image Check). . . . . . . . . . .7-42
Book/Page Edit/Shift Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-43
Adding Front and Back Covers, Sheet Insertions, and Chapter Pages to
Copy Sets (Front Cover/Back Cover) (Paper Insertion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-45
Making a Copy with Front and Back Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-45
Making a Copy with Inserted Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-46
Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-48

xii
 Page and Copy Set Numbering (Page Numbering) (Copy Set
Numbering) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
Page Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
Copy Set Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Printing a Watermark and Date (Watermark/Print Date) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Watermark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Print Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
Making Copies with the Original Image Shifted (Shift) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
Making Copies with the Original Image Shifted to the Center or a
Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
Making Copies with the Original Image Shifted Using the Numeric
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Making Copies with Margins (Margin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Tab Paper Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Process/Layout Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
Reducing Two, Four, or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Copy Sheet
(Image Combination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
Composing Images (Form Composition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
Composing Images (Image Composition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
Embedding Hidden Text in the Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
Making Copies of a Designated Area (Area Designation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68
Using the Edit Pen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68
Using the Numeric Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
Making Copies by the Original Image Repeated (Image Repeat) . . . . . . . . . 7-71
Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erase) . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
Making Copies by Erasing the Frame around the Original (Original
Frame Erase) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
Making Copies by Erasing the Book Frame (Book Frame Erase) . . . . . . 7-74
Making Copies by Erasing Binding Holes (Binding Erase) . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75
Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved between
Transparencies (Transparency Interleaving) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76
Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77
Making Copies with the Original Image Reversed (Mirror Image) . . . . . . . . . 7-78
Image Adjustment Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-79
Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80
Adjusting the Image Quality (Image Quality Adjustment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81
Remove Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81
Prevent Bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
Adjusting the Color (Color Balance). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
Specifying the Look of the Image (One Touch Color) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83

xiii
 Setting Job Block Combination, Store In User Inbox, and Job Done
Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-84
Combining Multiple Batches of Originals with Different Copy Settings
(Job Block Combination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-85
Storing Scanned Originals with Copy Settings in a User Inbox (Store In
User Inbox). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-88
E-mail Notification at the End of a Copy Job (Job Done Notice) . . . . . . . . . .7-89

Chapter 8 Customizing Settings

What Are Additional Functions? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2

Customizing Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Copy Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Setting the Paper Select Key Size for the Express Copy Basic Features
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Setting the Standard Keys for the Regular Copy Basic Features Screen . . . .8-6
Setting the Standard Keys for the Express Copy Basic Features Screen . . . .8-7
Auto Collate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Image Orientation Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Auto Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Changing the Current Standard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Storing New Standard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Initializing Standard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Restoring the Default Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Customizing Mail Box Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Mail Box Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Setting/Storing a User Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Initializing a User Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Standard Scan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Storing the Standard Scan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Initializing the Standard Scan Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Setting/Storing a Confidential Fax Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Initializing a Confidential Fax Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19

Chapter 9 Appendix

Color Copy Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2

Color Balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Saturation Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
Hue Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
Density Fine Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4

xiv
 One Touch Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Image Quality Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Remove Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Prevent Bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Single Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Two Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Combination of Functions Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Mail Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

xv
 Preface
Thank you for purchasing the Canon imagePRESS C1. Please read this manual thoroughly
before operating the machine to familiarize yourself with its capabilities, and to make the
most of its many functions. After reading this manual, store it in a safe place for future
reference.

How To Use This Manual

Symbols Used in This Manual

The following symbols are used in this manual to explain procedures, restrictions,
handling precautions, and instructions that should be observed for safety.
.

WARNING Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or

injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the machine safely,
always pay attention to these warnings.
.

CAUTION Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to

persons, or damage to property if not performed correctly. To use the
machine safely, always pay attention to these cautions.
.

IMPORTANT Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read

these items carefully to operate the machine correctly, and avoid
damage to the machine.
.

NOTE Indicates a clarification of an operation, or contains additional

explanations for a procedure. Reading these notes is highly
recommended.

xvi
Keys Used in This Manual
The following symbols and key names are a few examples of how keys to be
pressed are expressed in this manual:

• Touch Panel Display Keys: [Key Name]

Examples: [Cancel]

[Done]

• Control Panel Keys: Key Icon (Key Name)

Examples: (Start)

(Stop)

Displays Used in This Manual

Screen shots of the touch panel display used in this manual are those taken when
the following optional equipment is attached to the imagePRESS C1: the Color
Image Reader-H1, Feeder (DADF-R1) Saddle Finisher-AA2, Punch Unit-L1, Color
Universal Send Kit, and Color UFR II/PCL/PS Printer Kit.
Note that functions that cannot be used depending on the model or options, are not
displayed on the touch panel display.
The keys which you should press are marked with a , as shown below.
When multiple keys can be pressed on the touch panel display, all keys are marked.
Select the keys which suit your needs.

Place your originals press [Special Features].

Press this key for operation.

xvii
 Illustrations Used in This Manual
Illustrations used in this manual are those displayed when the imagePRESS C1
has the following optional equipment attached to it: the Feeder (DADF-R1), Saddle
Finisher-AA2, and Punch Unit-L1.

System Configuration of imagePRESS C1

To use the Copy and Scan functions of the imagePRESS C1, the optional Color
Image Reader-H1 must be installed.

xviii
Legal Notices

Trademarks
Canon, the Canon logo, iR, imagePRESS and MEAP are registered trademarks,
and the MEAP logo is a trademark of Canon Inc. in the United States and may also
be a trademark or registered trademark in other countries.
Adobe and Adobe Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Other product and company names herein may be the trademarks of their
respective owners.

Copyright
Copyright 2006 by Canon Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, or by any
information storage or retrieval system without the prior written permission of
Canon Inc.

Disclaimers
The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS
MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO
MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE OF USE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF
ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF
THIS MATERIAL.

xix
Preserving Color Copies

■ Fading Due to Exposure to Light

As with all printed material and photographs, this is not a problem if the copies are stored
under normal conditions. Color copies exposed for two years to the fluorescent lighting
used in general offices will hardly fade, depending on the storage conditions. Color copies
should be stored in binders or in locations that are not exposed to light if they are to be
kept for a long period of time.

■ Use of Clear Covers

Do not use PVC type transparent covers. If copies are stored in such covers, toner on the
copies softens, causing the copies and covers to adhere to each other.

■ Use of Adhesives
Only adhesives that do not dissolve toner should be used for mounting copies; solvents
dissolve toner. Be sure to check the ingredients of the adhesive before you use it. Test
some adhesives with an unwanted color copy before you use it with a valuable copy.

■ Inserting Copies Between Printed Pages

When copies are included in books, the solvents contained in printing ink may cause the
toner to soften. The printed pages should, therefore, be thoroughly dried to evaporate any
solvents before the copies are inserted.

■ Folding Copies
Color copies differ from black-and-white copies in that toners of four colors are used.
These toners are deposited on the surface of the paper in a layer considerably thicker
than black-and-white copies, and they may peel if the copy is folded or wrinkled. Copies
should be stored in flat transparent covers, in binders, or carefully rolled.

■ Effect of High Temperatures

If copies are left in high-temperature areas (near heaters, stoves, etc.), the toner will melt,
and the colors will mix.

xx
Introduction to the Copy
Functions 1
CHAPTER

This chapter is an introduction to the Copy functions.

Overview of the imagePRESS C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Switching the Copy Basic Features Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Various Copying Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4

Flow of Copy Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Paper Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Canceling a Copy Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Using the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Using the Stop Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Using the System Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19

Reserved Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Reserving Copy Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Using the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23

Interrupt Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28

Sample Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Confirming/Changing/Canceling Selected Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33

1-1
 Overview of the imagePRESS C1
1 Most operations of this machine are done from the touch panel display. To use the
Copy functions, press the appropriate key in accordance with the messages
Introduction to the Copy Functions

displayed on the touch panel display.

Switching the Copy Basic Features Screen

After the power is turned ON, the Regular Copy Basic Features screen appears on
the touch panel display. This machine also includes an Express Copy function. The
Express Copy function is useful for advanced users, as it allows you to set the
various copying modes with fewer steps than the Regular Copy function. The
following screens are examples of the Basic Features screen for the copying
function. You can press [Copy] or [Express Copy] to switch the
Copy Basic Features screen.

Regular Copy Basic Features Screen Express Copy Basic Features Screen

The Express Copy Basic Features screen simplifies the copying procedures of the
Regular Copy Basic Features screen. For more information on how to use the
Express Copy Basic Features screen, see Chapter 7, "Using the Express Copy
Basic Features Screen."

1-2 Overview of the imagePRESS C1

NOTE
• By default, only the Regular Copy function key is displayed on the Copy Basic Features
screen. You can set to display the Express Copy function key from the Additional
Functions screen. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
• You can display the Regular Copy function key, Express Copy function key, or both.
• After changing the copy settings, even if you switch to the Express Copy Basic Features
screen from the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, or vice versa, the copy settings will 1
be retained.

Introduction to the Copy Functions

• If you press (Reset) on the Express Copy Basic Features screen, the display returns
to the Express Copy Basic Features screen. If you press (Reset) on the Regular Copy
Basic Features screen, the display returns to the Regular Copy Basic Features screen.

Overview of the imagePRESS C1 1-3

 Various Copying Features
■ Regular Copy Basic Features Screen
The screen below, which appears when [Copy] is selected, is called the Regular Copy
Basic Features screen.
1
Introduction to the Copy Functions

b g
c
h
d i
e
f j
k

a Color Selection Drop-Down List g Paper Select

Press to select the color mode for copying. Press to select the paper size/type and the
b 1:1 paper source.

Press to make copies in the same size as your h Copy Exposure

original. Press [ ] or [ ] to manually control the copy
c Copy Ratio exposure. Press [A] to select or cancel the
automatic exposure control.
Press to reduce or enlarge the copy size.
i Original Type Drop-Down List
d Finishing
Press to make copies according to the type of
Press to select the Collate, Group, or Staple
original ([Text/Printed Img.], [Text/Photo],
mode. [Printed Image], [Photo], [Text], [Map], or [Color
e 2-Sided Copy Original]).
Press to make [1 2-Sided], [2 2-Sided], j Special Features
[2 1-Sided], or [Book 2-Sided] copies.
Press to select a Special Features mode.
f Interrupt k System Monitor
Press to interrupt a copy job to make priority
Press to check the progress of a copy job,
copies.
change the order of printing, or cancel printing.

1-4 Overview of the imagePRESS C1

 ■ Special Features Screen 1/2
The screen below, which appears on the touch panel display when you press [Special
Features] on the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, is called the Special Features
screen. This screen is divided into two screens. Pressing [▼] or [▲] displays the next or
previous screen. All special copy modes are displayed here. In some cases, when a mode
is selected, a more detailed screen for the selected mode appears. To close the Special
Features screen and return to the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, press [Done].
Pressing (Help) after selecting a mode displays the Help screen containing guidance 1
information. This is useful when you want to learn more about the selected mode.

Introduction to the Copy Functions

a g
b h
c i
d j
e k
f l

a 2-Page Separation g Shift

Press to select or cancel the 2-Page Separation Press to shift the position of the original image
mode. This mode enables you to copy facing on the copy sheet.
pages of an opened book onto separate copy h Image Combination
sheets.
Press to automatically reduce two, four, or eight
b Cover/Sheet Insertion originals to fit onto a one-sided or two-sided
Press to add covers, sheet insertions, chapter copy sheet.
pages, or tab paper between specified pages. i Margin
c Booklet Press to create margins along the sides of a
Press to make copies of several originals to form copy sheet.
a booklet. j Job Done Notice
d Transparency Interleaving Press to have the machine notify the user
Press to insert a sheet between each through e-mail when the copy job is done.
transparency when copying transparencies. You k Frame Erase
can make the same prints on the interleaf sheets
Press to eliminate dark border areas and lines
as those on the transparencies.
that appear around original images or shadows
e Different Size Originals from binding holes.
Press to make copies feeding different size l Scan Image Check
originals together in one group, by placing them
in the feeder. Press to confirm scanned images page by page
before copying when you scan originals on the
f Job Build platen glass.
Press to select or cancel the Job Build mode.
This mode enables you to divide the originals
into several parts, scan them, and then print
them all together. This is convenient when you
cannot place all of the originals that you want to
copy at one time.

Overview of the imagePRESS C1 1-5

 ■ Special Features Screen 2/2
The screen below appears if you press [▼] on the Special Features screen.

a g
b h

1 c
d
i
j
Introduction to the Copy Functions

e k
f l

a Image Creation g Sharpness

Press to manipulate the image in the copy by Press to sharpen or soften the image of the
selecting [Nega/Posi], [Image Repeat], [Mirror original in the copy.
Image], or [Area Designation]. h Image Adjustment
b Tab Paper Creation Press to specify the settings for Image Quality
Press to copy onto the tabs on tab paper. Adjustment, Color Balance, and One Touch
c Composition Color.

Press to superimpose an image stored in hard i Watermark/Print Date

disk onto the original image for copying. Press to include the watermark and date on
d Secure Watermark copies.

Press to embed hidden text in the background. j Pg/Copy Set Numbering

The hidden text will become visible if the Press to include page numbering on copies.
resulting output is copied. k Store In User Inbox
e Mode Memory Press to store originals scanned from the
Press to store or recall copy modes. Regular Copy Basic Features screen as a
f Recall document in a User Inbox.

Press to recall previously set copy modes. l Job Block Combination

Press to scan multiple batches of originals with
different copy settings and print them as one
document.

1-6 Overview of the imagePRESS C1

Flow of Copy Operations
This section describes the flow of basic copy operations. 1

Introduction to the Copy Functions

NOTE
• Before using the Copy function, it is useful to read the following topics:
- Main power and control panel power (See Chapter 1, "Before You Start Using This
Machine," in the Reference Guide.)
- Entering characters from the touch panel display (See Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in
the Reference Guide.)
- Routine maintenance (See Chapter 7, "Routine Maintenance," in the Reference Guide.)
• If you are using a login service, log in and log out using the procedure for the login
service you are using before and after operating the machine.
- If you are using Department ID Management with the optional Card Reader-C1, see
Chapter 3, "Optional Equipment," in the Reference Guide.
- If you are using Department ID Management, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
- If you are performing user authentication using the SDL or SSO login service, see
Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the Reference Guide.
• To cancel all settings, press (Reset).

1 Press [Copy].

Regular Copy Basic Features Screen

Flow of Copy Operations 1-7

 2 Place your originals.

1
Introduction to the Copy Functions

NOTE
• For instructions on placing your originals, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
• If Auto Collate in Copy Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to
'On', the Collate or the Offset Collate mode is automatically set when you place
your originals in the feeder. (See "Auto Collate," on p. 8-9.)

3 Gently close the feeder/platen cover.

The paper size is recognized automatically. If the paper size recognized

automatically is different from the paper size you want, press [Paper Select] ➞
select the copy paper size. (See "Paper Selection," on p. 1-13.)

1-8 Flow of Copy Operations

4 Specify the desired copy modes on the Copy Basic Features
screen.

Introduction to the Copy Functions

IMPORTANT
When the Auto-Color Select mode is set and your originals contain color sections,
the machine copies them in the Full Color mode. However, the machine may copy
the color originals in the Black mode under the following conditions. To avoid this,
set the color mode to 'Full Color'. (See "Changing Color Modes," on p. 3-54.)
- If the originals contain a few color sections
- If the color sections are located only on the left side (within 5 mm from the left
edge) or the right side (within 5 mm from the right edge) of the originals when
loading the originals into the feeder
- If the originals contain light color densities
- If the color sections of the original are close to black

NOTE
On the Copy Basic Features screen, you can select the color mode, paper size and
type, copy exposure, original type, copy ratio, 2-sided mode, and the desired
Finishing mode.

5 Set the desired copy modes on the Special Features screen.

❑ Press [Special Features].

Flow of Copy Operations 1-9

 ❑ Press the desired mode key to set the mode.

1
Introduction to the Copy Functions

The Special Features screen is divided into two screens. Press [ ] or [ ] to

display the desired mode.
For more information on the other available functions on the Special Features
screen, see Chapters 4 through 5.

6 Press - (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity

(1 to 999).
If you make a mistake when entering values, press (Clear) ➞ enter the correct
value.
The copy quantity appears on the right side of the Copy Basic Features screen.

IMPORTANT
You cannot change the copy quantity while the machine is copying.

NOTE
The number of copies which can be set varies according to the copy modes you
have set.

1-10 Flow of Copy Operations

7 Press (Start).
If the following screen is displayed, follow the instructions on the touch panel
display ➞ press (Start) once for each original. When scanning is complete,
press [Done].

Introduction to the Copy Functions

Copying starts.

IMPORTANT
You cannot change copy mode settings, such as the copy quantity and paper size,
while the machine is copying.

NOTE
If there is a current job, the machine scans the original, and waits to print it. Printing
starts when the current job is complete.

8 If you want to stop, interrupt, or copy another original during a

copy job, follow the instructions below.

● If you want to stop a copy job:

❑ Press (Stop).

NOTE
• Several copies may be output even after you press (Stop).
• You can also cancel a copy job from the System Monitor screen. (See "Canceling a
Copy Job," on p. 1-18.)

Flow of Copy Operations 1-11

 ● If you want to interrupt a copy job:
❑ To interrupt a copy job when you need to make priority copies, press [Interrupt].

1
Introduction to the Copy Functions

NOTE
For instructions on interrupting a copy job, see "Interrupt Mode," on p. 1-28.

● If you want to start copying the next original while a previous

original is printing:
❑ Press [Done] ➞ place your originals ➞ press (Start).

NOTE
For instructions on reserving a copy job, see "Reserved Copying," on p. 1-21.

9 When copying is complete, remove your originals.

1-12 Flow of Copy Operations

Paper Selection

IMPORTANT
1

Introduction to the Copy Functions

• For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with this mode, see
"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.
• If you want to copy an A3 original with an image that extends all the way to the edges
without the periphery of the original being cut off, load the stack bypass or paper drawer
with 320 x 450 mm or 305 x 457 mm paper. (See Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide and "Entire Image," on p. 3-16.)
• When printing on special types of paper, such as heavy paper or transparencies, be sure
to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavy paper. If the type of
paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the
fixing unit may become dirty, or the paper could jam, and a service repair may be
needed.

NOTE
• If you are copying an original with an image that extends all the way to the edges onto the
same size paper at a copy ratio of 100%, the periphery of the original image may be cut
off slightly on the copy. For more information on how much may be cut off, look under the
margin areas in the Specifications table in Chapter 9, "Appendix," in the Reference
Guide.
• If you select the Entire Image mode, the copied image is automatically reduced slightly
based on the copy paper size and the image size. As a result, the entire original image is
reproduced on the copy without being cut off. (See "Entire Image," on p. 3-16.)
• If you select, [Transparency] or [Labels], make sure that you do not specify any Finishing
modes (Collate, Group, or Staple).
• If Stack Bypass Standard Settings in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) is set to 'On', and the paper size/type have been stored, the selected paper size/
type are displayed on the screen. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the
Reference Guide.)
• For instructions on loading paper into the stack bypass, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Operations," in the Reference Guide.
• For more information on paper types, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
• For instructions on entering values in inches, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.

Paper Selection 1-13

 1 Place your originals ➞ press [Paper Select].

1
Introduction to the Copy Functions

● To set the machine to automatically select the copy paper size:

❑ Press [Auto].

IMPORTANT
You cannot use the Automatic Paper Selection mode when copying the following
types of originals. Copy these originals using the Manual Paper Selection mode.
- Nonstandard size originals
- Highly transparent originals, such as transparencies
- Originals with an extremely dark background
- A5R or smaller originals on the platen glass

NOTE
If Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) is set to 'Off' for a particular paper source, you cannot make
copies on paper loaded in that paper source in the Automatic Paper Selection
mode. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)

1-14 Paper Selection

● To manually select the copy paper size and type:
❑ Select the desired paper size.

NOTE
• The paper sizes/types are indicated by icons on the touch panel display, in the
order in which they are loaded in the paper drawers.
• Icons indicating the type of paper loaded in each paper drawer can be displayed on 1
paper selection screens, if you store that information into the machine beforehand.

Introduction to the Copy Functions

(See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
• indicates that the paper is loaded vertically, and indicates that the paper is
loaded horizontally. The suffix <R> (such as in A4R) used in paper size
designations indicates that the paper is loaded in a paper drawer or the stack
bypass horizontally.

● To copy on standard size paper loaded in the stack bypass:

❑ Press [Stack Bypass].
If you want to select the stack bypass when a paper size/type is already
selected for the current or reserved job, press [Stack Bypass Settings] to
specify the desired paper size/type.
❑ Select the desired paper size ➞ press [Next].

NOTE
To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].
❑ Select the desired paper type ➞ press [OK].

Paper Selection 1-15

 If the desired paper type is not displayed, press [Detailed Settings] ➞ select
the paper type from the list ➞ press [OK].

1
Introduction to the Copy Functions

If you are copying onto the back side of a previously printed sheet, press [2nd
Side of 2-Sided Page].

NOTE
• [Transparency] can be selected only if [A4] is selected as the paper size.
• You can register paper types that are not displayed on the detailed settings list in
[Selecting the Paper Type]. For more information on storing the paper type, see
Chapter 6, "System Manager Settings," in the Reference Guide.

● To copy on nonstandard size paper loaded in the stack bypass:

❑ Press [Stack Bypass].
If you want to select the stack bypass when a paper size/type is already
selected for the current or reserved job, press [Stack Bypass Settings] to
specify the desired paper size/type.
❑ Press [Irreg. Size].
❑ Press [X] (horizontal axis) ➞ enter a value.
❑ Press [Y] (vertical axis) ➞ enter a value.
❑ Press [OK].

You can also press a size key in which a paper size is registered ([S1] to [S5]),
instead of entering a value.

1-16 Paper Selection

 NOTE
To recall a paper size from a size key ([S1] to [S5]), it is necessary to register a
paper size in that key beforehand. For instructions on registering a paper size, see
Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.
❑ Press [Next].
❑ Select the desired paper type ➞ press [OK].
1
If the desired paper type is not displayed, press [Detailed Settings] ➞ select
the paper type from the list ➞ press [OK].

Introduction to the Copy Functions

If you are copying onto the back side of a previously printed sheet, press [2nd
Side of 2-Sided Page].

IMPORTANT
If you select a nonstandard size paper, the Poster, Rotate Collate, Rotate Group,
Offset Collate, Offset Group, Staple, 1 2-Sided, 2 2-Sided, 2-Page Separation,
Cover/Sheet Insertion, Image Combination, Booklet, Tab Paper Creation, Job
Block Combination, or Store In User Inbox mode cannot be specified.

2 Press [Done].

Paper Selection 1-17

 Canceling a Copy Job
1
Using the Touch Panel Display
Introduction to the Copy Functions

1 Press [Cancel] on the pop-up screen that appears while the

machine is scanning, printing, or waiting to print.

The copy job is canceled.

NOTE
If you cancel a copy job during scanning, be sure to remove the original for that job.

Using the Stop Key

1 Press (Stop).
When canceling a job that which is being printed, press [Cancel] on the pop-up
screen that appears during printing.

1-18 Canceling a Copy Job

 2 Select the copy job that you want to cancel ➞ press [Cancel].

Introduction to the Copy Functions

You cannot select multiple jobs and cancel them all at once. Select and cancel
one job at a time.
The copy job is canceled.

3 Press [Resume Copying].

Copying resumes.

NOTE
If you press (Stop) while copying in the Store In User Inbox mode and if the
Store In User Inbox (Copy upon Storing) mode is not set, the job is not paused, but
canceled.

Using the System Monitor Screen

1 Press [System Monitor].

Canceling a Copy Job 1-19

 2 Press [Print Status] ➞ [Status] ➞ select the copy job that you
want to cancel ➞ press [Cancel].

1
Introduction to the Copy Functions

You cannot select multiple jobs and cancel them all at once. Select and cancel
one job at a time.

3 Press [Yes].
The copy job is canceled.

NOTE
The canceled job is displayed as <NG> (No Good) on the Log screen.

4 Press [Done].
The display returns to the Regular Copy Basic Features screen.

1-20 Canceling a Copy Job

Reserved Copying
You can set the machine to scan originals even while it is printing or waiting to 1
process a job.

Introduction to the Copy Functions

NOTE
• You can reserve up to 10 copy jobs, including the current job. Interrupt copy jobs are not
included in this count.
• You can set different copy modes and paper sources, including the stack bypass, for
each reserved job. (See "Using the Stack Bypass," on p. 1-23.)
• To cancel a previously set copy mode, press (Reset).

Reserving Copy Jobs

Reserved printing can be specified in the following cases:

■ While the Machine Is Waiting

You can specify copy settings or scan originals while the machine is in the waiting state,
such as when the power is just turned ON, or after a paper jam is cleared. Copying
automatically begins when the machine is ready. The message <Reservation copies can
be made.> appears on the machine when it is able to process reserved copying.

NOTE
You can specify reserved copying while the machine is in the waiting state in the following
cases:
- Between the time that the machine is turned ON and when it is ready to copy
- Between the time that the machine wakes up from the Energy Saver mode and when it
is ready to copy
- After a paper jam is cleared
- After a cover on the main unit or an optional unit, such as a finisher, is opened and
closed

■ While the Machine Is Printing

You can specify copy settings for a new job while the machine is printing. Copying of the
new job automatically begins when the current job is complete.

Reserved Copying 1-21

 1 Press [Done] on the pop-up screen that appears while the
machine is printing.

1
Introduction to the Copy Functions

If the job displayed on the touch panel display is from a function other than the
Copy function, press [Done] ➞ [Copy] to display the Regular Copy Basic
Features screen.

2 Place your originals ➞ set the desired copy modes and paper
source.

3 Press (Start).
If you specify a reserved copy job while the machine is printing, copying of the
new job automatically begins when the current job is complete. If the following
screen is displayed, press [OK] ➞ try reserving the job again after the current job
is complete.

1-22 Reserved Copying

Using the Stack Bypass
You can perform reserved copying from the stack bypass by specifying in advance
the paper to be loaded for the next job. However, this is possible only if paper is
being fed from the stack bypass for the current job.
The following example assumes that A3 plain paper is being fed from the stack 1
bypass for the current job, and that you are selecting A4 plain paper to be fed from

Introduction to the Copy Functions

the stack bypass for a reserved job.

IMPORTANT
When printing on special types of paper, such as heavy paper or transparencies, be sure
to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavy paper. If the type of
paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the
fixing unit may become dirty, or the paper could jam, and a service repair may be
needed.

NOTE
• If Stack Bypass Standard Settings in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) is set to 'On', reserved copying can be performed only for the registered paper
size and type. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
• For more information on paper types, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
• For instructions on entering values in inches, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.

1 Press [Done] on the pop-up screen that appears while the

machine is printing.

If the job displayed on the touch panel display is from a function other than the
Copy function, press [Done] ➞ [Copy] to display the Regular Copy Basic
Features screen.

Reserved Copying 1-23

 2 Place your originals ➞ set the desired copy modes ➞ press
[Paper Select] ➞ [Stack Bypass Settings].

1
Introduction to the Copy Functions

Normally, when reserved copying is not being set, the Stack Bypass Settings
screen is automatically displayed when paper is loaded into the stack bypass.

3 Select the desired paper size.

NOTE
• If you select [Transparency] or [Labels], make sure that you do not specify any
Finishing modes (Collate, Group, or Staple).
• If Stack Bypass Standard Settings in Common Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) is set to 'On', and the paper size/type have been stored, the
selected paper size/type are displayed on the screen. (See Chapter 4,
"Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)

● If you want to select a standard paper size:

❑ Select the desired paper size ➞ press [Next].

NOTE
To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].
❑ Select the desired paper type ➞ press [OK].
If the desired paper type is not displayed, press [Detailed Settings] ➞ select
the paper type from the list ➞ press [OK].
If you are copying onto the back side of a previously printed sheet, press [2nd
Side of 2-Sided Page].

NOTE
• [Transparency] can be selected only if [A4] is selected as the paper size.
• You can register paper types that are not displayed on the detailed settings list in
[Selecting the Paper Type]. For more information on storing the paper type, see
Chapter 6, "System Manager Settings," in the Reference Guide.

1-24 Reserved Copying

 ● If you want to select a nonstandard paper size:
❑ Press [Irreg. Size].
❑ Press [X] (horizontal axis) ➞ enter a value.
❑ Press [Y] (vertical axis) ➞ enter a value.
❑ Press [OK].
You can also press a size key in which a paper size is registered ([S1] to [S5]), 1
instead of entering a value.

Introduction to the Copy Functions

NOTE
To recall a paper size from a size key ([S1] to [S5]), it is necessary to register a
paper size in that key beforehand. For instructions on registering a paper size, see
Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.
❑ Press [Next].
❑ Select the desired paper type ➞ press [OK].
If the desired paper type is not displayed, press [Detailed Settings] ➞ select
the paper type from the list ➞ press [OK].
If you are copying onto the back side of a previously printed sheet, press [2nd
Side of 2-Sided Page].
The paper size/type currently loaded and the paper size/type reserved to be
loaded are displayed, as shown on the screen below.

The last paper size/type specified

for the reserved copy job
The paper size/type currently
loaded

NOTE
If there is more than one reserved job waiting to print, only the last paper size/type
specified for the reserved copy job is shown on the Paper Select screen and
Regular Copy Basic Features screen.

4 Press [Done].
This completes the settings for a reserved copy job using the stack bypass. The
subsequent steps show you how to load paper into the stack bypass and
complete the scanning and printing process of the reserved job.

Reserved Copying 1-25

 5 Press (Start).

6 When it is time for the reserved copy job to be printed, load

the specified paper into the stack bypass.

1 NOTE
• The specified paper size/type is displayed on the screen when it is time for the
Introduction to the Copy Functions

reserved copy job to be printed.

• Make sure to load the same paper size and type selected in step 3 into the stack
bypass. Printing does not start if paper of a different size or type is loaded.

7 Select the desired paper size.

If the following screen is displayed, adjust the width of the slide guides ➞ specify
the paper size ➞ press [OK].

If the following screen is displayed, adjust the width of the slide guides to match
the paper size stored in Stack Bypass Standard Settings, or set Stack Bypass
Standard Settings to 'Off' in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen). (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)

IMPORTANT
Set the paper size to the same size as the paper loaded in the stack bypass.

1-26 Reserved Copying

● If you want to select a standard paper size:
❑ Select the desired paper size ➞ press [Next].

NOTE
To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].
❑ Select the desired paper type ➞ press [OK].
If the desired paper type is not displayed, press [Detailed Settings] ➞ select
1
the paper type from the list ➞ press [OK].

Introduction to the Copy Functions

If you are copying onto the back side of a previously printed sheet, press [2nd
Side of 2-Sided Page].

● If you want to select a nonstandard paper size:

❑ Press [Irreg. Size].
❑ Press [X] (horizontal axis) ➞ enter a value.
❑ Press [Y] (vertical axis) ➞ enter a value.
❑ Press [OK].
You can also press a size key in which a paper size is registered ([S1] to [S5]),
instead of entering a value.

NOTE
To recall a paper size from a size key ([S1] to [S5]), it is necessary to register a
paper size in that key beforehand. For instructions on registering a paper size, see
Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.
❑ Press [Next].
❑ Select the desired paper type ➞ press [OK].
If the desired paper type is not displayed, press [Detailed Settings] ➞ select
the paper type from the list ➞ press [OK].
If you are copying onto the back side of a previously printed sheet, press [2nd
Side of 2-Sided Page].

Reserved Copying 1-27

 Interrupt Mode
1 This mode enables you to interrupt the current job or a reserved job to make priority
copies. This mode is useful if you need to make a rush copy during a long copy job.
Introduction to the Copy Functions

NOTE
• You can make interrupt copies whenever the machine is ready to scan.
• To cancel the Interrupt mode, press [Interrupt].
• To cancel previously set copy modes, press (Reset). (The Interrupt mode itself is not
canceled.)

1 Press [Interrupt].

If you want to make copies after changing the Department ID while Department
ID Management is enabled, press (Log In/Out) ➞ enter the Department ID and
password using - (numeric keys). (See Chapter 6, "System Manager
Settings," in the Reference Guide.)

NOTE
The current job does not stop printing immediately after you press [Interrupt].
Printing of the current job stops only when the actual printing of the priority or
interrupt copy starts.

2 Place your originals ➞ set the desired copy modes.

3 Press (Start).

1-28 Interrupt Mode

4 Once the originals are scanned, remove them from the
machine.

IMPORTANT
If you want to continue making interrupt copies, wait until the current interrupt copy
job is complete (end of printing). Then, repeat steps 1 to 4.
1

Introduction to the Copy Functions

Interrupt Mode 1-29

 Sample Set
1 This mode enables you to check the copy result before making multiple copies.
Introduction to the Copy Functions

IMPORTANT
[Sample Set] appears only if you set to make multiple copies of your original in the
Collate, Offset Collate, Rotate Collate, Staple, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Booklet, or
Transparency Interleaving mode. [Sample Set] does not appear if the Group or Offset
Group mode is set.

NOTE
If [All Pages] is selected, the sample sets are counted in the total number of copies
made.

1 Place your originals ➞ set the desired copy modes ➞ press

[Sample Set].

IMPORTANT
[Sample Set] is not displayed if only one copy is set.

1-30 Sample Set

2 Select [All Pages] or [Specified Pages] ➞ press [OK].

Introduction to the Copy Functions

● If you select [Specified Pages]:
❑ Press [First Page] and [Last Page] ➞ press [-] or [+] to set their respective page
numbers ➞ press [OK].

3 Press (Start).

NOTE
• If you select [Specified Pages], specify the page numbers of the output. Note that
the page numbers of the output may be different from those of the original.
• If you select [Specified Pages], the Staple, Hole Punch, or Booklet mode cannot be
set.
• You cannot change [All Pages] to [Specified Pages] or vice versa after the sample
set is output.
• If you select [Specified Pages], you cannot change the specified pages after the
sample set is output.

Sample Set 1-31

 4 Check the sample set ➞ select [Start Print], [Cancel], or
[Change Settings].

● To print the remaining prints:

❑ Press [Start Print].
1 ● To cancel copying:
Introduction to the Copy Functions

❑ Press [Cancel].

● To change the copy settings:

❑ Press [Change Settings] ➞ change the necessary settings ➞ press [Done].
To enter the number of copies, use - (numeric keys) and (Clear) to
clear your entry.
To change the exposure, press [ ] or [ ]. (See "Manual Exposure
Adjustment," on p. 3-2.)
To change the paper size, press [Paper Select]. (See "Paper Selection," on p.
1-13.)
To collate the copies, press [Finishing]. (See "Collating Copies/Prints," on p.
3-32.)
To set a margin for binding, press [Margin]. (See "Margin Mode," on p. 4-41.)
To make color balance adjustments, press [Color Balance]. (See "Adjusting
the Color," on p. 4-78.)
To embed hidden text in the background, press [Secure Watermark]. (See
"Embedding Hidden Text in the Background," on p. 4-99.)
To make two-sided copies, press [2-Sided Copy]. (See "Two-Sided Copying/
Printing," on p. 3-43.)
If you print one sample set and then change the settings, the machine will
print from the first set with the new settings.
If you want to check the changes that you have made, press [Sample Set] ➞
repeat the procedure from step 2.

1-32 Sample Set

Confirming/Changing/Canceling Selected Settings
You can use the Setting Confirmation screen to confirm, change, or cancel selected 1
copy modes.

Introduction to the Copy Functions

1 Press [Setting Confirmation].

2 Check the settings.

If the desired modes are set, skip to step 4. Otherwise, press the key of the copy
mode to be changed or canceled.

NOTE
A right triangle ( ) on a copy mode setting key indicates that more setting screens
are available by pressing the key.

3 Change or cancel the selected copy mode.

● To change a copy mode:

❑ Perform the same steps used for setting the mode. Change the setting as you
desire ➞ press [OK].

● To cancel a copy mode:

❑ Press [Cancel].

4 Press [Done].

Confirming/Changing/Canceling Selected Settings 1-33

1
Introduction to the Copy Functions

1-34 Confirming/Changing/Canceling Selected Settings

Introduction to the Mail Box
Functions 2
CHAPTER

This chapter is an introduction to the Mail Box functions.

Various Mail Box Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Flow of Mail Box Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Storing Originals into an Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Printing Documents Stored in an Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

Paper Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Canceling a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
While Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
While Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31

Reserving Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Storing Originals While Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Reserving Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34

Sample Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

Storing Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Changing the Name of a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47
Checking a Document's Detailed Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48
Erasing a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
Printing Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Moving/Duplicating a Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52
Editing/Checking the Contents of a Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54

2-1
 Various Mail Box Functions
If you press [Mail Box], the Inbox Selection screen appears. The Mail Box function
enables you to store the image data which is scanned by this machine, and the
data sent from a personal computer, as if storing documents in binders. The
2 documents (data) stored in an inbox can be kept confidential by setting a password,
and printed at any time with your desired print setting. Also, if you select the Merge
Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

Documents mode, you can print multiple documents as one document.

Scanning
I-Fax

Internet
1

Printing

Network
E-mail

PC

2-2 Various Mail Box Functions

 Inbox Selection Screen
You can store a name and/or password
for an inbox in Mail Box Settings (from
the Additional Functions screen).
(See Chapter 8, "Customizing
Settings.")
You can store a password for the Press to select the Memory
RX Inbox or the Confidential
Memory RX Inbox and make other
Fax Inboxes.
system-wide settings in System Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen).
(See Chapter 10, "System Manager
Settings," in the Sending Guide.) Select an Inbox

Document Selection Screen

Confidential Fax Inbox Memory RX Inbox User Inbox
2

Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

Documents forwarded by I-Fax documents received Scanned originals and
I-Fax are stored and in memory are stored and documents sent from
displayed here. displayed here. computers are stored and
displayed here.

Select a Document and Press

or

Print Screen Send Screen Scan Screen

Prints out documents stored Sends out documents stored Allows you to make various
in an inbox. Press [Change Pr. in an inbox. (See "Sending a settings for the scanning of
Settings] to change the print Document," on p. 6-12.) originals. (See "Storing
settings. (See "Printing Originals into an Inbox,"
Documents Stored in an on p. 2-12.)
Inbox," on p. 2-19.) Start

IMPORTANT
• The Memory RX Inbox and the Confidential Fax Inbox are available only if the optional
Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
• No more documents can be stored in inboxes if any of the following is true: (The numbers
below may vary depending on the remaining capacity of the hard disk.)
- When a total of 1,500 documents have been stored in all of the inboxes.
- When a total of about 6,000 pages of documents have been stored in all of the inboxes.

Various Mail Box Functions 2-3

 NOTE
It is recommended that you delete unwanted documents or image data from your inbox to
make space for storing new documents.

■ Inbox Selection Screen

The screen below, which appears when you select [Mail Box], is called the Inbox Selection
screen.
There are three types of inboxes: User Inboxes, the Memory RX Inbox, and Confidential
Fax Inboxes. An Inbox Selection screen is available for each type of inbox.
2 Inbox numbers, names, and available memory are displayed for each inbox. In addition,
an icon appears on the key of each inbox to indicate its status.
Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

is the icon for an empty inbox.

is the icon for an inbox with documents.

is the icon for an inbox that is set with a password.

b
a
c

User Inbox

Memory RX Inbox Confidential Fax Inbox

(Memory RX Inbox and
Divided Data RX Inbox)

2-4 Various Mail Box Functions

a User Inbox c Confidential Fax Inbox
Scanned documents and documents sent from If a document received through I-Fax matches
computers are stored in User Inbox. The stored the specified forwarding conditions, it is stored in
documents (data) can be printed at anytime with a Confidential Fax Inbox. The stored documents
your desired settings. For example, you can can be printed at anytime using the desired
merge the scanned documents and the settings.
documents sent from computer, then print and d Memory RX Inbox
staple them together. They can also be sent to
Received I-Fax documents in the memory of the
computers or by I-Fax at anytime using the
desired settings. machine are stored in the Memory RX Inbox.
The stored documents can be printed or sent to
b Memory RX Inbox
Received I-Fax documents in the memory of the
computers at anytime using the desired settings. 2
e Divided Data RX Inbox

Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

machine are stored in the Memory RX Inbox or
I-Fax documents received as divided data are
Divided Data RX Inbox. The stored documents
saved in the Divided Data RX Inbox, and
can be printed or sent to computers at anytime
using the desired settings. combined together as one document.

Various Mail Box Functions 2-5

 ■ Document Selection Screen
The screen below, which appears after you select the desired inbox, is called the
Document Selection screen.
If a password is set, the Document Selection screen appears after you enter the
password.
The screen that appears varies, depending on the type of inbox selected.
An icon indicating the conditions with which each document was scanned or saved is
displayed. For more information on the icons displayed in User Inboxes, see "Checking a
Document's Detailed Information," on p. 2-48. Following icons are displayed in the
Memory RX Inbox and Confidential Fax Inbox:
2 : Forwarded I-fax document or I-fax document saved in memory.
Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

e
f
a g
b h
c i
d

Document Selection Screen of the User Inbox

e
f
e
a
f
j
b b
i

Document Selection Screen of the Document Selection Screen of the

Memory RX Inbox Confidential Fax Inbox

2-6 Various Mail Box Functions

a Select All/Clear Selection f Erase
Press to select all of the documents in an inbox. Press to erase a document stored in an inbox.
If a document is selected, this key changes to g Print List
[Clear Selection].
Press to print a list of documents stored in a
b Print User Inbox.
Press to print the selected document. h Edit Menu
c Move/Duplicate Press to edit or check a document in a User
Press to move or duplicate documents to Inbox.
another User Inbox. i Send
d Scan Press to send a document stored in the User 2
Press to scan an original and store it in the Inbox or the Memory RX Inbox.

Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

selected inbox. j I-Fax Memory Lock
e Details Press to turn the I-Fax Memory Lock mode 'On'
Press to check the details of a document stored or 'Off' for the Memory RX Inbox in order to
in an inbox. receive I-faxes in memory.

■ Document Editing Screen

When you press [Edit Menu] on the Document Selection screen, the screen below
appears, which is called the Document Editing screen.
Use this screen to edit a document in a User Inbox.

c
d
a
b

a View Page c Merge and Save

Press to view the contents of the selected Press to combine multiple documents to create a
document. new document.
b Page Erase d Document Insertion
Press to erase certain pages from a document. Press to insert a document before a certain page
in another document, to create a new document.

Various Mail Box Functions 2-7

 ■ Print Screen
The screen below, which appears when you select a document and press [Print] on a
Document Selection screen, is called the Print screen.
Display this screen when you want to print documents that are stored in an inbox.
The screen that appears varies, depending on the type of inbox selected.

a b

2
d
Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

a Color Selection Drop-Down List d Sample Print

Press to select the color mode for printing. Press to print a sample of the document to check
b Change Pr. Settings the print result or the contents of the document.

Press to change the print settings. e Change The Copies

c Erase Doc. After Print. Press to set the number of prints when multiple
documents are selected. This key is displayed
Press to have a document automatically deleted
only when multiple documents are selected.
after it is printed.
f Start Print
Press to start printing.

2-8 Various Mail Box Functions

 ■ Change Print Settings Screen
The screen below, which appears when you press [Change Pr. Settings] on the Print
screen of a User Inbox, is called the Change Print Settings screen.
Display this screen when you want to change the print settings for a document.

a f

g
b
c
h
i
2
d

Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

e j

a Color Selection Drop-Down List g Erase Doc. After Print.

Press to select the color mode for printing. Press to have a document automatically deleted
b Sample Print after it is printed.

Press to print a sample of the document to check h Merge Documents

the print result or the contents of the document. Press to merge and print multiple documents as
c Paper Select one document. This key is displayed only when
multiple documents are selected.
Press to select the paper size/type and the
paper source. i Special Features
d Finishing Press to select and use the Special Features
modes available for printing.
Press to select or cancel the Collate, Group, or
Staple mode. j Initial Settings
e 2-Sided Printing Press to cancel all settings and restore the
machine to Standard Local Print Settings.
Press to make two-sided prints.
k Store Pr. Settings
f Original Settings
Press to store the print settings for documents.
Press to cancel the settings that you have
changed, and restore the original settings of the
document.

Various Mail Box Functions 2-9

 ■ Scan Screen
The screen below, which appears when you press [Scan] on the Document Selection
screen of a User Inbox, is called the Scan screen.
Display this screen when you want to scan an original and store it as a document in the
selected User Inbox.

b
f
2 c g
d
h
Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

e i
j

a Color Selection Drop-Down List g Scan Exposure

Press to select the color mode for scanning. Press [ ] or [ ] to manually control the scan
b 1:1 exposure. Press [A] to select or cancel the
automatic exposure control.
Press to scan your document in the same size
as your original. h Original Type Drop-Down List
c Copy Ratio Press to select the type of original ([Text/Printed
Img.], [Text/Photo], [Printed Image], [Photo],
Press to reduce or enlarge the scanning size of
[Text], [Map], or [Color Copy Original]) you are
the original.
going to scan.
d 2-Sided Original i Special Features
Press if you are scanning a two-sided original.
Press to select and use the Special Features
e Document Name modes available for scanning.
Press to assign the document a name. j Initial Settings
f Document Size Select Press to cancel all settings and restore the
Press to set the size of the original that you are machine to the Standard Scan settings.
going to scan.

2-10 Various Mail Box Functions

 ■ Send Screen
The screen below, which appears when you select a document and press [Send] on the
Document Selection screen of a User Inbox or the Memory RX Inbox, is called the Send
screen.
Display this screen when you want to send a document that you have stored in a User
Inbox using the Send function or a document received and stored in the Memory RX
Inbox.

d
a
b e
f
2
c

Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

g

i h
j
l
k

a Address Book g File Format

Press to select a destination from the Address Press to select the file format (TIFF/PDF Auto
Book. Select, TIFF/JPEG Auto Select, PDF) of the
b Network Add.Book document you are sending.

Press to select a destination from an LDAP h Send Settings

(Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) server. Press to specify the send settings, such as
c Details delayed sending, which enables you to send
documents at a specified time.
Press to check or change the destination
selected in the destination list. i One-touch Buttons
d Erase Press to select the destinations stored in
one-touch buttons.
Press to delete the destination selected in the
destination list. j New Address
e Cc Bcc Press to specify a destination not stored in the
Address Book.
Press to specify addresses destinations for the
Cc and Bcc addresses when sending an e-mail. k Reg.
f Delete After Sending Press to register new destinations in the Address
Book or one-touch buttons from the Send
Press to have the document automatically screen.
deleted after sending is complete.
l Start Send
Press to start sending.

Various Mail Box Functions 2-11

 Flow of Mail Box Operations
This section describes the flow of two basic Mail Box operations: scanning originals
and printing documents.

2 NOTE
• Before using the Mail Box function, it is useful to read the following topics:
Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

- Main power and control panel power (See Chapter 1, "Before You Start Using This
Machine," in the Reference Guide.)
- Entering characters from the touch panel display (See Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in
the Reference Guide.)
- Routine maintenance (See Chapter 7, "Routine Maintenance," in the Reference Guide.)
• If you are using a login service, log in and log out using the procedure for the login
service you are using before and after operating the machine.
- If you are using Department ID Management with the optional Card Reader-C1, see
Chapter 3, "Optional Equipment," in the Reference Guide.
- If you are using Department ID Management, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
- If you are performing user authentication using the SDL or SSO login service, see
Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the Reference Guide.

Storing Originals into an Inbox

Place the original that you want to scan in the feeder or on the platen glass, the
same as when you are using the Copy function.

IMPORTANT
You cannot store scanned originals in the Memory RX Inbox or a Confidential Fax Inbox.
For instructions on storing documents in the Memory RX Inbox and Confidential Fax
Inboxes, see Chapter 6, "Sending and Receiving Documents Using the Inboxes."

NOTE
• If the machine is used as a network printer, you can store data directly into an inbox from
a computer.
• To cancel all settings, press [Initial Settings]. (The machine returns to the Standard Scan
mode.) To return to the Inbox Selection screen, press (Reset).

2-12 Flow of Mail Box Operations

1 Press [Mail Box].

Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

Inbox Selection Screen

2 Select the desired User Inbox number.

If the desired User Inbox is not displayed, press [ ] or [ ].

If you enter the User Inbox number using - (numeric keys), make sure to
enter a two digit number ➞ press [OK].
If you make a mistake when entering the User Inbox number, press (Clear) ➞
enter the correct number.

NOTE
• If a document is stored in an inbox, that inbox is displayed with the documents icon
( ).
• If an inbox is set with a password, a locked icon ( ) is displayed next to the icon of
that inbox.
• If you make a mistake when selecting an inbox, press [Done] ➞ select the correct
inbox.

Flow of Mail Box Operations 2-13

 3 If the message <Enter the password using the numeric keys.>
appears, enter the password using - (numeric keys) ➞
press [OK].

2
Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

Enter the password set for the selected User Inbox. (See "Setting/Storing a User
Inbox," on p. 8-14.)
If a password is not set for the selected User Inbox, this step is not necessary.

4 Place your originals.

NOTE
For instructions on placing originals, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.

2-14 Flow of Mail Box Operations

5 Press [Scan].

Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

6 Specify the desired scan settings.

IMPORTANT
When the Auto-Color Select mode is set and your originals contain color sections,
the machine copies them in the Full Color mode. However, the machine may copy
the color originals in the Black mode under the following conditions. To avoid this,
set the color mode to 'Full Color'. (See "Changing Color Modes," on p. 3-54.)
- If the originals contain a few color sections
- If the color sections are located only on the left side (within 5 mm from the left
edge) or the right side (within 5 mm from the right edge) of the originals when
loading the originals into the feeder
- If the color sections of the originals are close to black
- If the originals contain light color densities

Flow of Mail Box Operations 2-15

 NOTE
• To adjust scan exposure and select original type, see "Exposure and Original Type
Settings," on p. 3-2.
• To change zoom ratio, see "Changing the Copy (Zoom) Ratio," on p. 3-10.
• To scan two-sided originals, see "Scanning Two-Sided Originals," on p. 3-52.
• To switch between the Full Color and Black modes, see "Changing Color Modes,"
on p. 3-54.
• Additional scan settings are available by pressing [Special Features].
• You can set various modes when scanning originals, similar to the Copy function.
2
● To specify a document name:
Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

❑ Press [Document Name] ➞ enter a name for the document ➞ press [OK].

NOTE
If you scan a document without giving it a name, the machine automatically assigns
the document a name using the year, month, day, and time the document was
scanned. For example, if a document is created at 1:35 PM, 41 seconds, on
January 15, 2006, its name will be <20060115133541>.

● To specify a document size:

❑ Press [Document Size Select].
❑ Select the document size ➞ press [Done].

If you want to scan an A3 original with an image that extends all the way to the
edges without the periphery of the original being cut off, place the original on
the platen glass, and press [A3+]. (See Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.)

2-16 Flow of Mail Box Operations

 IMPORTANT
• The Auto (Automatic Document Size Selection) mode cannot be used with the
Booklet Scanning, Original Frame Erase, Book Frame Erase, or Image
Combination mode.
• You cannot select [Auto] when scanning the following types of originals. Specify the
size of the document manually.
- Nonstandard size originals
- Highly transparent originals, such as transparencies
- Originals with an extremely dark background
- A5R or smaller originals on the platen glass
2

Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

NOTE
To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].

7 Press (Start).
If the following screen is displayed, follow the instructions on the touch panel
display ➞ press (Start) once for each original. When scanning is complete,
press [Done].

When scanning is complete, the scanned data is stored in the selected inbox.

Flow of Mail Box Operations 2-17

 IMPORTANT
• You cannot change settings, such as the document size or the scanning ratio, while
the machine is scanning.
• The stored data is deleted after three days (default setting). This setting can be
changed to any time period between 1 hour and 30 days. Also, data can be stored
indefinitely if the time period is set to '0' (Off). (See "Setting/Storing a User Inbox,"
on p. 8-14.)

NOTE
2 If you want to cancel scanning, press [Cancel] or (Stop).
Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

8 When scanning is complete, remove your originals.

2-18 Flow of Mail Box Operations

Printing Documents Stored in an Inbox
This section describes the procedure for printing out documents stored in an inbox
on the machine. If the machine is connected to a network, you can also specify
printing from your computer. For more information on how to operate the machine
from your computer, see Chapter 2, "Checking and Managing Functions," in the
Remote UI Guide.

IMPORTANT 2
• You can print documents stored in the Memory RX Inbox and Confidential Fax Inboxes

Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

only with the settings that were used when the documents were received.
• A document stored in the Memory RX Inbox is automatically deleted after printing.

NOTE
• You can select and print up to 32 documents in one inbox at a time. If you merge
documents, you can select and print up to 100 documents. However, if there are reserved
jobs in the inbox, the number of documents you can select and print varies, depending on
the number of documents reserved.
• You can only select multiple documents when the documents are stored in the same
User Inbox. To print multiple documents stored in different User Inboxes, you need to
move the documents to one User Inbox beforehand. (See "Moving/Duplicating a
Document," on p. 2-52.)
• If you do not change the print settings when printing out documents stored in inboxes
from a computer or using the Store In User Inbox mode of the Copy function, documents
sent from computers are printed with the settings set at the computers, and the
documents scanned into memory are printed with Standard Local Print Settings. (See
Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
• If you want to print a document stored in the machine from a computer or using [Store In
User Inbox] on the Copy Basic Features screen with the settings that were set when the
document was stored, do not print the document from the Change Print Settings screen.
If you print the document from the Change Print Settings screen, the document may not
be printed with the same settings that were set when the document was stored.
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard Local Print Settings, press
[Initial Settings]. To return to the Inbox Selection screen, press (Reset).
• A User Inbox is used as an example in this section.

Flow of Mail Box Operations 2-19

 1 Press [Mail Box].

2
Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

2 Press the desired User Inbox number.

If the desired User Inbox is not displayed, press [ ] or [ ].

If you enter the User Inbox number using - (numeric keys), make sure to
enter a two digit number ➞ press [OK].
If you make a mistake when entering the User Inbox number, press (Clear) ➞
enter the correct number.

NOTE
• If a document is stored in an inbox, that inbox is displayed with the documents icon
( ).
• If an inbox is set with a password, a locked icon ( ) is displayed next to the icon of
that inbox.
• If you make a mistake when selecting an inbox, press [Done] ➞ select the correct
inbox.

2-20 Flow of Mail Box Operations

3 If the message <Enter the password using the numeric keys.>
appears, enter the password using - (numeric keys) ➞
press [OK].

Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

Enter the password set for the selected User Inbox. (See "Setting/Storing a User
Inbox," on p. 8-14.)
If a password is not set for the selected User Inbox, this step is not necessary.

4 Select the document that you want to print ➞ press [Print].

If there are seven or more stored documents, press [ ] or [ ] to display the

other documents.
You can select multiple documents stored in the User Inbox.
To select all of the documents (up to 100 documents from the top) in the User
Inbox, press [Select All (Max 100 doc.)]. If a document is already selected, this
key appears as [Clear Selection] instead.

NOTE
• The selected documents are numbered in the order specified, and are printed in
that order.
• You can cancel a selection by selecting the document again.
• To cancel all documents, press [Clear Selection]. ([Clear Selection] changes to
[Select All (Max 100 doc.)].)

Flow of Mail Box Operations 2-21

 5 If you want to change the print settings, press [Change Pr.
Settings].

2
Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

To change the number of prints, enter the desired number using - (numeric
keys).
If multiple documents are selected, you can change the number of prints by
pressing [Change The Copies].

If you do not want to change the print settings, proceed to step 7.

6 Select the print settings on the Change Print Settings screen.

2-22 Flow of Mail Box Operations

 NOTE
• If you press [Original Settings], the settings for documents stored in inboxes from a
computer or using the Store In User Inbox mode of the Copy function are returned
to the settings specified at the computer, and the settings for documents scanned
and recorded at the machine are returned to Standard Local Print Settings. (See
Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
• You can set the color selection, paper selection, 2-Sided printing, finishing, and
special features on the Change Print Settings screen.

2
7 Press [Start Print].

Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

When one document is selected

When multiple documents are selected

If you want to print a sample of the document, press [Sample Print]. (See "Sample
Print," on p. 2-42.)
If you want to store the print settings for documents, press [Store Pr. Settings].
(See "Storing Print Settings," on p. 2-45.)
If you want to automatically delete the selected document after it is printed, press
[Erase Doc. After Print.].
If there is a current or reserved print job, the machine will start printing your
document after that job is complete.

Flow of Mail Box Operations 2-23

 When printing starts, the following screen appears.

2
Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

When printing is complete, the display returns to the Inbox Selection screen.

NOTE
• If you notice a difference between the document size specified when scanning
originals and the actual print size, you can try to eliminate this error by making a
Zoom Fine Adjustment in Adjustment/Cleaning (from the Additional Functions
screen). (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
• You can change the print density or cancel printing while the machine is printing.
• To cancel printing, press [Cancel]. (You cannot cancel printing by pressing
(Stop).)
• To reserve the next print job, press [Done] ➞ select the inbox containing the
document you want to print ➞ select the document ➞ press [Print]. (See
"Reserving Jobs," on p. 2-33.)

2-24 Flow of Mail Box Operations

Paper Selection
You can specify the paper size when printing out documents stored in User
Inboxes.

IMPORTANT
2
• You cannot change the print settings when printing documents stored in the Memory RX

Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

Inbox or Confidential Fax Inboxes.
• When printing on special types of paper, such as heavy paper or transparencies, be sure
to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavy paper. If the type of
paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the
fixing unit may become dirty, or the paper could jam, and a service repair may be
needed.

NOTE
• For information on paper types, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the Reference
Guide.
• For instructions on entering values in inches, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.

1 Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to

print ➞ press [Print] ➞ [Change Pr. Settings] ➞ [Paper Select].

Paper Selection 2-25

 NOTE
• If you press [Original Settings], the settings for documents stored in inboxes from a
computer or using the Store In User Inbox mode of the Copy function are returned
to the settings specified at the computer, and the settings for documents scanned
and recorded at the machine are returned to the Standard Local Print Settings.
(See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
• The paper size/type that can be used may vary depending on the settings for the
finisher. (See "Collating Copies/Prints," on p. 3-32.)

2
2 Select the desired paper size.
Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

IMPORTANT
If you want to print a scanned document whose size has been specified as [A3+] in
Document Size Select, load the stack bypass or paper drawer with 320 x 450 mm
or 305 x 457 mm paper.

NOTE
• If you select [Transparency] or [Labels], make sure that you do not specify any
Finishing modes (Collate, Group, or Staple).
• If Stack Bypass Standard Settings in Common Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) is set to 'On', and the paper size/type have been stored, the
selected paper size/type are displayed on the screen. (See Chapter 4,
"Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)

● If you want to set the machine to automatically select a paper size:

❑ Press [Auto].

2-26 Paper Selection

● If you want to select a paper size manually:
❑ Select the desired paper size.

NOTE
• The paper sizes/types are indicated by icons on the touch panel display, in the
order in which they are loaded in the paper drawers.
• Icons indicating the type of paper loaded in each paper drawer can be displayed on
paper selection screens, if you store that information into the machine beforehand.
(See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
• indicates that the paper is set vertically, and indicates that the paper is set 2
horizontally. The suffix <R> (such as in A4R) used in paper size designations

Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

indicates that the paper is loaded in a paper drawer or the stack bypass
horizontally.

● If you want to select a standard paper size:

❑ Press [Stack Bypass].
If you want to select the stack bypass when a paper size/type is already
selected for the current or reserved job, press [Stack Bypass Settings] to
specify the desired paper size/type.
❑ Select the desired paper size ➞ press [Next].

NOTE
To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].
❑ Select the desired paper type ➞ press [OK].

Paper Selection 2-27

 If the desired paper type is not displayed, press [Detailed Settings] ➞ select
the paper type from the list ➞ press [OK].

2
Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

If you are printing on the back side of a previously printed sheet, press [2nd
Side of 2-Sided Page].

NOTE
• [Transparency] can be selected only if [A4] is selected as the paper size.
• You can register paper types that are not displayed on the detailed settings list in
[Selecting the Paper Type]. For more information on storing the paper type, see
Chapter 6, "System Manager Settings," in the Reference Guide.

● If you want to select a nonstandard paper size:

❑ Press [Stack Bypass].
If you want to select the stack bypass when a paper size/type is already
selected for the current or reserved job, press [Stack Bypass Settings] to
specify the desired paper size/type.
❑ Press [Irreg. Size].
❑ Press [X] (horizontal axis) ➞ enter a value.
❑ Press [Y] (vertical axis) ➞ enter a value.
❑ Press [OK].

You can also press a size key in which a paper size is registered ([S1] to [S5]),
instead of entering a value.

2-28 Paper Selection

 NOTE
To recall a paper size from a size key ([S1] to [S5]), it is necessary to register a
paper size in that key beforehand. For instructions on registering a paper size, see
Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.
❑ Press [Next].
❑ Select the desired paper type ➞ press [OK].
❑ If the desired paper type is not displayed, press [Detailed Settings] ➞ select the
paper type from the list ➞ press [OK].
If you are printing onto the back side of a previously printed sheet, press [2nd
2
Side of 2-Sided Page].

Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

IMPORTANT
If you select a nonstandard paper size, the Rotate Collate, Rotate Group, Offset
Collate, Offset Group, Staple, 2-Sided Printing, Booklet, Cover/Sheet Insertion,
Cover/Job Separator, or Tab Paper Creation mode cannot be specified.

3 Press [Done].

4 Press [Start Print].

Paper Selection 2-29

 Canceling a Job
You can cancel the scanning of a document to be stored in an inbox from the touch
panel display or by pressing (Stop) on the control panel.

2 However, the printing of a document stored in an inbox can only be canceled from
the touch panel display.
Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

While Scanning

Using the Touch Panel Display

1 Press [Cancel] on the pop-up screen that appears while the

machine is scanning.

The job is canceled.

2 Remove the original.

Using the Stop Key

1 Press (Stop).
The job is canceled.

2 Remove the original.

2-30 Canceling a Job

While Printing

Using the Touch Panel Display

1 Press [Cancel] on the pop-up screen that appears while the

machine is printing.
2

Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

The job is canceled.

Using the System Monitor Screen

1 Press [System Monitor].

Canceling a Job 2-31

 2 Press [Print Status] ➞ [Status] ➞ select the print job that you
want to cancel ➞ press [Cancel].

2
Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

You cannot select multiple jobs and cancel them all at once. Select and cancel
one job at a time.

3 Press [Yes].
The print job is canceled.

NOTE
The canceled job is displayed as <NG> (No Good) on the Log screen.

4 Press [Done].
The display returns to the Inbox Selection screen.

2-32 Canceling a Job

Reserving Jobs
You can set the machine to scan originals even while it is printing or waiting to
process a job.

NOTE 2
• You can specify up to 32 documents to be reserved, including the current job.

Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

• You can set different modes and paper sources, including the stack bypass for each
reserved job.
• A User Inbox is used as an example in this section.

Storing Originals While Printing

You can scan and store an original while the machine is printing.

1 Press [Done] on the pop-up screen that appears while the

machine is printing ➞ select the desired User Inbox number ➞
press [Scan].

If the screen displayed on the touch panel display is from a function other than
the Mail Box function, press [Done] ➞ [Mail Box] to display the Inbox Selection
screen.

NOTE
In the above example, User Inbox 00 has one document stored in it already.

Reserving Jobs 2-33

 2 Place your originals ➞ specify the desired scan modes ➞
press (Start).

NOTE
You can assign a document name before scanning, or you can change the
(time-coded) assigned name after you scan the document. (See step 7 of "Storing
Originals into an Inbox," on p. 2-12, or "Changing the Name of a Document," on p.
2-47.)

2
Reserving Print Jobs
Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

Reserved printing can be specified in the following cases:

■ While the Machine Is Waiting

You can specify print settings while the machine is in the waiting state, such as when the
power is just turned ON, or after a paper jam is cleared. Printing automatically begins
when the machine is ready.

NOTE
You can specify reserved printing while the machine is in the waiting state in the following
cases:
- Between the time that the machine is turned ON and when it is ready to print
- Between the time that the machine wakes up from the Energy Saver mode and when it
is ready to print
- After a paper jam is cleared
- After a cover on the main unit or an optional unit, such as a finisher, is opened and
closed

■ While the Machine Is Printing

You can specify print settings for a new job while the machine is printing. Printing of the
new job automatically begins when the current job is complete.

Reserving Print Jobs

1 Press [Done] on the pop-up screen that appears while the

machine is printing.
If the screen displayed on the touch panel display is from a function other than
the Mail Box function, press [Done] ➞ [Mail Box] to display the Inbox Selection
screen.

2-34 Reserving Jobs

2 Select the desired User Inbox number and document to print
➞ press [Print].

Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

3 Print the selected document.

● If you want to print without changing any settings:

❑ Press [Start Print].

Reserving Jobs 2-35

 ● If you want to change the print settings:
❑ Press [Change Pr. Settings] ➞ specify the desired print settings ➞ press [Start
Print].
If you select 33 or more documents to print at one time, the screen below is
displayed. To print out the first 32 documents that you selected, press [Yes].
Press [No], if you want to cancel printing altogether.

2
Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

If the machine can no longer accept any more reserved jobs, the screen
below is displayed. Press [OK] ➞ try reserving the job again after the current
job is complete.

IMPORTANT
You cannot change print settings or make sample prints when printing documents
stored in the Memory RX Inbox or Confidential Fax Inboxes.

NOTE
• To make a sample print, press [Sample Print]. (See "Sample Print," on p. 2-42.)
• If you want to automatically delete a document after it is printed, press [Erase Doc.
After Print.].

2-36 Reserving Jobs

Using the Stack Bypass
Reserved printing using the stack bypass is possible only if paper is being fed from
the stack bypass for the current job.
The following example assumes that A3 plain paper is being fed from the stack
bypass for the current job, and that you are selecting A4 plain paper to be fed from
the stack bypass for a reserved job.

IMPORTANT
When printing on special types of paper, such as heavy paper or transparencies, be sure 2
to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavy paper. If the type of

Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the
fixing unit may become dirty, or the paper could jam, and a service repair may be
needed.

NOTE
• If Stack Bypass Standard Settings in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) is set to 'On', reserved printing can be performed only for the registered paper
size and type. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
• For information on paper types, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the Reference
Guide.
• For instructions on entering values in inches, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.

1 Press [Done] on the pop-up screen that appears while the

machine is printing.
Normally, when reserved copying is not being set, the Stack Bypass Settings
screen is automatically displayed when paper is loaded into the stack bypass.

2 Select the desired User Inbox number and document to print

➞ press [Print] ➞ [Change Pr. Settings] ➞ [Paper Select] ➞
[Stack Bypass Settings].

Reserving Jobs 2-37

 3 Select the desired paper size.

NOTE
• If you select [Transparency] or [Labels], make sure that you do not specify any
Finishing modes (Collate, Group, or Staple).
• If Stack Bypass Standard Settings in Common Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) is set to 'On', and the paper size/type have been stored, the
selected paper size/type are displayed on the screen. (See Chapter 4,
"Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
2
● If you want to select a standard paper size:
Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

❑ Select the desired paper size ➞ press [Next].

NOTE
To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].
❑ Select the desired paper type ➞ press [OK].
❑ If the desired paper type is not displayed, press [Detailed Settings] ➞ select the
paper type from the list ➞ press [OK].
If you are printing onto the back side of a previously printed sheet, press [2nd
Side of 2-Sided Page].

NOTE
• [Transparency] can be selected only if [A4] is selected as the paper size.
• You can register paper types that are not displayed on the detailed settings list in
[Selecting the Paper Type]. For more information on storing the paper type, see
Chapter 6, "System Manager Settings," in the Reference Guide.

● If you want to select a nonstandard paper size:

❑ Press [Irreg. Size].
❑ Press [X] (horizontal axis) ➞ enter a value.
❑ Press [Y] (vertical axis) ➞ enter a value.
❑ Press [OK].
You can also press a size key in which a paper size is registered ([S1] to [S5]),
instead of entering a value.

NOTE
To recall a paper size from a size key ([S1] to [S5]), it is necessary to register a
paper size in that key beforehand. For instructions on registering a paper size, see
Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.
❑ Press [Next].

2-38 Reserving Jobs

 ❑ Select the desired paper type ➞ press [OK].
If the desired paper type is not displayed, press [Detailed Settings] ➞ select
the paper type from the list ➞ press [OK].
If you are printing onto the back side of a previously printed sheet, press [2nd
Side of 2-Sided Page].
The paper size/type currently loaded and the paper size/type reserved to be
loaded are displayed, as shown on the screen below.

The Last Paper Size/Type Specified 2

for the Reserved Print Job

Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

The Paper Size/Type Currently
Loaded

NOTE
If there is more than one reserved job waiting to print, only the last paper size/type
specified for the reserved print job is shown on the Paper Select screen.

4 Press [Done].
This completes the settings for reserving a print job using the stack bypass. The
subsequent steps show you how to start printing and load paper into the stack
bypass.

5 Press [Start Print].

6 When it is time for the reserved print job to be printed, load

the specified paper into the stack bypass.

NOTE
• The specified paper size/type is displayed on the screen when it is time for the
reserved print job to be printed.
• Make sure to load the same paper size and type selected in step 3 into the stack
bypass. Printing does not start if paper of a different size or type is loaded.

Reserving Jobs 2-39

 7 Select the desired paper size.
If the following screen is displayed, adjust the width of the slide guides ➞ specify
the paper size ➞ press [OK].

2
Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

If the following screen is displayed, adjust the width of the slide guides to match
the paper size stored in Stack Bypass Standard Settings, or set Stack Bypass
Standard Settings to 'Off' in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen). (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)

IMPORTANT
Set the paper size to the same size as the paper loaded in the stack bypass.

2-40 Reserving Jobs

 ● If you want to select a standard paper size:
❑ Select the desired paper size ➞ press [Next].

NOTE
To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].
❑ Select the paper type.
If the desired paper type is not displayed, press [Detailed Settings] ➞ select
the paper type from the list ➞ press [OK].
If you are copying onto the back side of a previously printed sheet, press [2nd 2
Side of 2-Sided Page].

Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

● If you want to select a nonstandard paper size:
❑ Press [Irreg. Size].
❑ Press [X] (horizontal axis) ➞ enter a value.
❑ Press [Y] (vertical axis) ➞ enter a value.
❑ Press [OK].
You can also press a size key in which a paper size is registered ([S1] to [S5]),
instead of entering a value.

NOTE
To recall a paper size from a size key ([S1] to [S5]), it is necessary to register a
paper size in that key beforehand. For instructions on registering a paper size, see
Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.
❑ Press [Next].
❑ Select the paper type ➞ press [OK].
If the desired paper type is not displayed, press [Detailed Settings] ➞ select
the paper type from the list ➞ press [OK].
If you are printing onto the back side of a previously printed sheet, press [2nd
Side of 2-Sided Page].

8 Press [OK].

Reserving Jobs 2-41

 Sample Print
Before making multiple prints of a document stored in an inbox, you can print a
sample of it to check its contents or the print results with the settings that were set
when the document was stored.
2
Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

IMPORTANT
• You cannot make a sample print of documents stored in the Memory RX Inbox or
Confidential Fax Inboxes.
• [Sample Print] appears only if you set to make multiple prints of the document in the
Collate, Offset Collate, Rotate Collate, Staple, Cover/Job Separator, Cover Sheet
Insertion, or Booklet mode. [Sample Print] does not appear if the Group or Offset Group
mode is set.

NOTE
If [All Pages] is selected, the sample prints are counted in the total number of prints
made.

1 Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to

print ➞ press [Print] ➞ [Sample Print].

IMPORTANT
[Sample Print] is not displayed if only one print is set.

2-42 Sample Print

2 Select [All Pages] or [Specified Pages] ➞ press [OK].

Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

● If you select [Specified Pages]:
❑ Press [First Page] and [Last Page] ➞ press [-] or [+] to set their respective page
numbers.

3 Press [Start Print].

NOTE
• If you select [Specified Pages], specify the page numbers of the output. Note that
the page numbers of the output may be different from those of the stored
document.
• If you select [Specified Pages], the Staple, Hole Punch, or Booklet mode cannot be
set.
• You cannot change [All Pages] to [Specified Pages] or vice versa after the sample
print is output.
• If you select [Specified Pages], you cannot change the specified pages after the
sample print is output.

4 Check the sample print ➞ select [Start Print], [Cancel], or

[Change Settings].

● To print the remaining prints:

❑ Press [Start Print].

● To cancel printing:
❑ Press [Cancel].

Sample Print 2-43

 ● To change the print settings:
❑ Press [Change Settings] ➞ change the necessary settings ➞ press [Done].
To enter the number of prints, use - (numeric keys) and (Clear) to clear
your entry.
To change the paper size, press [Paper Select]. (See "Paper Selection," on p.
1-13.)
To collate the prints, press [Finishing]. (See "Collating Copies/Prints," on p.
3-32.)
2 To make 2-Sided prints, press [2-Sided Printing]. (See "Two-Sided Copying/
Printing," on p. 3-43.)
Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

To change the color mode for printing, press the color selection drop-down list
➞ select the color mode. (See "Changing Color Modes," on p. 3-54.
If you want to check the changes that you have made, press [Sample Print] ➞
repeat step 2.

NOTE
Press [Change Pr. Settings] to change the print settings.

2-44 Sample Print

Storing Print Settings
You can store the print settings for documents stored in a user inbox. This is useful
to print most frequently printed documents with the same print settings.

IMPORTANT
2

Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

You cannot select multiple documents and store the print settings at the same time.

NOTE
• The printing settings in memory are not erased, even if the power is turned OFF.
• You can store the following print settings and modes: the number of printouts, paper
select, 2-Sided Printing, Finishing, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Booklet, and Margin.
• If Erase Document After Printing is set to 'On' from the Standard Local Print Settings, the
selected documents are erased after the documents for which the print settings are
stored are printed.
• You can overwrite the stored print settings.

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ select the document

to print ➞ press [Print] ➞ [Change Pr. Setting].

2 Specify the print settings that you want to store ➞ press

[Store Pr. Settings].

NOTE
In the above example, the Booklet mode is selected.

Storing Print Settings 2-45

 3 A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to overwrite
the previous settings. Press [Yes].

NOTE
• The document for which the print settings are stored is overwritten, its name is
changed to the current date and time, and the document moves to the end of list.
• For details of the document icons, see "Editing/Checking the Contents of a
Document," on p. 2-54.
2
4 Press [Done].
Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

2-46 Storing Print Settings

Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox
From the Inbox Selection screen, you can change the document's name, check a
document's detailed information, move and duplicate a document, and view the
contents of the User Inboxes.
2

Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

Changing the Name of a Document
IMPORTANT
You cannot change the name of documents stored in the Memory RX Inbox or
Confidential Fax Inboxes.

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ select the document

whose name you want to change ➞ press [Details].

NOTE
If you select multiple documents and press [Details], only the details of the selected
(highlighted) document are displayed.

2 Press [Change Document Name].

3 Enter a new name for the document ➞ press [OK].

IMPORTANT
You cannot press [OK] without entering a name for the document.

Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox 2-47

 4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Inbox Selection screen
appears.

Checking a Document's Detailed Information

1 Select the desired Inbox ➞ select the document whose

2 detailed information you want to check ➞ press [Details].
Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

To select a document from the Memory RX Inbox, refer to step 1 of "Printing a

Document in the Memory RX inbox," on p. 6-4.
To select a document from the Confidential Fax Inbox, refer to step 1 of "Printing
a Document in the Confidential Fax Inbox," on p. 6-11.

NOTE
If you select multiple documents and press [Details], only the details of the selected
(highlighted) document are displayed.

2 Check the detailed information ➞ press [Done] repeatedly

until the Inbox Selection screen appears.

2-48 Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox

NOTE
• The color mode used when the document is scanned is displayed for <Color/
Black>.
• The icons for documents stored from a computer or using the Store In User Inbox
mode of the Copy function and documents with print settings are icons with print
settings. However, if you perform Merge and Save or Document Insertion with
these documents, the icons for the newly created documents are icons without
print settings.

Icon Document Type Color/Black 2

Without Print Settings 'Black' or 'Black and White'

Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

With Print Settings 'Black' or 'Black and White'

Without Print Settings 'Color' or 'Mixed'

RGB
With Print Settings 'Color' or 'Mixed'
RGB
Without Print Settings 'Black'
CMYK*1
With Print Settings 'Black'
CMYK*1
Without Print Settings 'Color' or 'Mixed'
CMYK*1
With Print Settings 'Color' or 'Mixed'
CMYK*1
*1: If the document is stored in inboxes from the PS driver, the color format will be CMYK.
The CMYK documents cannot be sent from the inbox. To print full color CMYK documents, only
[Auto-Color Select] can be specified. To print black CMYK documents, [Black] can also be specified.

Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox 2-49

 Erasing a Document

1 Select the desired Inbox ➞ select the document that you want
to erase ➞ press [Erase].

2
Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

To select a document from the Memory RX Inbox, refer to step 1 of "Printing a

Document in the Memory RX inbox," on p. 6-4.
To select a document from the Confidential Fax Inbox, refer to step 1 of "Printing
a Document in the Confidential Fax Inbox," on p. 6-11.
To select all of the documents (up to 100 documents from the top) in the User
Inbox, press [Select All (Max 100 doc.)]. If a document is already selected, this
key appears as [Clear Selection] instead.
To erase multiple documents in the Memory RX Inbox or in a Confidential Fax
Inbox, select and erase one document at a time.

NOTE
• You can cancel a selection by selecting the document again.
• To cancel all documents, press [Clear Selection]. ([Clear Selection] changes to
[Select All (Max 100 doc.)].)

2 Press [Yes].

3 Press [Done].

2-50 Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox

Printing Lists
You can print a list of documents stored in a User Inbox.

IMPORTANT
You cannot print a list of documents stored in the Memory RX Inbox or Confidential Fax
Inboxes.

NOTE
2
• The document list can be printed only if A3, B4, A4, or A4R paper (plain, recycled, or

Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

color paper) is loaded in a paper source that is set to 'On' when you press [Other] to
select a paper source in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen). (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference
Guide.)
• The following information is printed: The User Inbox number, type of document,
document name, paper size, number of pages, user name, and date and time.

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ press [Print List].

2 Press [Yes].

Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox 2-51

 Moving/Duplicating a Document
IMPORTANT
You cannot move or duplicate a document stored in the Memory RX Inbox or a
Confidential Fax Inbox to another inbox. Similarly, you cannot move or duplicate a
document stored in a User Inbox to the Memory RX Inbox or any Confidential Fax Inbox.

2
1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ select the document
Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

that you want to move or duplicate ➞ press [Move/Duplicate].

To select all of the documents (up to 100 documents from the top) in the User
Inbox, press [Select All (Max 100 doc.)]. If a document is already selected, this
key appears as [Clear Selection] instead.

NOTE
• You can cancel a selection by selecting the document again.
• To cancel all documents, press [Clear Selection]. ([Clear Selection] changes to
[Select All (Max 100 doc.)].)

2-52 Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox

2 Select the inbox into which you want to move or duplicate the
document ➞ press [Start].

Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

If you want to duplicate the selected document, press [Duplicate Document].
You cannot move or duplicate a document to multiple inboxes at once.
If the document cannot be moved or duplicated to the selected inbox, a
message appears telling you that the move or duplication cannot be performed.
If the document cannot be moved or duplicated to the selected inbox, it remains
in the original User Inbox.
If an error occurs while multiple documents are being moved or duplicated, the
number of documents that are moved or duplicated successfully is displayed.

NOTE
• The name of the moved or duplicated document is the same as that of the original
document.
• If the control panel power switch is turned OFF while documents are being moved
or duplicated, only those documents that have been processed up to the time when
the power is turned OFF, are moved or duplicated successfully.

3 Press [Done].

Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox 2-53

 Editing/Checking the Contents of a Document
You can edit or check documents in User Inboxes.

IMPORTANT
You cannot edit a document which has been stored in the Memory RX Inbox or a
Confidential Fax Inbox.

2 Checking an Image in a Document

Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ select the document

whose contents you want to view ➞ press [Edit Menu] ➞ [View
Page].

NOTE
If you press [View Page] while multiple documents are selected, only the contents
of the selected (highlighted) document are displayed.

2 Press [ ] or [ ] to display the page that you want to check.

2-54 Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox

 3 Check the contents of the page ➞ press [Done].
Press [ ] or [ ] to change the magnification of the displayed image.
Press [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] to move around the magnified image.
The position of the image shown in can be checked.

4 Press [Done].
2
Storing Multiple Documents as One Document

Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

This mode enables you to combine multiple documents in the same inbox as one
document to create a new document.

IMPORTANT
• You cannot use the Merge and Save mode, if the resolution of either document is less
than 600 x 600 dpi.
• Documents with different color formats cannot be merged.
• You can set the Merge and Save mode only for documents in the same inbox.
• If there are 1,500 documents in all of the User Inboxes, you cannot perform the Merge
and Save mode.

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ select the documents

to be merged in the order in which you want to merge them ➞
press [Edit Menu] ➞ [Merge and Save].

Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox 2-55

 2 Press [Doc. Name after Merg.] ➞ enter the document's name ➞
press [OK] ➞ [Start].

2
Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

If the memory is full while you are merging and saving, a message informing you
that you cannot merge is displayed.

NOTE
• If you create a document without giving it a name, the machine automatically
assigns the document a name using the year, month, day, and time the document
was created. For example, if a document is created at 1:35 PM, 41 seconds, on
January 15, 2006, its name will be <20060115133541>.
• If print settings have been stored for the selected documents, the settings are not
carried over to the new document.

3 Press [Done].

Inserting a Document into Another Document

This mode enables you to insert a document before a specified page of another
document in the same User Inbox, to create a new document.

IMPORTANT
• You cannot use the Document Insertion mode if the resolution of either document is less
than 600 x 600 dpi.
• Documents with different color formats cannot be merged.
• You can set the Document Insertion mode only for documents in the same User Inbox.
• If there are 1,500 documents in all of the User Inboxes, you cannot set the Document
Insertion mode.

2-56 Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ select the document
into which you want to insert another document ➞ press [Edit
Menu] ➞ [Document Insertion].

Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

NOTE
If you select multiple documents and press [Document Insertion], the selected
(highlighted) document becomes the document that is inserted.

2 Select the document you want to insert.

A checkmark is displayed to the left of the selected document.

You can cancel a selection by selecting the document again.

IMPORTANT
You cannot select multiple documents.

3 Enter the number of the page before which you want to insert
the selected document using - (numeric keys) ➞ press
[Next].
You can check images stored in the document in which you are inserting by
pressing [View Page]. (See "Checking an Image in a Document," on p. 2-54.)

Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox 2-57

 4 Press [Doc. Name after Insert.] ➞ enter the name of the
document ➞ press [OK] ➞ [Start].
If memory is insufficient while you are using the Document Insertion mode, a
message appears to inform you that you cannot insert the document.

NOTE
• If you create a document without giving it a name, the machine automatically
assigns the document a name using the year, month, day, and time the document
2 was created. For example, if a document is created at 1:35 PM, 41 seconds, on
January 15, 2006, its name will be <20060115133541>.
Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

• If print settings have been stored for the selected documents, the settings are not
carried over to the new document.

5 Press [Done].

Erasing Part of a Document

This mode enables you to erase pages from a document that is stored in a User
Inbox.

IMPORTANT
If you select all the pages of a document, the entire document is erased.

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ select the document

containing the pages you want to erase ➞ press [Edit Menu] ➞
[Page Erase].

NOTE
If you select multiple documents and press [Page Erase], the selected (highlighted)
document becomes the document pages will be erased from.

2-58 Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox

2 Press [Erase Single Page] or [Erase Pages Consecutively] ➞
specify the number(s) of the page(s) you want to erase.

● If [Erase Single Page] is selected:

❑ Select the page to be erased using [-] and [+].

Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

You can check image stored in the document you have selected by pressing
[View Page]. (See "Checking an Image in a Document," on p. 2-54.)

● If [Erase Pages Consecutively] is selected:

❑ Press [First Page] and [Last Page] ➞ select the first and last pages to be
erased using [-] or [+].

You can check image stored in the document you have selected by pressing
[View Page]. (See "Checking an Image in a Document," on p. 2-54.)

3 Press [Start].

4 Press [Yes].

5 Press [Done].

Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox 2-59

2
Introduction to the Mail Box Functions

2-60 Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox

Basic Copying and Mail Box
Features 3
CHAPTER

This chapter describes the basic Copying and Mail Box features.

Exposure and Original Type Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Manual Exposure Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Original Type Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Automatic Exposure Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Exposure Adjustment during Copying/Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8

Changing the Copy (Zoom) Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Preset Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Zoom by Percentage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Auto Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Entire Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Reducing/Enlarging Using the Original and Copy/Record Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Setting the X and Y Axes Independently . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Poster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25

Collating Copies/Prints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Page Order (Collate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
Same Page (Group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Page Order (Staple) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40

Two-Sided Copying/Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

1 to 2-Sided . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
2 to 2-Sided . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46
2 to 1-Sided . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48
Book to 2-Sided . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49

Scanning Two-Sided Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

Changing Color Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-56
Mail Box (Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-57
Mail Box (Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-58

Merging Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59

3-1
 Exposure and Original Type Settings

IMPORTANT
For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with this mode, see
"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.

NOTE
3 You can change the exposure while the machine is printing.
Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

Manual Exposure Adjustment

You can manually adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.

Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [ ] or [ ].

Press [ ] to move the indicator to the left to make the exposure lighter, or press
[ ] to move it to the right to make the exposure darker.

2 Press (Start).

3-2 Exposure and Original Type Settings

Mail Box (Scan)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ place your originals

➞ press [Scan] ➞ [ ] or [ ].

Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

2 Press (Start).

Exposure and Original Type Settings 3-3

 Original Type Selection
You can manually select the original type according to the type of image. The
following seven original type modes are available.

Text/Printed Img. Text/Photo Printed Image Photo

3
Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

Text Map Color Copy Original

IMPORTANT
If you make copies of an original containing halftones, such as a printed photo, the moiré
effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. If this happens, you can lessen the moiré
effect by using the Sharpness mode. (See "Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness)," on p.
4-90.) Also, if you select [Text/Printed Img.], you can lessen the moiré effect by using the
Priority Level. (See p. 3-6.)

NOTE
If the original is a transparency, select the original type ➞ adjust the exposure to the most
appropriate level for the original.

■ Text/Printed Img. Mode

This mode is best suited for originals containing both text and photographs (printed
images).

■ Text/Photo Mode
This mode is best suited for originals containing both text and photo images.

3-4 Exposure and Original Type Settings

■ Printed Image Mode
This mode is best suited for images printed with halftone dots.

■ Photo Mode
This mode is best suited for photos printed on photographic paper.

■ Text Mode
This mode is best suited for making copies of text originals. Blueprints or pencil drawn
originals can also be copied/scanned clearly.

■ Map Mode
This mode is best suited for originals containing fine text and graphics, such as a map.
3
■ Color Copy Original Mode

Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

This mode is best suited for originals that are themselves color copies.

Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press the original type drop-down list

➞ select the original type ([Text/Printed Img.], [Text/Photo],
[Printed Image], [Photo], [Text], [Map], or [Color Copy
Original]).

Original Type

Exposure and Original Type Settings 3-5

 ● If you want to adjust the text/printed img, text/photo, map, or color
copy original processing priority level:
❑ Press the original type drop-down list ➞ press [Priority Level].
❑ Press [Text Priority] or [Photo/Image Priority] to adjust the degree of priority to
text or photo images ➞ press [OK].
Details of each item are shown below.
[Text Priority]: Priority is given to the faithful reproduction of text.
[Photo/Image Priority]: Priority is given to the faithful reproduction of photos/
images, with as little moiré effect as possible.

3
2 Press (Start).
Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

Mail Box (Scan)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ place your originals

➞ press [Scan].

2 Press the original type drop-down list ➞ select the original

type ([Text/Printed Img.], [Text/Photo], [Printed Image],
[Photo], [Text], [Map], or [Color Copy Orig.]).

Original Type

3 Press (Start).

3-6 Exposure and Original Type Settings

Automatic Exposure Adjustment
This mode enables you to set the machine to automatically adjust the exposure to
the level best suited to the quality of the original.

NOTE
There are two types of automatic scan exposure adjustments; the Remove Background
mode which enables you to scan by erasing the background color of the original, and the
Prevent Bleeding mode which enables you to prevent the original image on the reverse
side of the original from appearing on the paper. Select the desired exposure adjustment
mode depending on the type of original. The Remove Background mode is selected by
default. (See "Image Quality Adjustment," on p. 4-75.)
3

Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [A].

NOTE
An automatic copy exposure adjustment may not work with transparencies. In this
case, adjust the exposure manually by pressing [ ] or [ ].

2 Press (Start).

Exposure and Original Type Settings 3-7

 Mail Box (Scan)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ place your originals

➞ press [Scan] ➞ [A].

3
Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

2 Press (Start).

Exposure Adjustment during Copying/Printing

You can change the exposure while the machine is printing.

IMPORTANT
• You cannot change the exposure when printing documents stored in the Memory RX
Inbox or Confidential Fax Inboxes.
• You cannot change the print exposure while printing in the Secure Watermark mode.

Copying

1 Press [ ] or [ ] on the screen that is displayed while the

machine is copying.

3-8 Exposure and Original Type Settings

 Press [ ] to move the indicator to the left to make the exposure lighter, or press
[ ] to move it to the right to make the exposure darker.

NOTE
If the copy exposure has been changed on the Copy Basic Features screen,
adjusting the exposure during printing may not have any effect on the output.

Mail Box (Print)

IMPORTANT
• You cannot adjust the exposure when CMYK format documents are selected.
• If you change the exposure when scanning an original into an inbox, the selected
exposure may be modified by the machine if you select to merge the document when
3

Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

printing it.

1 Press [ ] or [ ] on the screen that is displayed while the

machine is printing.

Exposure and Original Type Settings 3-9

 Changing the Copy (Zoom) Ratio
You can set the machine to adjust the copy (zoom) ratio automatically, or you can
specify the copy (zoom) ratio manually.

IMPORTANT
For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with this mode, see
3 "Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.
Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

NOTE
To set the copy (zoom) ratio to 100%, press [1:1].

Preset Zoom
The machine offers you a variety of preset copy (zoom) ratios to reduce or enlarge
standard size originals to another standard paper (record) size.

IMPORTANT
• Place the originals horizontally in the following cases:
- If you are enlarging A4 originals to A3 or B4
- If you are enlarging B5 originals to B4
- If you are enlarging A5 originals to A3
• If you are reducing A3 or B4 originals to A4 or B5 with Auto Orientation in Copy Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen) set to 'Off', load A4R or B5R paper in a paper
drawer or the stack bypass.

NOTE
Placing an original horizontally means setting the original with the longer side sideways.
(See Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the Reference Guide.)

■ Reduction
The available preset copy (zoom) ratios for reducing originals are:

• A3 ➞ B4, A4/LTR ➞ B5 (86%)

• B4 ➞ A4/LTR, B5 ➞ A5 (81%)
• A3 ➞ A4/LTR, B4 ➞ B5 (70%)
• A3 ➞ B5 (61%)
• A3 ➞ A5 (50%)
• Minimum (25%)

3-10 Changing the Copy (Zoom) Ratio

■ Enlargement
The available preset copy (zoom) ratios for enlarging originals are:

• Maximum (400%)
• A5 ➞ A3 (200%)
• A4/LTR ➞ A3, B5 ➞ B4 (141%)
• A4/LTR ➞ B4, A5 ➞ B5 (122%)
• B4 ➞ A3, B5 ➞ A4/LTR (115%)

Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Copy Ratio]. 3

Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

IMPORTANT
The Paper Select setting must be set to 'Auto'.

2 Select the desired copy ratio ➞ press [Done].

Enlargement

Reduction

3 Press (Start).

Changing the Copy (Zoom) Ratio 3-11

 Mail Box (Scan)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ place your originals

➞ press [Scan] ➞ [Copy Ratio].

3
Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

2 Specify the zoom ratio and scan originals in accordance with

steps 2 and 3 of "Copying," on p. 3-11.

Zoom by Percentage
You can reduce or enlarge originals by any copy (zoom) ratio, in 1% increments.
Any copy (zoom) ratio from 25% to 400% can be set. The same copy ratio is used
for the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) axes.

Original Copies

3-12 Changing the Copy (Zoom) Ratio

Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Copy Ratio].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Copying" in "Preset Zoom," on p.
3-10.

2 Press [-] or [+] to set a copy ratio ➞ press [Done].

Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

3 Press (Start).

Mail Box (Scan)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ place your originals

➞ press [Scan] ➞ [Copy Ratio].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Mail Box (Scan)" in "Preset Zoom,"
on p. 3-10.

2 Specify the zoom by percentage and scan originals in

accordance with steps 2 and 3 of "Copying," on p. 3-13.

Changing the Copy (Zoom) Ratio 3-13

 Auto Zoom
You can set the machine to automatically select the appropriate copy (zoom) ratio
based on the size of the original and the selected copy paper (record size). The
same copy (zoom) ratio is used for the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) axes. Any
copy ratio from 25% to 400% may be used.

Original Copy

3
Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

IMPORTANT
• You cannot scan/copy highly transparent originals, such as transparencies, using the
Auto setting on the Copy Ratio screen. Use the preset Zoom or Zoom by Percentage
mode instead.
• To use the Auto setting on the Copy (Zoom) Ratio screen, your originals must conform to
one of the standard paper sizes: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, or A6R. (You can
place A5R and A6R originals only on the platen glass.)

NOTE
• If you notice a difference between the automatic copy (zoom) ratio and the actual copy/
record size, you can try to eliminate this error by making a Zoom Fine Adjustment in
Adjustment/Cleaning (from the Additional Functions screen). (See Chapter 4,
"Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
• When copying, to cancel this setting, press [Copy Ratio] ➞ [Auto].
• When storing a document in an inbox, to cancel this setting, press [Copy Ratio] ➞ [Auto]
➞ [Cancel].

Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Copy Ratio].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Copying" in "Preset Zoom," on p.
3-10.

IMPORTANT
Make sure that you select a paper size other than [Auto]. If you do not select a
paper size, the copy ratio is automatically set to match the size of paper loaded in
Paper Drawer 1.

3-14 Changing the Copy (Zoom) Ratio

 2 Press [Auto] ➞ [Done].

3
3

Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

Press (Start).

NOTE
• If the original is placed on the platen glass, the copy ratio automatically appears
when the feeder/platen cover is closed, provided that the original size can be
detected.
• If the original is placed in the feeder, the copy ratio appears when (Start) is
pressed.

Mail Box (Scan)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ place your originals

➞ press [Scan] ➞ [Copy Ratio].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Mail Box (Scan)" in "Preset Zoom,"
on p. 3-10.

2 Press [Auto] ➞ [OK].

NOTE
To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].

3 Press (Start).

NOTE
• If the original is placed on the platen glass, the zoom ratio automatically appears
when the feeder/platen cover is closed, provided that the original size can be
detected.
• If the original is placed in the feeder, the zoom ratio appears when (Start) is
pressed.

Changing the Copy (Zoom) Ratio 3-15

 Entire Image
If you are copying an original with an image that extends all the way to the edges
onto the same size paper at a copy ratio of 100%, the periphery of the original
image may be cut off slightly on the copy. However, if you set the Entire Image
mode, the image is slightly reduced so that the entire image is copied without being
cut off.
The Entire Image mode should also be set when you want to copy A3 originals onto
paper larger than A3 to ensure that the edges of the originals are not cut off. Make
sure to place the originals on the platen glass, and load the stack bypass or paper
drawer with 320 x 450 mm (SRA3) or 305 x 457 mm paper. (See Chapter 2, "Basic
3 Operations," in the Reference Guide and "Paper Selection," on p. 1-13.)
Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

NOTE
• The Entire Image mode is available for the Copy function only.
• The reduction ratios when the Entire Image mode is specified are:
- A3: 98.1% (A3+: 100%)
- B4: 97.8%
- A4: 97.3%
- B5: 96.9%
- A5: 96.2%
• To cancel this setting, press [Copy Ratio] ➞ [Entire Image].

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Copy Ratio].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Copying" in "Preset Zoom," on p.
3-10.

2 Press [Entire Image] ➞ [Done].

3 Press (Start).

3-16 Changing the Copy (Zoom) Ratio

Reducing/Enlarging Using the Original and Copy/Record
Sizes
The Zoom Program mode enables you to reduce or enlarge originals by individually
entering the dimensions of the original and copy paper (record size).
Any copy (zoom) ratio from 25% to 400% may be used.
The following two Zoom Program modes are available.

NOTE
• The specified sizes are converted into a copy (zoom) ratio (%) by the machine using the 3
formula below. The result is rounded to the closest integer.

Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

Copy (zoom) ratio (%) = (copy (record) size/original size) x 100
• To cancel this setting, press [Copy Ratio] ➞ [Zoom Program] ➞ [Cancel].
• For instructions on entering values in inches, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.

■ Making Copies (Scanning) with the Same XY Copy/Zoom Ratio (Zoom)

You can set the same copy (zoom) ratio for both the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) axes.

Original Copy

X = 100 mm X =150 mm
A4 A4

Changing the Copy (Zoom) Ratio 3-17

 ■ Making Copies (Scanning) with Different XY Copy/Zoom Ratios (XY Zoom)
You can set different copy (zoom) ratios for the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) axes.

Original Copy

Y = 120 mm
Y = 180 mm

3
Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

X = 100 mm X = 80 mm
A4 A4

Making Copies (Scanning) with the Same XY Copy/Zoom Ratio

(Zoom)

■ Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Copy Ratio].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Copying" in "Preset Zoom," on p.
3-10.

2 Press [Zoom Program].

3-18 Changing the Copy (Zoom) Ratio

 3 Use the numeric keys on the touch panel display to enter
values for the original size and copy size.
❑ Press [Original Size] ➞ enter a value.
❑ Press [Copy Size] ➞ enter a value.
❑ Press [OK].

Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

You can enter either the width or the length of the original size. If you enter the
width for the original size, make sure to enter the width for the copy (record)
size as well, and vice versa.
The machine automatically calculates the correct copy (zoom) ratio based on
the values you entered; however, the original image may be cut off slightly
depending on the paper (record) size.
If the computation results in a zoom ratio less than 25% or greater than 400%,
a message appears telling you that values below 25% will be set to 25%, and
values above 400% will be set to 400%.

NOTE
To specify the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) axis independently, press [XY Zoom].

4 Press (Start).

■ Mail Box (Scan)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ place your originals

➞ press [Scan] ➞ [Copy Ratio].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Mail Box (Scan)" in "Preset Zoom,"
on p. 3-10.

2 Specify the Zoom Program (Zoom) mode and scan originals in

accordance with steps 2 to 4 of "Copying," on p. 3-18.
For the Mail Box function, enter the Original Size and Record Size.

Changing the Copy (Zoom) Ratio 3-19

 Making Copies (Scanning) with Different XY Copy/Zoom Ratios (XY
Zoom)

■ Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Copy Ratio].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Copying" in "Preset Zoom," on p.
3-10.

3 2 Press [Zoom Program].

Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 2 of "Copying" in "Reducing/Enlarging

Using the Original and Copy/Record Sizes," on p. 3-17.

3 Press [XY Zoom].

4 Use the numeric keys on the touch panel display to enter

values for the original size and copy (record) size.
❑ Press [X] (horizontal axis) for Original Size ➞ enter a value.
❑ Press [Y] (vertical axis) for Original Size ➞ enter a value.
❑ Press [X] (horizontal axis) for Copy Size ➞ enter a value.
❑ Press [Y] (vertical axis) for Copy Size ➞ enter a value.
❑ Press [OK].

If the computation results in a zoom ratio less than 25% or greater than 400%,
a message appears telling you that values below 25% will be set to 25%, and
values above 400% will be set to 400%.

3-20 Changing the Copy (Zoom) Ratio

 NOTE
To specify the same copy ratio for both the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) axes,
press [Zoom].

5 Press (Start).

■ Mail Box (Scan)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ place your originals

➞ press [Scan] ➞ [Copy Ratio]. 3
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Mail Box (Scan)" in "Preset Zoom,"

Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

on p. 3-10.

2 Specify the Zoom Program (XY Zoom) mode and scan

originals in accordance with steps 2 to 5 of "Copying," on p.
3-20.
For the Mail Box function, enter the Original Size and Record Size.

Setting the X and Y Axes Independently

The XY Zoom mode enables you to make reduced or enlarged copies with different
XY copy (zoom) ratios expressed in percentages. Any copy (zoom) ratio from 25%
to 400% may be used.
The following two XY Zoom modes are available.

NOTE
To cancel this setting, press [Copy Ratio] ➞ [XY Zoom] ➞ [Cancel].

Changing the Copy (Zoom) Ratio 3-21

 ■ Manually Specifying the Copy/Zoom Ratio (XY Zoom)
You can manually set different copy (zoom) ratios for the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y)
axes, expressed in percentages and in 1% increments.

Original Copy

Enlarging and
Reducing with
Different XY
Copy Ratios
Y = 100% Y = 80%

3
Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

X = 100% X = 120%
A4 A4

NOTE
If you set the copy (zoom) ratio with the XY Zoom mode, the image of the original may be
rotated before being printed on the paper depending on the outcome of the computation
executed by the machine using the original size and the specified copy (zoom) ratio.

■ Automatically Specifying the Copy Ratio (Auto XY Zoom)

The XY copy ratio is automatically set to suit the size of the selected paper.

Original Copy

A4R
Selected

A4R

A4

3-22 Changing the Copy (Zoom) Ratio

 IMPORTANT
• You cannot copy highly transparent originals, such as transparencies, in the Auto XY
Zoom mode. Manually specify the copy (zoom) ratio for these types of originals.
• If you set the Auto XY Zoom mode, select the paper size using the Manual Paper
Selection mode. If you do not select a paper size, Paper Drawer 1 is automatically
selected and the copy (zoom) ratio is set to match the size of the paper loaded in that
drawer.
• If you set the copy (zoom) ratio in the Auto XY Zoom mode, Auto Orientation is not
performed.

NOTE
• The Auto XY Zoom mode is available for the Copy function only.
• If you notice a difference between the copy (zoom) ratio and the actual print size, you can
3

Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

try to eliminate this error by making a Zoom Fine Adjustment in Adjustment/Cleaning
(from the Additional Functions screen). (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the
Reference Guide.)

Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Copy Ratio].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Copying" in "Preset Zoom," on p.
3-10.

2 Press [XY Zoom].

Changing the Copy (Zoom) Ratio 3-23

 3 Specify the desired copy ratios.

● To manually specify the copy ratios (XY Zoom):

❑ Press [X] (horizontal axis) ➞ enter a value.
❑ Press [Y] (vertical axis) ➞ enter a value.
❑ Press [OK].

3
Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

● To have the copy ratios automatically specified (Auto XY Zoom):

❑ Press [Auto XY Zoom] ➞ [OK].

IMPORTANT
If you select [Auto XY Zoom], make sure that you select a paper size other than
[Auto]. If you do not specify a paper size, Paper Drawer 1 is automatically selected
and the copy ratios are set to match the size of the paper loaded in that drawer.

4 Press (Start).

Mail Box (Scan)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ place your originals

➞ press [Scan] ➞ [Copy Ratio].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Mail Box (Scan)" in "Preset Zoom,"
on p. 3-10.

2 Specify XY Zoom mode and scan originals in accordance with

steps 2 to 4 of "Copying," on p. 3-23.

3-24 Changing the Copy (Zoom) Ratio

Poster
This mode enables you to enlarge an original to a size larger than A3 by copying
parts of the original over several sheets of paper, and then pasting the sheets
together.
You can specify the copy ratio for the Poster mode by percentage, or by setting the
number of output pages that the original image should be copied over.

Copies Cut and

Original Copy Pasted Together

Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

IMPORTANT
• Place your original on the platen glass. The Poster mode cannot be used if the original is
placed in the feeder.
• If you set the Poster mode while the color mode is set to 'Auto-Color Select', the color
mode is automatically set to 'Full Color'.
• The Poster mode cannot be used to make copies on nonstandard size paper,
transparencies, and tab paper.

NOTE
• The Poster mode is available for the Copy function only.
• Copies of the original image made in the Poster mode overlap. Join neighboring sheets
together by pasting over the overlapping areas.
• You cannot make more than one copy of the original (over multiple sheets of paper) at
one time using the Poster mode.
• To cancel this setting, press [Copy Ratio] ➞ [Poster] ➞ [Cancel].

Changing the Copy (Zoom) Ratio 3-25

 Determining the Copy Ratio and Number of Sheets Needed
If you create a poster by specifying the copy ratio, the number of output pages
changes according to the size of the original, the copy ratio setting, and the size of
the copy paper. Refer to the following table to determine the desired copy ratio.

Reproduction ratio Optimum paper size and sheet

Paper size
A3 B4 quantity

A0 x 2 (horizontal) 400% B4 5 x 5 = 25 sheets

B0 (horizontal) 364% 400% A3 4 x 4 = 16 sheets
A0 (horizontal) 282% 326% A3 3 x 3 = 9 sheets
3
B1 (horizontal) 244% 282% B4 3 x 3 = 9 sheets
Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

A1 (horizontal) 200% 230% A4 3 x 3 = 9 sheets

B2 (horizontal) 173% 200% A3 2 x 2 = 4 sheets
A2 (horizontal) 141% 163% B4 2 x 2 = 4 sheets
B3 (horizontal) 122% 141% A4R 2 x 2 = 4 sheets
A0 (vertical) 400% B4 3 x 5 = 15 sheets
B1 (vertical) 346% A3 2 x 4 = 8 sheets
A1 (vertical) 282% A3 2 x 3 = 6 sheets
B2 (vertical) 244% B4 2 x 3 = 6 sheets
A2 (vertical) 200% A3 1 x 3 = 3 sheets
B3 (vertical) 173% A3 1 x 2 = 2 sheets

NOTE
• The sizes indicated in the table serve only as a guideline. The actual copy ratio may be
different from that indicated in the table.
• After all the sheets have been pasted together, the final size of the actual copy will be
slightly smaller than the size indicated in the table.
• You can create a poster with copy ratios that are not listed in the table. However, the size
of the original must not be larger than A3, and the copy ratio cannot exceed 400%.

3-26 Changing the Copy (Zoom) Ratio

Specifying the Copy Ratio in Percentage
You can enlarge an original in the Poster mode by specifying the copy ratio in
percentage. Any copy ratio from 100% to 400% can be set.

1 Place your originals on the platen glass ➞ press [Copy Ratio].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Copying" in "Preset Zoom," on p.
3-10.

2 Press [Poster]. 3

Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

3 Press [Copy Ratio(s)] ➞ [Next].

4 Use the numeric keys or press [-] or [+] on the touch panel
display to enter a copy ratio ➞ press [OK].

5 Press (Start).

NOTE
If you press (Stop) while copying is in progress to cancel the copy job and then
press (Start) again, copying resumes from the first sheet of the divided image.

Changing the Copy (Zoom) Ratio 3-27

 Selecting the Number of Output Pages
You can enlarge an original in the Poster mode by setting the number of output
pages that the original image should be copied over.

1 Place your originals on the platen glass ➞ press [Copy Ratio].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Copying" in "Preset Zoom," on p.
3-10.

3 2 Press [Poster].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 2 of "Specifying the Copy Ratio in
Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

Percentage," on p. 3-27.

3 Press [Number Of Output Pages] ➞ [Next].

4 Press [Paper Select].

5 Select the desired paper size ➞ press [Done].

If you select the stack bypass, the screens for specifying the paper size and
paper type in the stack bypass are displayed.

6 Select the number of output pages ➞ press [OK].

Refer to the table under "Determining the Copy Ratio and Number of Sheets
Needed," on p. 3-26 as a guideline for specifying the number of output pages.

3-28 Changing the Copy (Zoom) Ratio

 NOTE
The number of output pages that you have selected is used as a guideline. The
actual number of output pages may be less than what you have selected,
depending on a combination of factors that determine the most appropriate number
of pages. These factors include the size of the original, the selected paper size,
and the enlargement ratio.

7 Press (Start).

NOTE
If you press (Stop) while copying is in progress to cancel the copy job and then
press (Start) again, copying resumes from the first sheet of the divided image. 3

Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

Changing the Copy (Zoom) Ratio 3-29

 Pasting the Sheets of the Divided Image Together
Example: Enlarging an A3 original by 282% to create an A1 vertical copy.

Size of Original: A3
Orientation of Original: Vertical
Copy Size: A1
Orientation of Copy: Vertical

Based on the above criteria, the table under "Determining the Copy Ratio and
Number of Sheets Needed" indicates that when using A3 paper, 6 pages (2 x 3) are
output.
3 Original
Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

Copy Ratio: 282%

Paper Size: A3
The original is placed on the platen
glass without changing its original
orientation (right side up).
The image of the original is
automatically divided into six sections,
each of which is then copied onto a
separate sheet of paper.

Copies

1st page 3rd page 5th page

2nd page 4th page 6th page

3-30 Changing the Copy (Zoom) Ratio

The images on neighboring sheets created by the Poster mode overlap slightly.
When pasting the sheets together, trim the overlapping portions, leaving an
adequate amount of overlap to apply the glue.

The width of the overlapping portions differs, according to the copy ratio and paper
size.

Overlap

3
Overlap

Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

Overlap

Changing the Copy (Zoom) Ratio 3-31

 Collating Copies/Prints
The Finishing modes can be selected to collate the outputs in various ways, either
by pages or copy/print sets.

IMPORTANT
• For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with this mode, see
3 "Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.
• The Finishing modes cannot be set if transparencies, labels, or tab paper is selected.
Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

• If you set the Staple or Hole Punch mode, the side of the paper which is printed on will
always be output face down.

NOTE
• For information for the optional finishers, see Chapter 3, "Optional Equipment," in the
Reference Guide.
• To cancel this setting, press [Finishing] ➞ [Cancel].

3-32 Collating Copies/Prints

■ The table below shows all the finishing features that are available with each
different optional unit, and the paper sizes that can be used.
: Available
: Unavailable

Staple
Hole
Optional Unit Offset Rotate Saddle
Corner Double Punch
Stitch

A4,
Copy Tray A4R,
B5, 3
B5R

Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

A3, A3, B4, A3, B4,
B4, A4R A4R
Finisher-AA1
A4, (30 sheets), (30 sheets),
A4R, A4, B5 A4, B5
B5 (50 sheets) (50 sheets)

A3, A3, B4, A3, B4, A3, B4,

Finisher-AA1 and B4, A4R A4R A4,
Punch Unit-L1 A4, (30 sheets), (30 sheets), A4R,
A4R, A4, B5 A4, B5 B5,
B5 (50 sheets) (50 sheets) B5R

A3, A3, B4, A3, B4, A3, B4,

Saddle B4, A4R A4R A4R,
Finisher-AA2 A4, (30 sheets), (30 sheets), 305 x 457
A4R, A4, B5 A4, B5 mm
B5 (50 sheets) (50 sheets) (15 sheets)

A3, A3, B4, A3, B4, A3, B4, A3, B4,

Saddle
B4, A4R A4R A4R, A4,
Finisher-AA2 and
A4, (30 sheets), (30 sheets), 305 x 457 A4R,
Punch Unit-L1
A4R, A4, B5 A4, B5 mm B5,
B5 (50 sheets) (50 sheets) (15 sheets) B5R

Collating Copies/Prints 3-33

 ■ If the Collate Mode Is Set:
The copies are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order. The output is as
follows:

Originals Three Copies Set 1 Set 2 Set 3

of Each Page
Collated in
Page Order

■ If the Group Mode Is Set:

3 All copies of the same original page are grouped together. The output is as follows:
Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

Originals Three Copies Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4

of Each Page
Grouped by
Page

■ If the Staple Mode Is Set:

The copies are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order and stapled. The
output is as follows:

• If you select [Corner] (Top Left):

Originals Three Copies Set 1 Set 2 Set 3

of Each Page
Collated in
Page Order

• If you select [Double] (Left):

Originals Three Copies Set 1 Set 2 Set 3

of Each Page
Collated in
Page Oreder

3-34 Collating Copies/Prints

 • If you select [Saddle Stitch]:

Originals Set 1 Set 2 Set 3

Three Copies
of Each Page
Collated in
Page Order

IMPORTANT
The accuracy of folds created in the Saddle Stitch mode may vary, depending on the
paper type and the number of sheets.
3
NOTE

Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

To use the Saddle Stitch mode, the original (stored document) must already be in booklet
form, as shown in the illustration above. (See "Booklet Mode," on p. 4-21 and "Booklet
Scanning," on p. 4-28.)

■ If No Finishing Mode Is Set:

If the Collate, Group, and Staple modes are not set, copies are output as follows:

Originals Copies

■ If the Hole Punch Mode Is Set:

The machine punches two or three holes in the output.

Originals Copy

Collating Copies/Prints 3-35

 ■ If the Rotate Mode Is Set:
If the copies are of the same size, the sheets are automatically collated into sets arranged
in page order, and are output in alternating directions as follows:

Originals Copies

■ If the Offset Mode Is Set:

3 The copies are slightly offset vertically in the output tray as follows: (You can also specify
the number of copy sets to offset.)
Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

Originals Copies

NOTE
[Specify No. of Copies for Offset] is not displayed if the Group mode is set.

Page Order (Collate)

Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Finishing].

3-36 Collating Copies/Prints

 NOTE
If Auto Collate in Copy Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to
'On', the Collate or Offset Collate mode is automatically set when you place your
originals in the feeder. (See "Auto Collate," on p. 8-9.)

2 Press [Collate (Page order)].

Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

The optional Finisher-AA1 or No finisher is attached.
Saddle Finisher-AA2 and
Punch Unit-L1 are attached.

If you want to make hole punches, press [Hole Punch].

● If you select [Rotate]:

❑ Press [Next] ➞ select [A4], [A4R], [B5], or [B5R].

IMPORTANT
• [Rotate] can be selected only in the following cases:
- If the available paper size is selected manually
- If the available paper size is loaded in both the horizontal and vertical directions
- The selected paper source must have Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) set to 'On'. (See Chapter 4,
"Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
• When you have selected Automatic Paper Selection for the Rotate Mode, make
sure to select a paper size which can be rotated. Otherwise, output will not be
rotated.
• If there is no paper which can be rotated, the output will be collated.

3 Press [OK].

4 Press (Start).

Collating Copies/Prints 3-37

 Mail Box (Print)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to

print ➞ press [Print] ➞ [Change Pr. Settings] ➞ [Finishing].

3
Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

2 Specify the Collate settings in accordance with steps 2 and 3

of "Copying," on p. 3-36.

3 Press [Start Print].

Same Page (Group)

Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Finishing].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Copying" in "Page Order (Collate),"
on p. 3-36.

NOTE
If Auto Collate in Copy Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to
'On', the Collate or Offset Collate mode is automatically set when you place your
originals in the feeder. (See "Auto Collate," on p. 8-9.)

3-38 Collating Copies/Prints

2 Press [Group (Same pages)].

The optional Finisher-AA1 or

Saddle Finisher-AA2 and
No finisher is attached. 3
Punch Unit-L1 are attached.

Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

If you want to make hole punches, press [Hole Punch].

● If you select [Rotate]:

❑ Press [Next] ➞ select [A4], [A4R], [B5], or [B5R].

IMPORTANT
• [Rotate] can be selected only in the following cases:
- If the available paper size is selected manually
- If the available paper size is loaded in both the horizontal and vertical directions
- The selected paper source must have Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) set to 'On'. (See Chapter 4,
"Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
• When you have selected Automatic Paper Selection for the Rotate Mode, make
sure to select a paper size which can be rotated. Otherwise, output will not be
rotated.
• If there is no paper which can be rotated, the output will be collated.

3 Press [OK].

4 Press (Start).

Collating Copies/Prints 3-39

 Mail Box (Print)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to

print ➞ press [Print] ➞ [Change Pr. Settings] ➞ [Finishing].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Mail Box (Print)" in "Page Order
(Collate)," on p. 3-36.

2 Specify the Group settings in accordance with steps 2 and 3

of "Copying," on p. 3-38.
3
3
Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

Press [Start Print].

Page Order (Staple)

IMPORTANT
• The Staple mode can be set only if an optional finisher is attached.
• When printing on special types of paper, such as heavy paper or transparencies, be sure
to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavy paper. If the type of
paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the
fixing unit may become dirty, or the paper could jam, and a service repair may be
needed.

Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Finishing].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Copying" in "Page Order (Collate),"
on p. 3-36.

NOTE
If Auto Collate in Copy Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to
'On', the Collate or Offset Collate mode is automatically set when you place your
originals in the feeder. (See "Auto Collate," on p. 8-9.)

3-40 Collating Copies/Prints

2 Press [Staple].
If you want to make hole punches, press [Hole Punch].

● If the optional Finisher-AA1 is attached:

❑ Press [Next].
❑ Select the stapling type ([Corner] or [Double]) ➞ select the stapling position ➞
press [OK].

Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

● If the optional Saddle Finisher-AA2 is attached:
❑ Press [Next].
❑ Select the stapling type ([Corner], [Double], or [Saddle Stitch]).
If you want to select [Corner] or [Double]:
• Press [Corner] or [Double] ➞ select the stapling position ➞ press [OK].

If you want to select [Saddle Stitch]:

• Press [Saddle Stitch] ➞ [Next].
• If [Add Cover] is selected, select whether to print on cover ➞ press [Next].
• Select the type of paper for the cover ➞ press [Next].
Load the paper for the cover into the stack bypass.
• Select the paper size ➞ press [OK].

Collating Copies/Prints 3-41

 IMPORTANT
• Make sure to use the same paper size for the cover and the main document.
• If you select [No] in the Cover Settings window, you can select Heavy 5 paper.
• Only 64 to 105 g/m2 paper can be used for the main document.
• Paper of the following weight can be used as a cover sheet:
- If printing on the cover: 64 to 209 g/m2
- If not printing on the cover: 64 to 256 g/m2
• The orientation to place the side of the paper to use for the cover page in the stack
bypass depends on the type of the paper, as shown below:
- Plain, Recycled, Color, Heavy 1 to 4: face up
- Heavy 5: face down
3 • If you select [Add Cover], you cannot specify the stack bypass as the paper source
used for the main document.
Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

NOTE
Make sure to place the paper for the cover into the stack bypass with the surface
you want to print on face up.

3 Press (Start).

Mail Box (Print)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to

print ➞ press [Print] ➞ [Change Pr. Settings] ➞ [Finishing].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Mail Box (Print)" in "Page Order
(Collate)," on p. 3-36.

2 Specify the Staple settings in accordance with step 2 of

"Copying," on p. 3-40.

3 Press [Start Print].

3-42 Collating Copies/Prints

Two-Sided Copying/Printing
This mode enables you to make two-sided copies from one-sided or two-sided
originals, or make one-sided copies from two-sided originals. For the Mail Box
function, this mode enables you to print two successive pages of a document
stored in a User Inbox, on both sides of a sheet of paper.

IMPORTANT 3
• For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with this mode, see

Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.
• You may not be able to make 2-Sided copies/prints on some types of paper, depending
on the paper.

NOTE
• If you are copying in the 2-Sided mode, align the top edge of the original with the back
edge of the platen glass (by the arrow in the top left corner), or with the back edge of the
feeder.
• The 2-Sided mode you have selected is displayed above [2-Sided] on the Regular Copy
Basic Features screen, or above [2-Sided Printing] on the Change Pr. Settings screen.
• Paper used to make two-sided copies/prints must conform to the following specifications:

- Paper size: 330 x 483 mm, 320 x 450 mm (SRA3), 305 x 457 mm, A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, or A5R (nonstandard size paper cannot be used for
two-sided copying)
- Paper weight: 64 to 209 g/m2

• When copying, to cancel this setting, press [2-Sided] ➞ [Cancel].

• When storing or printing a document in an inbox, to cancel this setting, press [2-Sided
Printing] ➞ [Cancel].

Two-Sided Copying/Printing 3-43

 1 to 2-Sided
This feature enables you to make two-sided copies from one-sided originals, or to
print two successive pages of a document stored in a User Inbox onto both sides of
a sheet of paper.

3
Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

Copying

IMPORTANT
Make sure to place originals with a horizontal (landscape) orientation, such as A4R, B5R,
and A5R, horizontally. If these originals are placed vertically, the back side of the copy is
printed upside down. (You can place A5R originals only on the platen glass.)

NOTE
• If there are an odd number of originals, the back side of the last copy is left blank. (The
machine's counter does not count the blank page as a copy.)
• If the 2-Sided mode is used with the Different Size Originals mode, the copies of different
size originals will be printed as one-sided copies on paper of their respective sizes. If you
want to make two-sided copies with different size originals, you must select the paper
size beforehand.

1 Place your originals ➞ press [2-Sided].

3-44 Two-Sided Copying/Printing

 2 Press [1 2-Sided].
To set the orientation of two-sided copies, press [Option] ➞ select the type of
two-sided orientation ➞ press [Done].
Details of each item are shown below.

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the copy will have the same
top-bottom orientation.

[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the copy will have opposite
top-bottom orientations.

3
3 Press [OK].

Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

4 Press (Start).

Mail Box (Print)

NOTE
• If there are an odd number of pages in a document, the back side of the last print is left
blank. (The machine's counter does not count the blank page as a print.)
• If the 2-Sided Printing mode is used together with the Automatic Paper Selection mode,
and the pages that you want to print are of different size, the different sized documents
will be printed as one-sided prints on paper of their respective sizes. If you want such
pages to be printed as two-sided documents, select the desired paper size beforehand.

1 Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to

print ➞ press [Print] ➞ [Change Pr. Settings] ➞ [2-Sided
Printing].

Two-Sided Copying/Printing 3-45

 2 Select the desired orientation ➞ press [OK].
Details of each item are shown below.

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the copy will have the same
top-bottom orientation.

[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the copy will have opposite
top-bottom orientations.

If you want to print the first page of each document on the front when documents
are merged and the Finishing mode is selected (except for [Group]), press [Non
continuous].
3 If you want to print continuously without inserting any blank pages between the
documents, press [Continuous].
Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

3 Press [Start Print].

2 to 2-Sided
This feature enables you to make two-sided copies from two-sided originals. If a
two-sided original is placed in the feeder, it is automatically turned over so that both
sides of the original are copied onto the front and back sides of a copy sheet.

NOTE
• The 2 2-Sided mode is available for the Copying function only.
• If you place your originals on the platen glass, follow the instructions displayed on the
screen to scan each side of the originals.

3-46 Two-Sided Copying/Printing

1 Place your originals ➞ press [2-Sided].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Copying" in "1 to 2-Sided," on p.
3-44.

NOTE
If Auto Collate in Copy Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to
'On', the Collate or Offset Collate mode is automatically set when you place your
originals in the feeder. (See "Auto Collate," on p. 8-9.)

2 Press [2 2-Sided]. 3
To set the orientation of the originals and the copies, press [Option] ➞ select the

Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

type of two-sided orientation for the originals and the copies ➞ press [Done].
Original

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the original have the same
top-bottom orientation.

[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the original have opposite
top-bottom orientations.

Copy

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the copy will have the same
top-bottom orientation.

[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the copy will have opposite
top-bottom orientations.

3 Press [OK].

4 Press (Start).

Two-Sided Copying/Printing 3-47

 2 to 1-Sided
This feature automatically turns over two-sided originals placed in the feeder to
make one-sided copies on different sheets of paper.

3
Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

IMPORTANT
Make sure to place originals with a horizontal (landscape) orientation, such as A4R, B5R,
and A5R, horizontally. If these originals are placed vertically, the back side of the copy is
printed upside down. (You can place A5R originals only on the platen glass.)

NOTE
• The 2 1-Sided mode is available for the Copying function only.
• If you want to place your two-sided original on the platen glass, use the Job Build mode
in Special Features to execute 2 1-Sided copying. (See "Job Build," on p. 4-53.)

1 Place your originals ➞ press [2-Sided].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Copying" in "1 to 2-Sided," on p.
3-44.

NOTE
If Auto Collate in Copy Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to
'On', the Collate or Offset Collate mode is automatically set when you place your
originals in the feeder. (See "Auto Collate," on p. 8-9.)

3-48 Two-Sided Copying/Printing

 2 Press [2 1-Sided].
To set the orientation of the originals, press [Option] ➞ select the orientation of
the originals ➞ press [Done].
Details of each item are shown below.

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the original have the same
top-bottom orientation.

[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the original have opposite
top-bottom orientations.

3
3 Press [OK].

Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

4 Press (Start).

Book to 2-Sided
This feature enables you to make two-sided copies from facing pages, or from the
front and back sides of a page in bound originals, such as books and magazines.
• Left/RightTwo-sided
This setting makes two-sided copies from facing pages.
Original Copies

1 2

Two-Sided Copying/Printing 3-49

 • Front/Back Two-sided
This setting makes two-sided copies from the front and back sides of a page.
Original Copies

1 2

2 1

3
IMPORTANT
Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

• Only A4 or B5 paper can be used for Book 2-Sided copying.

• If you select [Front/Back 2-Sided], the front side of the first two-sided page and the back
side of the last two-sided page are left blank. (The machine's counter does not count the
blank pages as copies.)
• Place your original on the platen glass. The Book 2-Sided mode cannot be used when
the original is placed in the feeder.

NOTE
The Book 2-Sided mode is available for the Copying function only.

1 Place your original on the platen glass ➞ press [2-Sided].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Copying" in "1 to 2-Sided," on p.
3-44.
To make copies in the correct page order, begin copying from the first open page
of the book or bound original.
Place your original face down, making sure that its top edge is aligned with the
back edge of the platen glass (by the arrow in the top left corner).

2 Press [Book 2-Sided] ➞ [Next].

3-50 Two-Sided Copying/Printing

3 Select the desired type of two-sided layout ➞ press [OK].
Details of each item are shown below.

[Left/Right 2-Sided]: The facing pages of a book or bound original are

copied onto the front and back sides of a single sheet
of paper.

[Front/Back 2-Sided]: The front and back sides of the left page, or the front
and back sides of the right page, are copied onto the
front and back sides of a single sheet of paper.

4 Press (Start). 3

Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

To copy the next two facing pages, turn the page of the original ➞ place your
original on the platen glass ➞ press (Start).
Scanning starts.

5 When scanning is complete, press [Done].

Two-Sided Copying/Printing 3-51

 Scanning Two-Sided Originals
You can set the machine to automatically turn over two-sided originals that are
placed in the feeder, and scan each side separately.

IMPORTANT
• For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with this mode, see
3 "Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.
• When you are scanning originals with a horizontal (landscape) orientation, such as A4R,
Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

B5R, and A5R, make sure to place them horizontally in the feeder. If these originals are
placed vertically, the back sides of the originals are scanned upside down. (You can
place A5R originals only on the platen glass.)

NOTE
• The 2-Sided Original mode is available for the Mail Box function only.
• If you place your originals on the platen glass, follow the instructions displayed on the
screen to scan each side of the originals.
• To cancel this setting, press [2-Sided Original] ➞ [Cancel].

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ place your originals

in the feeder ➞ press [Scan] ➞ [2-Sided Original].

3-52 Scanning Two-Sided Originals

2 Select the type of original ➞ press [OK].
Details of each item are shown below.

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the original have the same
top-bottom orientation.

[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the original have opposite
top-bottom orientations.

3 Press (Start).
3

Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

Scanning Two-Sided Originals 3-53

 Changing Color Modes
This machine comes with the Automatic Color Selection mode, which recognizes
whether an original is in color or black-and-white, and then automatically switches
between the Full Color mode and Black mode. You can also manually switch
between the Full, Black, Single Color, and Two Colors modes whenever necessary.

3 NOTE
• If color printing is performed after black printing, a message may appear indicating the
Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

machine is preparing for color printing. Please wait for a moment until the message
disappears. Color printing will start when the message disappears.
• If you select [Retro Photo Image] in the One Touch Color mode, the color mode is
automatically set to 'Single Color'.
• The default setting is 'Auto-Color Select' for all the Copy, Scan, and Print functions.
• You can store the color mode as Standard Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen). (See "Changing the Current Standard Settings," on p 8-10.)
• You can set to display a shortcut key for the Black mode next to the color selection
drop-down list on the Copy Basic Features screen, Scan screen, and Print screen. (See
Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)

■ Auto-Color Select
If the Auto-Color Select mode is selected, the machine automatically recognizes whether
the original is in color or black-and-white. Color originals are copied/scanned/printed in
the Full Color mode, while black-and-white originals are copied/scanned/printed in the
Black mode.

IMPORTANT
When the Auto-Color Select mode is set and your originals contain color sections, the
machine scans them in the Full Color mode. However, the machine may scan the color
originals in the Black mode under the following conditions. To avoid this, set the color
mode to 'Full Color'.
- If the originals contain a few color sections
- If the color sections are located only on the left side (within 5 mm from the left edge) or
the right side (within 5 mm from the right edge) of the originals when loading the
originals into the feeder
- If the color sections of the originals are close to black
- If the originals contain light color densities

3-54 Changing Color Modes

 NOTE
• When printing CMYK documents stored in inboxes, only [Auto-Color Select] can be
selected. (To print full color CMYK documents, only [Auto-Color Select] can be specified.
To print black CMYK documents, [Black] can also be specified.)
• If the color format of the selected image form is CMYK, only [Auto-Color Select] can be
selected.

■ Full Color
The Full Color mode always copies/scans in color regardless of whether the original is in
color or black-and-white.

NOTE
• The Full Color mode is only available for copying, or storing documents in an inbox.
3
• If a black-and-white original is copied or scanned in the Full Color mode, it is counted as

Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

a color copy or scan.

■ Black
The Black mode always copies/scans/prints in black-and-white regardless of whether the
original is in color or black-and-white.

■ Single Color
The Single Color mode enables you to make one-color copies/prints.

IMPORTANT
You can select Red, Green, Blue, Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan as the color.

NOTE
• The Single Color mode is available for the Copy function, or when printing document from
an inbox.
• If a black-and-white document is copied/printed in the Single Color mode, it is counted as
a color copy/print.

■ Two Colors
The Two Colors mode enables you to make two-color prints, composed of a color you
specify, and black.

IMPORTANT
You can select Red, Green, Blue, Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan as the color.

NOTE
• The Two Colors mode is available for the Copy function, or when printing document from
an inbox.
• If a black-and-white document is copied in the Two Colors mode, it is counted as a color
copy.

Changing Color Modes 3-55

 Copying
IMPORTANT
If you scan different sized originals without setting the Different Size Originals mode or
selecting a non-standard paper size as the paper size, the machine may not be able to
detect whether your originals are color or black-and-white.

NOTE
If you set the Poster mode while the color mode is set to 'Auto-Color Select', the color
mode is automatically set to 'Full Color'.

3
Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

1 Place your originals ➞ press the color selection drop-down

list ➞ press [Auto-Color Select], [Full Color], [Black], [Single
Color], or [Two Colors].

Color Selection

● If [Single Color] or [Two Colors] is selected:

❑ Select the desired color ➞ press [OK].

IMPORTANT
If Display the Black Mode Shortcut Key in Common Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) is set to 'On', you can also specify the Black mode by pressing
[ ]. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings, in the Reference Guide.)

2 Press (Start).

3-56 Changing Color Modes

Mail Box (Scan)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ place your originals

➞ press [Scan].

2 Press the color selection drop-down list ➞ press [Auto-Color

Select], [Full Color], or [Black].

3
Color Selection

Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

3 Press (Start).

Changing Color Modes 3-57

 Mail Box (Print)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to

print ➞ press [Print].

2 Press the color selection drop-down list ➞ press [Auto-Color

Select], [Black], [Single Color], or [Two Colors].
You can also press [Change Pr. Settings], and then select the desired color mode
3 from the color selection drop-down list on the Change Print Settings screen.
Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

Color Selection

3 Press [Start Print].

3-58 Changing Color Modes

Merging Documents
The Merge Documents mode enables you to print multiple documents, such as
scanned documents and documents sent from a computer, as one document — if
they are stored in the same inbox. You can combine documents with different
settings into one document, which is useful when you want to print the following
kinds of documents:
• Documents created with different programs, or documents created by multiple 3
users for printing and stapling as a single document.

Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

• Documents combining cutout artwork, transparencies, and data sent from one or
more computers, using the Two-sided Printing mode.

IMPORTANT
You can set the Merge Documents mode only if you select multiple documents.

NOTE
• The Merge Document mode is available for the Mail Box function only.
• If you use the Merge Documents mode to combine and print multiple documents, the
documents are printed using Standard Local Print Settings instead of the individual
settings of the respective documents. However, the settings of each document are not
changed or erased, and remain the same as when the document was created.
• You can change Standard Local Print Settings. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings,"
in the Reference Guide.)

Merging Documents 3-59

 1 Select the desired User Inbox number and the documents to
print in the order that you want to print them ➞ press [Print] ➞
[Change Pr. Settings] ➞ [Merge Documents].

3
Basic Copying and Mail Box Features

To select all of the documents (up to 100 documents from the top) in the User
Inbox, press [Select All (Max 100 doc.)]. If a document is already selected, this
key appears as [Clear Selection] instead.
To cancel all documents, press [Clear Selection]. ([Clear Selection] changes to
[Select All (Max 100 doc.)].)
[Merge Document] is displayed only when multiple documents are selected.

2 Press [Start Print].

NOTE
While the merged documents are being printed, only the name of the first
document is displayed on the screen.

3-60 Merging Documents

Special Copying and Mail Box
Features 4
CHAPTER

This chapter describes the special features of both the Copying and Mail Box functions.

What are Special Features? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Specifying the Special Copying Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Specifying the Special Mail Box Features for Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Specifying the Special Mail Box Features for Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8

2-Page Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Mail Box (Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11

Cover/Sheet Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Mail Box (Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17

Cover/Job Separator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Booklet Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Mail Box (Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27

Booklet Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Transparency Interleaving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Image Combination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Mail Box (Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36

Shifting the Original Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

Using the Arrow Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Using the Numeric Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38

Margin Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42
Mail Box (Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43

Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

Original Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44
Book Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46
Binding Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48

4-1
 4. Special Copying and Mail Box Features

Job Done Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50

Different Size Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Mail Box (Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52

Job Build . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53

Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Mail Box (Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55

Scan Image Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56

Using Image Creation Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
4 Inverting Images (Nega/Posi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

Image Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59

Mirror Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Area Designation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64

Tab Paper Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72

Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Mail Box (Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74

Adjusting the Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75

Image Quality Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Adjusting the Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
One Touch Color Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87

Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90

Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
Mail Box (Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91

Composing Images (Form Composition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92

Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Mail Box (Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94

Composing Images (Image Composition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95

Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
Mail Box (Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98

Embedding Hidden Text in the Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99

Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
Mail Box (Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103

Page and Copy Set Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104

Page Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
Copy Set Numbering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109

4-2
 4. Special Copying and Mail Box Features

Printing a Watermark and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111

Watermark Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
Date Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114

Combining Multiple Batches of Originals with Different Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116

Storing Scanned Originals with Copy Settings in a User Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

4-3
 What are Special Features?
Special features, such as the Booklet and Job Build modes, are modes for
performing various kinds of editing according to your needs, when copying, printing,
or storing documents in an inbox.

IMPORTANT
Depending on the mode, some combinations of modes will not be available. See
"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.

4
Specifying the Special Copying Features
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

1 Place your originals.

2 Press [Special Features].

4-4 What are Special Features?

3 Select the desired mode from the Special Features screen.

Special Features Screen (1/2)

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

Special Features Screen (2/2)

IMPORTANT
Depending on the mode, you may have to place your original on the platen glass or
in the feeder. See the corresponding section on each mode for detailed
information.

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [ ] or [ ] to scroll to the desired
setting.

4 Set the desired mode.

For more information on setting each mode, see the corresponding section.
To set other modes at the same time, repeat steps 3 and 4.

What are Special Features? 4-5

 5 Press (Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on
the touch panel display ➞ press (Start) once for each original. When scanning
is complete, press [Done].
Copying starts.

NOTE
• To cancel this setting, follow the procedure below.
- For modes which have a right triangle ( ) on the bottom right of their key:
Example: Frame Erase
Press [Special Features] ➞ [Frame Erase] ➞ [Cancel].
- For modes which do not have a right triangle ( ) on the bottom right of their key:
Example: Job Build
4 Press [Special Features] ➞ [Job Build].
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

(Reset).

Specifying the Special Mail Box Features for Scanning

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ place your originals

➞ press [Scan].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 to 5 of "Storing Originals into an
Inbox," on p. 2-12.
The Scan screen is displayed.

2 Press [Special Features].

4-6 What are Special Features?

3 Select the desired mode from the Special Features screen.

IMPORTANT
Depending on the mode, you may have to place your original on the platen glass or
in the feeder. See the corresponding section on each mode for detailed
4
information.

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

4 Set the desired mode.
For more information on setting each mode, see the corresponding section.
To set other modes at the same time, repeat steps 3 and 4.

5 Press (Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on
the touch panel display ➞ press (Start) once for each original. When scanning
is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.

NOTE
• To cancel this setting, follow the procedure below.
- For modes which have a right triangle ( ) on the bottom right of their key:
Example: Frame Erase
Press [Special Features] ➞ [Frame Erase] ➞ [Cancel].
- For modes which do not have a right triangle ( ) on the bottom right of their key:
Example: Job Build
Press [Special Features] ➞ [Job Build].
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard Scan mode, press
[Initial Settings]. To return to the Inbox Selection screen, press (Reset).

What are Special Features? 4-7

 Specifying the Special Mail Box Features for Printing

1 Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to

print ➞ press [Print] ➞ [Change Pr. Settings].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 to 5 of "Printing Documents Stored
in an Inbox," on p. 2-19.
The Change Print Settings screen is displayed.

2 Press [Special Features].

4
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

3 Select the desired mode from the Special Features screen.

4 Set the desired mode.

For more information on setting each mode, see the corresponding section.
To set other modes at the same time, repeat steps 3 and 4.

4-8 What are Special Features?

5 Press [Start Print].
If there is a current or reserved print job, the document is placed in the queue
and is printed after the current or reserved job is complete.
Printing starts.

NOTE
• To cancel this setting, follow the procedure below.
- Example: Booklet
Press [Special Features] ➞ [Booklet] ➞ [Cancel].
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to Standard Local Print Settings,
press [Initial Settings]. To return to the Inbox Selection screen, press (Reset).

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

What are Special Features? 4-9

 2-Page Separation
This mode enables you to scan facing pages of a book or bound original, print them
in two separate pages, or store them as two separate pages.

4
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

IMPORTANT
• For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with this mode, see
"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.
• Place your original on the platen glass. The 2-Page Separation mode cannot be used
when the original is placed in the feeder.

NOTE
To make two-sided copies of books or bound originals, use the Book 2-Sided copying
feature of the 2-Sided mode. (See "Book to 2-Sided," on p. 3-49.)

4-10 2-Page Separation

Copying

1 Place your originals on the platen glass ➞ press [Special

Features] ➞ [2-Page Separation] ➞ [Done].
When placing an original, to make copies in the correct page order, begin
scanning from the first open page of the book or bound original. Place your
originals face down, making sure that their top edge is aligned with the back
edge of the platen glass (by the arrow in the top left corner).

2 Press (Start).
To scan the next two facing pages, turn the page of the original ➞ place your
original on the platen glass ➞ press (Start). 4

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

3 When scanning is complete, press [Done].

Mail Box (Scan)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ place your originals

on the platen glass ➞ press [Scan] ➞ [Special Features] ➞
[2-Page Separation].

2 Specify the 2-Page Separation settings in accordance with

steps 2 to 3 of "Copying" on p. 4-11.

2-Page Separation 4-11

 Cover/Sheet Insertion
This mode enables you to set the machine to automatically add front and back
covers, sheet insertions, chapter pages, or tab paper using a different type of paper
from that used for the main documents. In addition, you can decide whether the
front and back covers, and the sheet insertions are copied or printed on as well.
Chapter pages and tab paper are always copied or printed on.

IMPORTANT
• For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with this mode, see
4 "Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.
• For the Mail Box function, you cannot set the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode when you
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

select multiple documents. In this case, set the Cover/Job Separator mode.
• If you select the Staple mode when the optional Finisher-AA1 or Saddle Finisher-AA2 is
attached, you cannot staple more than 30 sheets of A3, B4, or A4R paper, or 50 sheets
of A4 or B5 paper, including sheet insertions.
• If you are using labels, you cannot copy (print) on the front cover, back cover, or sheet
insertions. However, you can copy (print) on the inside of the back cover.

NOTE
• If you are copying/printing on the front cover, back cover, or sheet insertions, these
sheets are included in the count of the total number of copies/prints made. If these
sheets are left blank, however, the machine's counter does not count them as copies/
prints.
• If you are adding chapter pages or tab paper, these sheets are included in the count of
the total number of copies/prints made.

4-12 Cover/Sheet Insertion

■ Front Cover/Back Cover
This setting adds a front cover and back cover sheet to each set of copies/prints. You may
also copy/print on the front/back cover sheet.

Originals Copies
Printed
Front Cover

Printed
Back Cover

■ Sheet Insertion/Chapter Page

This setting inserts a sheet of paper between copies/prints. The Sheet Insertion mode is 4
useful when you want to use a blank sheet to help sort out the copies/prints. You may also

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

copy/print on the sheet insertions. Since the chapter page is always copied/printed on one
side, the Chapter Page mode is useful when you want to organize the copies/prints by
chapter.

Originals Copies
Printed Sheet
Insertion
Printed
Chapter Page

■ Tab Paper
This setting inserts sheets of tab paper into the prints. Since tab paper is always copied/
printed on one side, this feature is useful when you want to divide the main body of text.

Originals Copies

Printed Tab Paper

Cover/Sheet Insertion 4-13

 • To print on the tab paper, set the shift width of the image to be printed on the tabs.

Shift
Width

NOTE
• When printing on tab paper, check that the position of the tabs is correct.
• Tab paper is always printed on. If you do not want to print on the tab paper, insert blank
sheets of paper in each place where you want the tab paper to go.
4 • Images in the area which is to be shifted, but not within the tab area, may cause the
prints to have black streaks or appear as dirty.
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

Example: Images may be printed onto other parts of the tab paper.

Area to be Shifted

• For instructions on entering values in inches, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.

4-14 Cover/Sheet Insertion

Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features] ➞ press

[Cover/Sheet Insertion].

2 Select the desired Cover/Sheet Insertion feature ➞ press

[Paper Select] for each selected feature.

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

You cannot select [Sheet Insertion] and [Chapter Page] at the same time.

NOTE
To cancel a selected feature, press that key again.

3 Select the paper source ➞ press [Done].

IMPORTANT
• Select the same size paper for [Front Cover], [Back Cover], [Sheet Insertion] (or
[Chapter Page]), and [Tab Paper].
• If you try to set a different paper size for one feature, the paper sizes for the other
features are automatically changed to the new paper size. However, if you are only
changing the paper source with the same paper size, the settings for the other
features will not change.
• If you select [Tab Paper], only A4 paper can be used.

4 Press [Next].
If only [Chapter Page] and/or [Tab Paper] were selected, proceed to step 6.

5 Select whether to copy/print on the front cover, back cover, or

sheet insertion ➞ press [Next].
If [Sheet Insertion], [Chapter Page], or [Tab Paper] is not selected, press [OK].

Cover/Sheet Insertion 4-15

 NOTE
• A chapter page and tab paper are always copied/printed on one side.
• If you select [Leave Blank] for the front and/or back cover and/or sheet insertion,
the machine inserts a sheet of paper from the paper source that you selected in
step 3 to be used as the copy's/print's front and/or back cover. You can also select
the paper source for the sheet insertion in step 7.
- If you are using paper that already has printing on it (e.g., company logo) as your
front and/or back cover and/or sheet insertion, then you must select [Leave
Blank]. Otherwise, the machine will copy/print your original's first or last page on
the preprinted paper.
• If you select [Print on Front Side], [Print on Back Side], or [Copy on Both Sides] for
the front and/or back cover and/or sheet insertion, the machine inserts a sheet of
paper from the paper source that you selected in step 3, and prints your original on
its front side, back side, or on both sides. This will then be used as the copy's/
print's front cover. You can also select the paper source for the sheet insertion in
4 step 7.
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

6 Press [Add].

7 Specify where the sheet insertions, chapter pages, or tab

papers should be added using - (numeric keys) ➞ press
[OK].
If you are inserting the sheet insertions, you can change the paper source and
side(s) to be printed on.
If you are inserting the chapter pages, you can change the paper sources.
If you are inserting the tab papers, you can change the paper source. However, if
you change the paper source, all of the paper sources for the tab paper are
changed.
Repeat steps 6 and 7, as necessary.

IMPORTANT
• You cannot insert a sheet insertion or chapter page on the first page. Set their
positions starting from the second page. However, you can insert the tab paper in
front of the first page.
• If you select [Copy on Both Sides] for the front cover and tab paper is set to insert
in front of the first page, the front cover is output first as blank, and then the printed
tab paper is output.
• If you select [Leave Blank] for the sheet insertion, you can set the same page for
tab paper. In this case, the paper for the sheet insertion is output first, and then the
tab paper is output.

4-16 Cover/Sheet Insertion

 NOTE
• The settings are displayed in the order of insertion.
• You can insert up to 100 sheet insertions, chapter pages, or sheets of tab paper.

8 Press [Next].
If [Tab Paper] is not selected, press [OK].

9 Set the copy shift width (0 mm to 25 mm) by pressing [-] or [+]

➞ press [OK].

Mail Box (Print)

4

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

1 Select the desired User Inbox number and document to print
➞ press [Print] ➞ [Change Pr. Settings] ➞ [Special Features] ➞
[Cover/Sheet Insertion].

2 Specify the Cover/Sheet Insertion settings in accordance with

steps 2 to 9 of "Copying," on p. 4-15.

Cover/Sheet Insertion 4-17

 Cover/Job Separator
If you select multiple documents and set the Merge Documents mode, you can
specify the Cover/Job Separator mode. The Cover/Job Separator mode
automatically adds front and back covers, or job separator sheets to divide each
document, using a different type of paper from that used for the main document.

IMPORTANT
• For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with this mode, see
"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.
4 • You can set the Cover/Job Separator mode only if you select multiple documents and set
the Merge Documents mode. (See "Merging Documents," on p. 3-59.)
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

• You cannot print on the job separator sheets.

• If you select the Staple mode when the optional Finisher-AA1 or Saddle Finisher-AA2 is
attached, you cannot staple more than 30 sheets of A3, B4, or A4R paper, or 50 sheets
of A4 or B5 paper, including sheet insertions.

NOTE
• The Cover/Job Separator mode is available for the Mail Box function only.
• Job separator sheets are not counted as prints.

■ Front Cover/Back Cover

This setting adds a front cover or back cover sheet to each set of prints. You may also
print on the front cover or back cover sheet.

Printed
Back Cover

4-18 Cover/Job Separator

■ Job Separator
This setting inserts a sheet of paper between documents. You cannot print on the job
separator sheets.

4
1 Select the desired User Inbox number and documents to print

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

in the order that you want to print ➞ press [Print] ➞ [Change
Pr. Settings] ➞ [Merge Documents] ➞ [Special Features] ➞
[Cover/Job Separator].
[Merge Documents] is displayed only when the multiple documents are selected.

2 Select the desired Cover/Job Separator feature(s) ➞ press

[Paper Select] for each selected feature.

IMPORTANT
You cannot print on the job separator sheets.

NOTE
To cancel a Cover/Job Separator feature, press the feature key again.

3 Select the paper source for each selected feature ➞ press

[Done] ➞ [Next].
If only [Job Separator] is selected, select the paper source for the job separator
sheets ➞ press [Done] ➞ [OK].

IMPORTANT
• Select the same paper size for [Front Cover], [Back Cover], and [Job Separator].
• If you try to set a different paper size for one feature, the paper sizes for the other
features are automatically changed to the new paper size. However, if you are
switching to another paper source with the same paper size, the settings for the
other features will not change.

Cover/Job Separator 4-19

 4 Select the side(s) to be printed for the front and/or back cover
➞ press [OK].

NOTE
• The screens that appear on your machine may differ depending on the setting in
step 2.
• If you select [Leave Blank] for the front and/or back cover, the machine inserts a
sheet of paper from the paper source that you selected in step 3 to be used as the
print's front and/or back cover.
- If you are using paper that already has printing on it (e.g., company logo) as your
front and/or back cover, you must select [Leave Blank].
• If you select [Print on Front Side], [Print on Back Side], or [Print on Both Sides] for
the front and/or back cover, the machine inserts a sheet of paper from the paper
source that you selected in step 3, and prints your original on its front side, back
4 side, or on both sides. This will then be used as the print's front and/or back cover.
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

4-20 Cover/Job Separator

Booklet Mode
This mode enables you to copy/print one-sided or two-sided originals in such a way
that the copies/prints are made into a booklet.
For the Booklet Scanning mode of the Mail Box function, see "Booklet Scanning,"
on p. 4-28.

■ Booklet
This mode enables you to copy/print one-sided or two-sided originals in such a way that
the copies/prints are made into a booklet. 4

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

Originals Copy

When the Saddle Finisher-AA2 is attached

Booklet Mode 4-21

 ■ Divided Booklet
This mode enables you to make a multiple page document with a large number of pages
into a divided booklet.

Originals Copies/Prints

1
2
Number of Sheets to Divide*1
3
4
5
6
7
8

1
73
4
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

*1 In the above example illustration,

9
10 the number of sheets is two.
11
12
13
14
15
16

■ Creep (Displacement) Correction

This mode enables you to adjust the position of the images in a booklet by calculating the
width of the displacement between the outermost page and center page of the booklet.

Trimmed

After the pages are

trimmed, the outer
margins of all
pages are equal.

The inner margins are set so that the inner

margins of the outermost pages are wider
than the inner margins of the center pages.
The placement of the images on each page
is adjusted by calculating the amount of
displacement between the outermost page
and innermost page of the booklet.

4-22 Booklet Mode

 IMPORTANT
• For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with this mode, see
"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.
• Saddle stitching is not performed if there is only one output sheet.
• Saddle stitching can be performed only if the optional Saddle Finisher-AA2 is attached.
• The accuracy of folds created in the Saddle Stitch mode may vary, depending on the type
and quantity of paper.
• When printing on special types of paper, such as heavy paper or transparencies, be sure
to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavy paper. If the type of
paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the
fixing unit may become dirty, or the paper could jam, and a service repair may be
needed.

Copying 4

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

IMPORTANT
Make sure to place originals with a vertical (portrait) orientation vertically. If these
originals are placed horizontally, the even numbered pages will be printed upside down.

1 Place your original ➞ press [Special Features] ➞ [Booklet].

2 Select the original size ➞ press [Next].

If the original is two-sided, press [2-Sided Original] ➞ select the type of

two-sided original ➞ press [OK] ➞ [Next].
Details of each item are shown below.

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the original have the same
top-bottom orientation.

[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the original have opposite
top-bottom orientations.

Booklet Mode 4-23

 NOTE
• To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].
• [2-Sided Original] cannot be selected if A5R or A6R is the selected original size.

3 Select the desired paper size ➞ press [Next].

If the optional Saddle Finisher-AA2 is not attached, press [OK].
Only 305 x 457 mm, A3, B4, or A4R paper can be used for the Booklet mode.

● If you want to add a cover:

❑ Press [Add Cover] ➞ [Next].
❑ Select whether to copy on the cover page ➞ press [Next].
4 ❑ Select the desired paper type for the cover page ➞ press [Next].
If the optional Saddle Finisher-AA2 is not attached, press [OK].
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

IMPORTANT
• You must select the same paper size for the cover page as that used for copying
the main document.
• If you are using Heavy 5 paper for the cover sheets, you can only print on the inside
of the front cover or inside of the back cover.
• Only 64 to 105 g/m2 paper can be used for the main document.
• Paper of the following weight can be used as a cover sheet:
- If you are printing on the front cover or back cover: 64 to 209 g/m2
- If you are printing on the inside of the front cover or inside of the back cover: 64 to
256 g/m2
• The orientation to place the side of the paper to use for the cover page in the stack
bypass depends on the type of the paper, as shown below:
- Plain, Recycled, Color, Bond, Heavy 1 to 4: face up
- Heavy 5: face down
• If you select [Add Cover], you cannot specify the stack bypass as the paper source
used for the main document.

4-24 Booklet Mode

4 Select whether to saddle stitch the booklet ➞ press [OK].

● If [Divided Booklet] is selected:

❑ Specify the number of sheets that you want to divide by using [-] and [+] ➞
press [OK].

● If the printing position of the image is out of place, and you want to
set the creep (displacement) correction:
❑ Press [Creep Correction] ➞ select [Auto] or [Manual] ➞ press [OK] ➞ [OK].
❑ If you select [Manual], press [ ] or [ ] to adjust the correction width.

IMPORTANT
The maximum number of sheets, including cover sheets, that can be saddle 4
stitched is:

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

- 15 sheets (64 to 80 g/m2)
- 10 sheets (81 to 105 g/m2)

NOTE
• If the number of sheets is 16 or more, the booklet is not saddle stitched.
• The number of saddle stitched booklets that the booklet tray can hold depends on
the number of sheets that each booklet contains.
- 1 to 5 sheets: 25 sets
- 6 to 10 sheets: 15 sets
- 11 to 15 sheets: 10 sets
• If you selected [Add Cover], the maximum number of sets that the booklet tray can
hold is 10.
• Saddle stitching is not performed if there is only one sheet of output.
• If you set the Booklet mode, the Center Shift mode is also automatically set.

Booklet Mode 4-25

 5 Set the Booklet Tray guide to match the paper size.

305 mm x 457 mm/A3/B4 A4R

4 IMPORTANT
Make sure to set the Booklet Tray guide correctly to match the paper size. Setting
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

the Booklet Tray guide incorrectly may result in a paper jam.

4-26 Booklet Mode

Mail Box (Print)
IMPORTANT
• The Booklet mode can only be specified for the following paper sizes: A4, A4R, B5, B5R,
A5, or A5R.
• The Booklet mode cannot be set if multiple documents are selected, and their record
sizes are different.
• The Booklet mode cannot be used with documents with resolution of less than 600 x 600
dpi.

NOTE
If you want to print documents for use as a booklet, we recommend that you scan the
originals using the Booklet Scanning mode. (See "Booklet Scanning," on p. 4-28.)
4

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

1 Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to
print ➞ press [Print] ➞ [Change Pr. Settings] ➞ [Special
Features] ➞ [Booklet].

2 Specify the Booklet settings in accordance with steps 3 to 6 of

"Copying," on p. 4-23.

Booklet Mode 4-27

 Booklet Scanning
This mode enables you to scan originals in such a way that, when printing the
scanned data, the output paper can be made into a booklet. Specify the Booklet
mode when printing the scanned data. (See "Booklet Mode," on p. 4-21.)

IMPORTANT
• For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with this mode, see
"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.
• Make sure to place originals with a vertical (portrait) orientation vertically. If these
4 originals are placed horizontally, the even numbered pages will be printed upside down.
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

NOTE
The Booklet Scanning mode is available for the Mail Box function only.

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ place your originals

➞ press [Scan] ➞ [Special Features] ➞ [Booklet Scanning].

2 Select the original size ➞ press [Next].

If the original is two-sided, press [2-Sided Original] ➞ select the type of

two-sided original ➞ press [OK] ➞ [Next].
Details of each item are shown below.

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the original have the same
top-bottom orientation.

[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the original have opposite
top-bottom orientations.

4-28 Booklet Scanning

 NOTE
• To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].
• [2-Sided Original] cannot be selected if A5R or A6R is the selected original size.

3 Select the booklet layout size ➞ press [OK].

NOTE
To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

Booklet Scanning 4-29

 Transparency Interleaving
When copying onto transparencies, this mode enables you to automatically add an
interleaving sheet of paper between each sheet of transparency that is output. The
interleaf sheets protect the copied surface of the transparencies. You can also set
to copy the content of the transparencies onto interleaf sheets.

IMPORTANT
• For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with this mode, see
"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.
4 • Even if an optional finisher is attached, you cannot use any of the Finishing modes with
the Transparency Interleaving mode.
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

• Only A4 is available for the Transparency Interleaving mode.

NOTE
• The Transparency Interleaving mode is available for the Copying function only.
• The machine's counter does not count blank interleaf sheets as copies.

■ If You Do Not Want to Print on the Interleaf Sheets:

The [Leave Blank] setting outputs a printed transparency and a blank interleaf sheet
alternately.

Originals Copies
Transparencies

Blank Interleaf Sheets

4-30 Transparency Interleaving

■ If You Want to Print on the Interleaf Sheets:
The [Print] setting outputs a printed transparency and a printed interleaf sheet alternately.

Originals Copies
Transparencies

Printed Interleaf Sheets

4

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features] ➞
[Transparency Interleaving].

2 Select the paper source for transparencies ➞ press [Next].

Transparency Interleaving 4-31

 If the following screen is displayed, perform either of the following procedures in
Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) (See Chapter 4,
"Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.):
• Set Register Paper Type for the selected paper source to [Transparency].
• Set the paper type setting to [Transparency] if Stack Bypass Standard Settings
is set to 'On'.

4
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

IMPORTANT
Make sure that transparencies are loaded into the selected paper source. Loading
paper types other than transparencies may result in a paper jam.

3 Select whether to copy on the interleaf sheets ➞ press [Next].

4 Select the paper source for the interleaf sheets ➞ press [OK].

NOTE
• If you are copying onto the interleaf sheets, these sheets are included in the count
of the total number of copies made.
• The copies are output with the copied side face down, alternating between
transparency and interleaf sheet.

4-32 Transparency Interleaving

Image Combination
This mode enables you to automatically reduce two, four, or eight originals, as well
as two-sided originals or the facing pages of a book, to fit onto one side or both
sides of a selected paper (record) size.

IMPORTANT
• For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with this mode, see
"Combination of Functions Chart," on p 9-8.
• Originals copied/scanned in the Image Combination mode must all be the same size. You
cannot use the Image Combination mode with the Different Size Originals mode. 4
• For the Copy function, you can change or specify the number of copies or 2-Sided

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

Original mode before scanning the next batch of originals (i.e., between batches).
• For the Mail Box function, you can change or specify the 2-Sided Original mode before
scanning the next batch of originals (i.e., between batches).

NOTE
The reduction ratio is automatically set so that the originals fit onto the selected paper
(record) size.

Originals Copy

or

2 On 1

■ 2 On 1
This setting reduces two 1-sided originals or one 2-sided original to fit onto one side or
both sides of one sheet of paper.

■ 4 On 1
This setting reduces four 1-sided or two 2-sided originals to fit onto one side or both sides
of one sheet of paper.

■ 8 On 1
This setting reduces eight 1-sided or four 2-sided originals to fit onto one side or both
sides of one sheet of paper.

Image Combination 4-33

 Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features] ➞ [Image

Combination].

2 Select the original size ➞ press [Next].

4
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

If the original is two-sided, press [2-Sided Original] ➞ select the type of

two-sided original ➞ press [OK] ➞ [Next].
Details of each item are shown below.

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the original have the same
top-bottom orientation.

[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the original have opposite
top-bottom orientations.

NOTE
• To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].
• [2-Sided Original] cannot be selected if A5R or A6R is the selected original size.

4-34 Image Combination

3 Select the desired Image Combination feature ➞ press [Next].
If you want to make two-sided copies, press [2-Sided Copy] ➞ select the type of
two-sided orientation ➞ press [OK] ➞ [Next].
Details of each item are shown below.

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the original have the same
top-bottom orientation.

[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the original have opposite
top-bottom orientations.

If you want to specify the image order, press [Option] ➞ select the image order ➞
press [Done] ➞ [Next].
If you do not change the image order by pressing [Option], the images are
printed as follows: 4
Left ➞ Right

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

2 On 1:

4 On 1 and 8 On 1: Upper Left ➞ Upper Right ➞ Lower Left ➞ Lower Right

4 Select the desired paper size ➞ press [OK].

NOTE
• The machine automatically selects the copy ratio depending on the selected paper
size.
• If you set the Image Combination mode, the Center Shift mode is also
automatically set.

Image Combination 4-35

 Mail Box (Scan)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ place your originals

➞ press [Scan] ➞ [Special Features] ➞ [Image Combination].

2 Specify the Image Combination settings in accordance with

steps 2 to 4 of "Copying," on p. 4-34.

NOTE
• To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].
• The original is scanned with the reduction ratio automatically set, depending on the
4 selected record size.
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

4-36 Image Combination

Shifting the Original Image
You can make copies or prints with the entire original image shifted to the center or
a corner.

IMPORTANT
• For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with this mode, see
"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.
• If [Center/Corner Shift] is selected, and the original and the copy paper are the same
size and the copy ratio is set at 100%, the image of the original is not shifted.
• If you use the numeric keys to enter the shift position, the original image may be partially 4
cut off on the copy, depending on the size of the original, the size of the copy paper, and

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

the amount of shift specified.

Using the Arrow Keys

The [Center/Corner Shift] setting enables you to use the arrow keys on the touch
panel display to make copies with the entire original image shifted to the center or a
corner.

Copy with the Copy with the

Original Image Original Image
Original Shifted to the Center Shifted to a Corner

NOTE
The Center/Corner Shift mode is available for the Copying function only.

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features] ➞ [Shift].

Shifting the Original Image 4-37

 2 Press [Center/Corner Shift] ➞ select the shift direction with an
arrow key ➞ press [OK].

The shift direction is the direction that you want the original image moved to, if
4 you first visualize the original image as being face up and appearing in the
center of the copy page.
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

Using the Numeric Keys

The [No. Key Entry] setting enables you to shift the entire image to a position that
you specify using - (numeric keys).

Original Copy
120 mm
Using the Numeric
Keys to Shift the 80 mm
Position

NOTE
For instructions on entering values in inches, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.

4-38 Shifting the Original Image

Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features] ➞ [Shift].

2 Press [No. Key Entry] ➞ press [Settings] under <Front Side>

or <Back Side>.

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

NOTE
Back side settings are only valid when making two-sided copies/prints.

3 Use - (numeric keys) to enter the shift position.

❑ Select the shift direction.
❑ Enter the shift value.
❑ Press [OK].

NOTE
To change a value you entered, select the shift direction ➞ enter the correct value
using - (numeric keys).

Shifting the Original Image 4-39

 ● Example: To move the original image in a diagonal direction:
❑ Press the top [ ].
❑ Enter the shift value.
❑ Press the right [ ].
❑ Enter the shift value.

4
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

4 Press [OK].

Mail Box (Print)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to

print ➞ press [Print] ➞ [Change Pr. Settings] ➞ [Special
Features] ➞ [Shift].

2 Specify the Shift settings in accordance with steps 2 to 4 of

"Copying," on p. 4-39.

4-40 Shifting the Original Image

Margin Mode
This mode enables you to make copies or prints with the entire original image
shifted by a designated width to the left, right, top, or bottom in order to create a
margin on the copies. Use this mode to make copies or prints ready for placement
in ring binders.

Original Left Margin Right Margin Top Margin Bottom Margin

Selected Selected Selected Selected

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

IMPORTANT
• For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with this mode, see
"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.
• The Margin mode shifts the entire original image by the designated width. Therefore, an
original whose image extends all the way to the edges of the sheet may be partially cut
off on the copy.

NOTE
• You can choose to only create a margin on the back side of a copy. Therefore, originals
that already have a margin can be copied in the 1 2-Sided mode or 2 1-Sided mode.
• For instructions on entering values in inches, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.

Margin Mode 4-41

 Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features] ➞ [Margin].

2 Select the desired margin type.

4
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

3 Select [Front Side] or [Back Side] ➞ press [-] or [+] to set the
margin width ➞ press [OK].

IMPORTANT
• If you are using the Margin and 2-Sided modes together and copying or printing a
document that already has a margin, follow the instructions below:
- 1 2-Sided: Set the Margin mode for the back only.
- 2 2-Sided: You do not need to set the Margin mode. Proceed to make copies or
prints in the usual way.
- 2 1-Sided: Set the Margin mode for the back only.
• If you are using the Margin and 2-Sided modes together and copying or printing a
document that already has a left or right margin, follow the instructions below:
- 1 2-Sided: Set the Margin mode for both the front and back.
- 2 2-Sided: Set the Margin mode for both the front and back.
- 2 1-Sided: Set the Margin mode for both the front and back.

NOTE
If you enter a value other than 0, you can switch between positive and negative
margin width by pressing [±].
Example: (+)10 ➞ [±] ➞ -10
-50 ➞ [±] ➞ (+)50

4-42 Margin Mode

Mail Box (Print)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to

print ➞ press [Print] ➞ [Change Pr. Settings] ➞ [Special
Features] ➞ [Margin].

2 Specify the Margin settings in accordance with steps 2 and 3

of "Copying," on p. 4-42.

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

Margin Mode 4-43

 Frame Erase
This mode enables you to erase shadows and lines that appear when copying
(scanning) various types of originals. There are three types of the Frame Erase
mode: Original Frame Erase, Book Frame Erase, and Binding Erase.

IMPORTANT
For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with this mode, see
"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.

4 NOTE
For instructions on entering values in inches, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

Reference Guide.

Original Frame Erase

This mode erases the dark borders and frame lines that appear around the copy
(scanned image) if the original is smaller than the selected paper size. You can also
use this mode to create a blank border around the edge of the copy (recorded
page).

Copy (A4)

Original Frame
Erase Selected
Original (A5)

Copy (A4)

Original Frame
Erase Not Selected

4-44 Frame Erase

Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features] ➞ [Frame

Erase].

2 Press [Original Frame Erase].

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

3 Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase width.

● If you want to set the same width for all four borders:
❑ Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase width ➞ press [Next].

● If you want to set the top, left, right, and bottom widths
independently:
❑ Press [Adjust Each Dim.].
❑ Select the desired frame erase borders ➞ press [-] or [+] to set their respective
frame erase widths ➞ press [Next].
To return to the screen for setting the same width for all four borders, press
[Adjust All At Once].

4 Select the original size ➞ press [OK].

IMPORTANT
You can set the Original Frame Erase mode only for the original paper sizes shown
on the touch panel display.

NOTE
To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].

Frame Erase 4-45

 Mail Box (Scan)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ place your originals

➞ press [Scan] ➞ [Special Features] ➞ [Frame Erase].

2 Specify the Frame Erase settings in accordance with steps 2

to 4 of "Copying," on p. 4-45.

Book Frame Erase

This mode erases the dark border, as well as center and contour lines that appear if
you are copying (scanning) facing pages in a book or bound original onto a single
4 sheet of paper (recorded page).
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

Copy

Book Frame
Erase Selected
Original

Copy

Book Frame
Erase Not
Selected

4-46 Frame Erase

Copying

1 Place your original on the platen glass ➞ press [Special

Features] ➞ [Frame Erase].

2 Press [Book Frame Erase].

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

3 Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase widths.

● If you want to set the same width for all four borders:
❑ Press [Center] and [Sides] ➞ press [-] or [+] to set their respective frame erase
widths ➞ press [Next].

● If you want to set the top, left, center, right, and bottom widths
independently:
❑ Press [Adjust Each Dim.].
❑ Select the desired frame erase borders ➞ press [-] or [+] to set their respective
frame erase widths ➞ press [Next].
To return to the screen for setting the same width for all four borders, press
[Adjust All At Once].

4 Select the size of the bound original when it is open ➞ press

[OK].

IMPORTANT
You can set the Book Frame Erase mode only for the original paper sizes shown on
the touch panel display.

NOTE
To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].

Frame Erase 4-47

 Mail Box (Scan)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ place your original on

the platen glass ➞ press [Scan] ➞ [Special Features] ➞ [Frame
Erase].

2 Specify the Frame Erase settings in accordance with steps 2

to 4 of "Copying," on p. 4-47.

Binding Erase
4 This mode erases the shadows that appear on copies (scanned image) from
binding holes on originals.
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

Copy

Binding Erase
Selected
Original

Copy

Binding Erase
Not Selected

IMPORTANT
• Make sure you place your original on the platen glass. Do not place originals with binding
holes in the feeder, as this may damage the originals.
• When using the Binding Erase mode, the borders you do not select are also erased by 4
mm.

4-48 Frame Erase

Copying

1 Place your originals on the platen glass ➞ press [Special

Features] ➞ [Frame Erase].

2 Press [Binding Erase] ➞ select the border where the binding

holes are located.

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

The border is where the binding holes are located on the original, if you visualize
the original as being face up.

3 Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase width ➞ press [OK].

Mail Box (Scan)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ place your original on

the platen glass ➞ press [Scan] ➞ [Special Features] ➞ [Frame
Erase].

2 Specify the Frame Erase settings in accordance with steps 2

and 3 of "Copying," on p. 4-49.

Frame Erase 4-49

 Job Done Notice
This mode enables you to set the machine to notify you through e-mail when the
current copy job is done. This is especially useful when you are waiting in line for a
large copy job to complete.

IMPORTANT
To be able to set the Job Done Notice mode, you must first store your e-mail address in
the Address Book. (See Chapter 9, "Storing/Editing Address Book Settings," in the
Sending Guide.)
4
NOTE
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

• The Job Done Notice is available for the Copying function only.
• The Job Done Notice can be set only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features] ➞ [Job Done

Notice].

2 Select the destination of the job done notice ➞ press [OK].

If you want to select a destination managed with the Access Number

Management setting, press[Access Number] ➞ enter the access number for the
selected destination using - (numeric keys) ➞ press [OK]. If you press [No
Access Number], the designations that are not managed with the Access
Number Management setting are displayed.

4-50 Job Done Notice

NOTE
• For instructions on selecting a destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic Sending
Methods," in the Sending Guide.
• You cannot select multiple destinations at one time.
• Once copying is complete, a job done notice is sent to the selected destination.
• To display the [Access Number] key, set Access Number Management to 'On'. To
access the Access Number Management setting, press (Additional Functions)
➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Restrict the Send Function] ➞ [Access Number
Management]. (See Chapter 10, "System Manager Settings," in the Sending
Guide.)

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

Job Done Notice 4-51

 Different Size Originals
This mode enables you to copy (scan) different size originals, such as A3 and A4,
or B4 and B5 together as one group by setting them in the feeder.

IMPORTANT
• For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with this mode, see
"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.
• You cannot copy (scan) different width originals, such as A3 and B4, or A4 and B5,
together as one group.
4 • If the originals are placed in the feeder, make sure that the different size originals are of
the same weight (paper type).
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

• If the Different Size Originals mode is set, the scanning speed may be slower than
normal.
• When storing a document in an inbox, if Document Size Select is set to anything but
'Auto', all of the originals are scanned in the specified size. If you want to scan the
originals in their original sizes, make sure to set Document Size Select to 'Auto'.

NOTE
When copying, if the Different Size Originals mode is used with the 1 2-Sided mode, the
copies are output as one-sided copies on paper of their respective sizes if the originals
for the front and back sides of a two-sided copy are different in size.

Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features] ➞ [Different

Size Originals].

Mail Box (Scan)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ place your originals

➞ press [Scan] ➞ [Special Features] ➞ [Different Size
Originals].

4-52 Different Size Originals

Job Build
This mode enables you to scan originals that are too many to be placed at once, by
dividing them into multiple batches. You can use both the feeder and the platen
glass for scanning. When copying, the originals are printed as one document after
all of the batches have been scanned. When storing a document in an inbox, the
originals are stored as one document after all of the batches have been scanned.

Originals Copies

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

IMPORTANT
• For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with this mode, see
"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.
• You cannot change the copy settings while the machine is scanning originals in the Job
Build mode. You need to set the necessary copy/scan settings beforehand, according to
the type of originals or the desired result.
• If you place your originals in the feeder, remove the originals from the original output area
when the scanning of each batch is complete.
• When copying, you can change or specify the following settings before scanning the next
batch of originals (i.e., between batches): the number of copies, 2-Sided Original mode,
original type, copy exposure, color mode, and copy ratio. However, if you specify the
Image Combination mode together with the Job Build mode, you cannot change the copy
exposure, original type, color mode, and copy ratio.
• When storing a document in an inbox, you can change or specify the following settings
before scanning the next batch of originals (i.e., between batches): the 2-sided Original
mode, original type, scan exposure, color mode. However, you cannot change the
original type, scan exposure, and color mode, while the machine is scanning originals in
the Image Combination mode.
• If you use the Job Block Combination mode, the Job Build mode is automatically set for
each batch of originals. You cannot use the Job Build mode for the combined document.

Job Build 4-53

 NOTE
• If you place different size originals in the feeder, set the Different Size Originals mode.
(See "Different Size Originals," on p. 4-52.)
• It is useful to store originals in an inbox first, and print them later using the Merge
Documents mode if you cannot prepare the originals at one time, or if you want to specify
different settings for each original. (See "Merging Documents," on p. 3-59.)
• When copying, if you want to copy one-sided and two-sided originals as two-sided
copies, divide the originals into one-sided and two-sided batches. For example, if the first
batch of originals to be copied consists of two-sided originals, set the 2-Sided Original
mode accordingly. Thereafter, you have to manually set or cancel the 2-Sided Original
mode for each batch of originals that you scan.
• When storing a document in an inbox, if you want to scan one-sided and two-sided
originals and store them as two-sided documents, divide the originals into one-sided and
two-sided batches. For example, if the first batch consists of two-sided originals, set the
2-sided Original mode. Thereafter, you have to manually set or cancel the 2-sided
4 Original mode for each batch of originals that you scan.
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features] ➞ [Job Build].

2 Press (Start).

NOTE
To cancel scanning, press [Cancel] or (Stop).

3 When scanning is complete, place your next batch of originals

➞ press (Start).
If you want to change the scan settings, change them before pressing (Start).

4-54 Job Build

 ● If the original is two-sided:
❑ Press [2-Sided Original].

❑ Select the type of two-sided original ➞ press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below. 4
[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the original have the same

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

top-bottom orientation.
[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the original have opposite
top-bottom orientations.
Do not forget to set or cancel the 2-Sided Original mode, according to the
type of originals you place next.
To cancel the 2-Sided Original mode, press [2-Sided Original] ➞ [Cancel].
Repeat this step as necessary.

4 After the last batch of originals is scanned, press [Done].

Mail Box (Scan)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ place your originals

➞ press [Scan] ➞ [Special Features] ➞ [Job Build].

2 Specify the Job Build settings in accordance with steps 2 to 4

of "Copying," on p. 4-54.

Job Build 4-55

 Scan Image Check
This enables you to confirm scanned images page by page while copying them
when you scan originals in succession on the platen glass. This is useful to prevent
miscopying resulting from misscanning.

IMPORTANT
• For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with this mode, see
"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.
• When 1 2-Sided is set, two-sided copying is not performed and the machine copies
4 each original at a time.
• The originals must be set on the platen glass. You cannot copy using Scan Image Check
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

mode with the originals set in the feeder.

NOTE
The Scan Image Check is available for the Copying function only.

1 Place your originals on the platen glass ➞ press [Special

Features] ➞ [Scan Image Check].

2 Press (Start).

NOTE
To cancel scanning, press [Cancel] or press (Stop).

4-56 Scan Image Check

3 Confirm the contents of the printout ➞ scan the next original.

To rescan the image immediately after an original has scanned, replace the
original ➞ select [Re-Scan] ➞ press (Start).
If you want to change the copy settings, make the changes before pressing 4
(Start).

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

• You can adjust the exposure and the image quality. (See "Exposure and Original
Type Settings," on p. 3-2.)
• You can change the number of copy sets. (See "Flow of Copy Operations," on p.
1-7.)
• You can change the copy ratio. (See "Changing the Copy (Zoom) Ratio," on p.
3-10.)
• You can change the color mode. (See "Changing Color Modes," on p. 3-54.)

4 After all originals are scanned, press [Done].

Scan Image Check 4-57

 Using Image Creation Modes
The Image Creation modes enable you to rearrange the images of originals for the
effect that you want. There are four types of Image Creation modes: Nega/Posi,
Image Repeat, Mirror Image, and Area Designation modes.

IMPORTANT
For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with this mode, see
"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.

4
Inverting Images (Nega/Posi)
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

This mode enables you to make copies of, or scan and record the original image by
inverting the hues and gradations.

Original Copy

4-58 Using Image Creation Modes

 Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features] ➞ [Image

Creation].

2 Press [Nega/Posi].

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

Mail Box (Scan)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ place your originals

➞ press [Scan] ➞ [Special Features] ➞ [Nega/Posi].

Image Repeat
This mode enables you to repeatedly copy the entire original image in either the
vertical or horizontal direction.
The following two settings are available for the Image Repeat mode.

IMPORTANT
• To use Area Designation (Framing) with the Image Repeat mode, first specify the Image
Repeat mode, and then designate the desired area. Only one area can be designated.
• Even if the color mode is set to 'Auto-Color Select', and the number of times the image to
be repeated is set to too many or the designated area is too small, the color original may
be scanned in the Black mode.

NOTE
• The Image Repeat mode is available for the Copying function only.
• For instructions on entering values in inches, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.

Using Image Creation Modes 4-59

 ■ Automatic Setting
The original image is copied so that the maximum possible number of repeats fit onto the
selected paper size.

Original Copy

■ Manual Setting
The original image is copied the specified number of times.
4
Original Copy
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

Example: If '3 times' is specified,

images overlap when copied.

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features] ➞ [Image

Creation].
If you are designating the area to repeat using the edit pen, place the original on
the platen glass.
To copy multiple originals using the same designated area, remove the original
from the platen glass after specifying the area (after completing step 5), and then
place all of the originals in the feeder.

2 Press [Image Repeat].

4-60 Using Image Creation Modes

3 Set the number of times that you want the image to repeat for
both the vertical and horizontal directions.

● If you want to set the number of repeats automatically:

4
❑ Press [Auto].

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

If [Auto] is already selected, this step is not necessary.

● If you want to set the number of repeats manually:

❑ Press [-] or [+] to set the number of times that you want the image to repeat.

IMPORTANT
The repeated images may overlap or have gaps between them, depending on the
number of repeats that you set.

4 If you want only a designated area on the original to be

repeated, press [Framing].
If you are not designating an area to repeat, proceed to step 6.

5 Designate the area.

NOTE
If you designate an area using the edit pen, the output image may not reflect the
designated area precisely. To designate an area precisely, entering values by using
the numeric keys is recommended.

● Using the edit pen:

❑ Press [Pen Entry].
❑ Press [Start Scan].

IMPORTANT
Check that the original is placed on the platen glass.

Using Image Creation Modes 4-61

 ❑ Designate the area using the edit pen.
Mark the two opposing points with the edit pen.

NOTE
• To clear the first point entered, press [Erase Point]. (Once an area is designated,
[Erase Point] changes to [Clear Area].)
• To clear a designated area, press [Clear Area].
• To zoom in on any area on the original, press the ratio drop-down list ➞ select an
enlargement ratio ➞ press [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] to specify the area to display.
• To check the designated area, press [Preview].
• To modify a designated area that was specified by using the edit pen, press [Area
Fine Adj.] ➞ [Point select] ➞ select the point that you want to modify ➞ press [ ],
[ ], [ ], or [ ] to move the point ➞ press [Done] ➞ [Preview] to check the
modified area.
4 ❑ Press [OK].
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

● Using the numeric keys:

❑ Press [Numeric Key Entry].

IMPORTANT
• Before performing the next step, you must manually measure the size and position
of the area that you want to designate on the original.
• When you measure the XY values, always start measuring from the image out to
the right side edge of the original, and up to the top of the original. These
measurements tell the machine the desired framed area's size and position.
❑ Press [X1], [X2], [Y1], and [Y2] ➞ use - (numeric keys) to specify the
respective measurements ➞ press [OK].
[X1]: The distance of the area's right border to the original's right edge.
[X2]: The distance of the area's left border to the original's right edge.
[Y1]: The distance of the area's top border to the original's top edge.
[Y2]: The distance of the area's bottom border to the original's top edge.

NOTE
• To change a value you entered, press [X1], [X2], [Y1], or [Y2] ➞ enter the correct
value using - (numeric keys).
• To check the designated area, press [Check Area].
• To clear all your entries, press [Clear Area].

6 To specify the amount of the space between repeated images,

press [Margin Settings].
If you do not specify [Margin Settings], proceed to step 8.

4-62 Using Image Creation Modes

 7 Specify the amount of space between repeated images using
[-] and [+].

● If you want to set the same amount of space for all four sides:
❑ Press [-] or [+] to set the amount of space ➞ press [OK].

● If you want to set the top, left, right, and bottom spaces
independently:
❑ Press [Independent Adjustment].
❑ Select the space to adjust ➞ press [-] or [+] to set its size ➞ press [OK].
To return to the screen for setting the same amount of space for all four sides,
press [Uniform Margin].
4
8

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

Press [OK].
If you need to designate the same area for multiple originals using the edit pen,
remove the original from the platen glass after specifying the area ➞ place all of
the originals in the feeder ➞ press (Start).

Mirror Image
This mode enables you to copy the original image reversed, as if it were a reflection
in a mirror.

Original Copy

NOTE
The Mirror Image mode is available for the Copying function only.

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features] ➞ [Image

Creation].

2 Press [Mirror Image].

Using Image Creation Modes 4-63

 Area Designation
This mode enables you to frame areas to scan/copy, or areas to blank out in the
scanned image. You can designate up to four areas using the edit pen on the
preview screen, or the numeric keys on the control panel. You can designate up to
four different areas.

IMPORTANT
• To use Area Designation (Framing) with the Image Repeat mode, first specify the Image
Repeat mode, and then designate the desired area. Only one area can be designated.
• The designated area is too small, the color original may be scanned in the Black mode
even if the color mode is set to 'Auto-Color Select'.

NOTE
4 • You cannot use the Area Designation mode for images that have already been stored in
an inbox. This mode is available only when you scan an image for the first time using the
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

Mail Box function.

• You can use the numeric keys to modify areas designated with the edit pen.
• If you designate an area using the edit pen, the output image may not reflect the
designated area precisely. To designate an area precisely, enter the values using the
numeric keys.

4-64 Using Image Creation Modes

Using the Edit Pen
You can use the edit pen to designate two different types of areas: a rectangular
area (two points) and a polygonal area (four points or more).

Original Copy

Use two points to

designate the area

Framing

Designate an Area

Area 4
Point

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

Blanking

Original Copy

Use multiple points to

designate the area

Framing

Designate an Area

Area

Blanking

IMPORTANT
• You can designate only one polygonal area at a time.
• You cannot designate a rectangular area and a polygonal area at the same time.
• Place your original on the platen glass.

Using Image Creation Modes 4-65

 ■ Copying

1 Place your originals on the platen glass ➞ press [Special

Features] ➞ [Image Creation].

2 Press [Area Designation] ➞ press [Pen Entry].

3 Press [Start Scan].

IMPORTANT
Confirm that the original is placed on the platen glass.
4
4 Designate the area using the edit pen.
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

IMPORTANT
You cannot designate a rectangular area and a polygonal area at the same time.

NOTE
• To clear the last point entered, press [Erase Point]. (Once an area is designated,
[Erase Point] changes to [Clear Area].)
• To clear a designated area, press [Clear Area].
• To zoom in on any area on the original, press the ratio drop-down list ➞ select an
enlargement ratio ➞ press [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] to display the desired area.

● To designate a rectangular area with two points:

❑ Designate two opposing points with the edit pen.

You can designate up to four different areas.

4-66 Using Image Creation Modes

 ● To designate an area with multiple points:
❑ Press [Multi-point] ➞ specify the area with the edit pen.
❑ After designating the last point, press [Fix Multipoints].

You can designate up to 10 points. 4

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

IMPORTANT
• If you select [Multi-point], only one area can be designated at a time.
• An area that is designated by selecting [Multi-point], cannot be modified using -
(numeric keys).

5 Select [Framing] or [Blanking].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Framing]: Copy only the contents of the designated area while discarding the
rest of the original.

[Blanking]: Copy the original by blanking out the contents of the designated
area.

If you want to use different settings for different areas, select the area by pressing
the appropriate area key ➞ select [Framing] or [Blanking].

6 Press [Preview] ➞ check the designated area ➞ press [Done].

NOTE
• If the designated area is rectangular, and you want to continue designating other
areas, repeat steps 4 to 6. Areas that have already been designated are displayed
with the new area.
• To modify a designated area that was specified using the edit pen, press [Area Fine
Adj.] ➞ [Point select] until the screen displays the desired point that you want to
modify ➞ press [ ], [ ], or [ ], or [ ] to move the point ➞ press [Done] ➞
[Preview] to check the modified area.

Using Image Creation Modes 4-67

 7 Press [Next] ➞ select [Shift center] or [Do not shift center].
If only [Blanking] is selected, this step is unnecessary. Skip to step 8.

NOTE
• If the Center Shift mode is already specified beforehand, the Center Shift Settings
screen does not appear.
• The Center Shift settings specified within the Area Designation mode are deleted
when the area settings are canceled.

8 Press [OK].
If you need to designate the same area for multiple originals, remove the original
from the platen glass ➞ place all of the originals in the feeder ➞ press (Start).
4
■ Mail Box (Scan)
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ place your original on

the platen glass ➞ press [Scan] ➞ [Special Features] ➞ [Area
Designation] ➞ [Pen Entry].

2 Specify the Area Designation settings in accordance with

steps 3 to 8 of "Copying," on p. 4-66.

4-68 Using Image Creation Modes

Using the Numeric Keys
Original Copy

X2
X1

Y1
Framing
Y2
Designate an Area

Area

Blanking 4

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

Original Copy

Framing

Designate Multiple
Areas

Area

Blanking

NOTE
For instructions on entering values in inches, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.

Using Image Creation Modes 4-69

 ■ Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features] ➞ [Image

Creation].

2 Press [Area Designation] ➞ [Numeric Key Entry].

IMPORTANT
• Before performing the next step, you must manually measure the size and position
of the area that you want to designate on the original.
• When you measure the XY values, always start measuring from the image out to
the right side edge of the original, and up to the top of the original. These
measurements tell the machine the desired framed area's size and position.
4
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

3 Press [X1], [X2], [Y1], and [Y2] ➞ use - (numeric keys) to

specify the respective measurements.

[X1]: The distance of the area's right border to the original's right edge.
[X2]: The distance of the area's left border to the original's right edge.
[Y1]: The distance of the area's top border to the original's top edge.
[Y2]: The distance of the area's bottom border to the original's top edge.
You can designate up to four areas.

NOTE
• To change a value you entered, press [X1], [X2], [Y1], or [Y2] ➞ enter the correct
value using - (numeric keys).
• To check the designated area, press [Check Area].

4-70 Using Image Creation Modes

 4 Select [Framing] or [Blanking].
Details of each item are shown below.

[Framing]: Copy only the contents of the designated area while discarding
the rest of the original.

[Blanking]: Copy the original by blanking out the contents of the designated
area.

NOTE
• To continue designating other areas, press an area key ➞ repeat step 3.
• To redesignate an area, select the area by pressing the appropriate area key.
• To clear a designated area, select the area by pressing the appropriate area key ➞
press [Clear Area].
• If you want to use different settings for different areas, select the area by pressing 4
the appropriate area key ➞ select [Framing] or [Blanking].

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

5 Press [Next] ➞ select [Shift center] or [Do not shift center].
If only [Blanking] is selected, this step is unnecessary. Skip to step 6.

NOTE
• If the Center Shift mode is already specified beforehand, the Center Shift Settings
screen does not appear.
• Center Shift settings specified within the Area Designation mode are deleted when
the area settings are canceled.

6 Press [OK].

■ Mail Box (Scan)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ place your originals

➞ press [Scan] ➞ [Special Features] ➞ [Area Designation] ➞
[Numeric Key Entry].

2 Specify the Area Designation settings in accordance with

steps 3 to 6 of "Copying," on p. 4-70.

Using Image Creation Modes 4-71

 Tab Paper Creation
Load tab paper into the paper drawer, and you can copy/print onto the tabs using
the Tab Paper Creation mode.
ABC

ABC
DEF

DEF
4
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

GHI

GHI
Tab Paper
You must set how much the image on the originals must be shifted so that the
image is copied/printed onto the tabs.

Shift
Width
ABC
ABC

ABC

IMPORTANT
• For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with this mode, see
"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.
• Only A4 originals can be used with the Tab Paper Creation mode.

4-72 Tab Paper Creation

 NOTE
• For instructions on entering values into inches, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
• When making copies or printing on tab paper, check that the position of the tabs is
correct.
• To create tab paper, it is necessary to register the type of paper in Paper Drawers 1 to 4
as tab paper in Register Paper Type in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen). (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings - Common Settings," in the Reference
Guide.)
• For instructions on loading tab paper into the paper drawer, see Chapter 7, "Routine
Maintenance," in the Reference Guide.
• Images in the area which is to be shifted, but not within the tab area, may cause the
copies to have black streaks or appear as dirty.

Example: Images may be copied onto other parts of the tab paper.
4
Area to be Shifted

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

ABC
ABC

• To cancel this setting, press [Special Features] ➞ [Tab Paper Creation] ➞ [Cancel].

Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features] ➞ [Tab Paper

Creation].

2 Select the paper drawer ➞ press [Next].

Tab Paper Creation 4-73

 3 Set the copy shift width by pressing [-] or [+] ➞ press [OK].

NOTE
• Make sure that the Number of Tabs shown on the Tab Paper Copy Shift Width
4 Settings screen is the same as the number of tabs on the tab paper loaded in the
paper drawer.
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

• You can change the number of tabs in Register Paper Type in Common Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen). (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings -
Common Settings," in the Reference Guide.)

Mail Box (Print)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to

print ➞ press [Print] ➞ [Change Pr. Settings] ➞ [Special
Features] ➞ [Tab Paper Creation].

2 Specify the Tab Paper Creation settings in accordance with

steps 2 and 3 of "Copying," on p. 4-73.

4-74 Tab Paper Creation

Adjusting the Image
You can make fine adjustment to the image quality on copies. There are three
modes to adjust image quality: the Image Quality Adjustment mode, Color Balance
mode, and One Touch Color mode.

IMPORTANT
For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with this mode, see
"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.

4
Image Quality Adjustment

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

You can scan the original by erasing the background color or prevent the original
image on the reverse side of thin originals from appearing on the copies.

IMPORTANT
• If [A] (Auto) is selected as the scan/copy exposure on the Scan screen or the Copy Basic
Features screen, pressing [Image Qual. Adjustment] and making fine adjustments
cancels the automatic copy/scan exposure setting. Similarly, if you select [A] (Auto) for
the scan/copy exposure setting when image quality adjustments have been made, the
Image Quality Adjustment mode is canceled and the automatic exposure is used instead.
• To automatically adjust the quality of the background, select [A] (Auto) for the scan/copy
exposure. (See "Automatic Exposure Adjustment," on p. 3-7.)

Remove Background
This mode enables you to scan or make copies by erasing the background color of
the original. This feature is especially useful for scanning/copying originals, such as
catalogues and paper, that have turned yellow from age.

■ Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features] ➞ [Image

Adjustment].

2 Press [Image Qual. Adjustment].

Adjusting the Image 4-75

 3 Press [Remove Background] ➞ [OK].

If the background color remains, or if you want to make the background color
darker when the original is scanned in the Remove Background mode, make fine
adjustments to the density of the background color.
4
If you want to make fine adjustments to the density of the background color,
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

press [Fine Adjustment] ➞ press [-] or [+] to specify the amount of each color
that you want to remove ➞ press [OK].
For example, if the background color (yellow) of the original remains, press [-]
next to <Yellow> to adjust the density.
Adjusting Yellow automatically adjusts the levels of Red and Green to the same
level as Yellow. However, Adjusting the levels of Red or Green sets Yellow back to
its default level.

NOTE
• Pressing [-] or [+] adjusts the density of each color. Press [-] to make the color
lighter, or press [+] to make the color darker.
• If you make fine adjustments to the density, the automatic copy exposure setting is
canceled, and the original is scanned according to the Fine Adjustment settings.

■ Mail Box (Scan)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ place your originals

➞ press [Scan] ➞ [Special Features] ➞ [Image Qual.
Adjustment].

2 Specify the Image Quality Adjustment settings in accordance

with step 3 of "Copying," on p. 4-75.

4-76 Adjusting the Image

Prevent Bleeding
This mode enables you to prevent the original image on the reverse side of thin
originals from appearing on the recorded pages or the copies.

■ Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features] ➞ [Image

Adjustment].

2 Press [Image Qual. Adjustment].

3 Press [Prevent Bleed-thru] ➞ [OK]. 4

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

If you want to make fine adjustments to the density, press [Fine Adjustment] ➞
press [-] or [+] to specify the amount of bleeding that you want to prevent ➞
press [OK].
Details of each item are shown below.

[-]: This setting prevents dark areas on the reverse side of the original from
appearing on the recorded pages or the copies, but light areas on the front
side may not be scanned/copied either.

[+]: This setting may not be able to completely prevent dark areas on the
reverse side of the original from appearing on the recorded pages or the
copies, but light areas on the front side of the original are always scanned/
copied.

NOTE
If you make fine adjustments to the density, the automatic copy exposure setting is
canceled, and the original is scanned according to the Fine Adjustment settings.

Adjusting the Image 4-77

 ■ Mail Box (Scan)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ place your originals

➞ press [Scan] ➞ [Special Features] ➞ [Image Qual.
Adjustment].

2 Specify the Image Quality Adjustment settings in accordance

with step 3 of "Copying," on p. 4-77.

Adjusting the Color

You can make fine adjustments to the color by varying the relative strength and
4 density of yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. The color adjustments that you make
can be stored and recalled for future use. (See "Color Balance," on p. 9-2.)
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

IMPORTANT
You cannot adjust the color when you select to print a CMYK format document stored in
an inbox.

Adjusting the Color Balance

■ Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features] ➞ [Image

Adjustment].

2 Press [Color Balance].

4-78 Adjusting the Image

3 Press [-] or [+] to adjust the strength of each color.

You can also press [Recall/Store] to recall and change the previously stored
color balance settings. (See "Recalling Color Balance Settings," on p. 4-84.)
4
4 Specify Saturation, Hue, and Density.

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

● If [Saturation] is selected:
❑ Press [Low] or [High] to adjust the saturation level of the selected color or all
the colors ➞ press [OK].

Adjusting the Image 4-79

 ● If [Hue] is selected:
❑ Adjust the hue level of the selected color or all the colors ➞ press [OK].

To adjust the hue level of all the colors, press [Counter-Clockwise] or

[Clockwise].
4 To adjust the hue level of each color, press [More Red], [More Green], [More
Yellow], [More Cyan], [More Blue], or [More Magenta] for each color.
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

● If [Density Fine Adjustment] is selected:

❑ Select the color that you want to adjust ➞ press [-] or [+] to adjust the density
level for the darker (high), medium, and lighter (low) density areas ➞ press
[OK].

5 Press [OK].

4-80 Adjusting the Image

■ Mail Box (Print)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to

print ➞ press [Print] ➞ [Change Pr. Settings] ➞ [Special
Features] ➞ [Color Balance].

2 Specify the Color Balance settings in accordance with steps 3

to 5 of "Copying," on p. 4-78.

Storing Color Balance Settings

You can store color balance settings and then recall them for future use. Up to four
different settings can be stored.
4

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

■ Copying

1 Press [Special Features] ➞ [Image Adjustment].

2 Press [Color Balance].

3 Specify the color balance, saturation, hue, and density

settings that you want to store ➞ press [Recall/Store].

For instructions on adjusting the color balance, see "Adjusting the Color," on p.
4-78.

Adjusting the Image 4-81

 4 Select a key ([C1] to [C4]) for storing the color balance
settings ➞ press [Register].

NOTE
4 • Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle
( ) in the lower right corner of the key.
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

• If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.

● If you select a key without settings:

❑ A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to store the settings. Press
[Yes].

● If you select a key that already has settings stored in it:

❑ A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to overwrite the previous
settings. Press [Yes].

5 Press [Cancel] ➞ [Cancel].

■ Mail Box (Print)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to

print ➞ press [Print] ➞ [Change Pr. Settings] ➞ [Special
Features] ➞ [Color Balance].

2 Store the Color Balance Settings in accordance with steps 3

to 5 of "Copying," on p. 4-81.

4-82 Adjusting the Image

Naming a Color Balance Key

■ Copying

1 Press [Special Features] ➞ [Image Adjustment].

2 Press [Color Balance].

3 Press [Recall/Store].

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

4 Select a key ([C1] to [C4]) to name ➞ press [Register Name].

NOTE
• Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle
( ) in the lower right corner of the key.
• If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
• You can also name keys with no settings stored in them.

Adjusting the Image 4-83

 5 Enter a name ➞ press [OK].

NOTE
If you press [OK] without entering any characters, the key name reverts to its
current name (default C1 to C4).

6 Press [Cancel] ➞ [OK].

■ Mail Box (Print)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to

4 print ➞ press [Print] ➞ [Change Pr. Settings] ➞ [Special
Features] ➞ [Color Balance].
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

2 Name a Color Balance Setting key in accordance with steps 3

to 6 of "Copying," on p. 4-83.

Recalling Color Balance Settings

■ Copying

1 Press [Special Features] ➞ [Image Adjustment].

2 Press [Color Balance].

3 Press [Recall/Store].

4-84 Adjusting the Image

 4 Select the key containing the color balance settings that you
want to recall ➞ verify the settings ➞ press [OK].

If you select a key that does not have color balance settings stored in it, [OK] is
grayed out and cannot be pressed. You can select another key that has color 4
balance settings stored in it, or press [Cancel].

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

NOTE
• Recalling color balance settings from memory cancels the current color balance
settings.
• You can make changes to the recalled color balance settings.
• If you press another key, the color balance settings stored in that key are recalled.

5 Press [OK].

■ Mail Box (Print)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to

print ➞ press [Print] ➞ [Change Pr. Settings] ➞ [Special
Features] ➞ [Color Balance].

2 Recall the Color Balance Settings in accordance with steps 3

to 5 of "Copying," on p. 4-84.

Adjusting the Image 4-85

 Erasing Color Balance Settings

■ Copying

1 Press [Special Features] ➞ [Image Adjustment].

2 Press [Color Balance].

3 Press [Recall/Store].

4 4 Select the key containing the color balance settings that you
want to erase ➞ press [Erase].
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

IMPORTANT
Make sure to check the settings first before erasing them.

NOTE
• Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle
( ) in the lower right corner of the key.
• If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.

5 Press [Yes].

NOTE
Key names are not erased. For instructions on changing a key name, see "Naming
a Color Balance Key," on p. 4-83.

6 Press [Cancel] ➞ [OK].

4-86 Adjusting the Image

 ■ Mail Box (Print)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to

print ➞ press [Print] ➞ [Change Pr. Settings] ➞ [Special
Features] ➞ [Color Balance].

2 Erase the Color Balance Settings in accordance with steps 3

to 6 of "Copying," on p. 4-86.

One Touch Color Mode

You can make copies or prints by selecting the look of the image with just one touch
of a key. The following six options are available. (See "One Touch Color,"on p. 9-5.)
4

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

IMPORTANT
• One Touch Color mode settings are actually preset color balance settings. Therefore, if
you change the One Touch Color mode settings, any color balance settings that you may
have made are also changed.
• You cannot set the Retro Photo Image mode to documents in an inbox that have been
received from a computer. If you press [Start Printing] with the Retro Photo Image mode
set, a message prompting you to reset the settings appears on the screen.

■ Vivid Colors
This setting enables you to make copies with more vivid color tones and increased color
saturation.

NOTE
The One Touch Color mode (Vivid Colors) is available for the Copying function only.

■ Tranquil Colors
This setting enables you to make copies with subdued color tones and decreased color
saturation.

NOTE
The One Touch Color mode (Tranquil Colors) is available for the Copying function only.

■ Lighten Image
This setting enables you to make copies or print with lighter color tones by decreasing the
density, while maintaining a good balance throughout.

■ Darken Image
This setting enables you to make copies or prints with heavier color tones by increasing
the density, while maintaining a good balance throughout.

Adjusting the Image 4-87

 ■ Highlight Reproduction
This setting enables you to make copies or print by reproducing the highlighted areas that
normally tend to appear as white more faithfully. This is achieved by increasing the
exposure of areas that have a low exposure.

■ Retro Photo Image

This setting enables you to make copies or prints that look like old-fashioned photographs.

Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features] ➞ [Image

Adjustment].

4
2 Press [One Touch Color].
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

3 Select the desired One Touch Color feature ➞ press [OK].

You can combine different One Touch Color features, but the following cannot be
selected together:
• [Vivid Colors] and [Tranquil Colors]
• [Lighten Image] and [Darken Image] and [Highlight Reproduction]

NOTE
If you select [Retro Photo Image], [Single Color] is displayed on the Copy Basic
Features screen.

4-88 Adjusting the Image

Mail Box (Print)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to

print ➞ press [Print] ➞ [Change Pr. Settings] ➞ [Special
Features] ➞ [One Touch Color].

2 Specify the One Touch Color mode settings in accordance

with step 3 of "Copying," on p. 4-88.

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

Adjusting the Image 4-89

 Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness)
This mode enables you to scan and record, or make copies of the originals with a
sharper or softer contrast. To reproduce text or lines with a sharper contrast, use
[High] as the setting. To scan/copy originals containing printed photographs or
other halftones with a softer contrast, use [Low] as the setting.

■ Low
If you make copies, or scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed
photograph, using the Printed Image mode, the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern)
4 may occur. However, you can lessen this moiré effect by using [Low] as the setting to
produce a clearer copy (image).
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

Original Copy
Low Set Low Not Set

■ High
This setting enhances the edges of original images so that faint or fine text is reproduced
with a sharper contrast. This setting is particularly suited to scanning and copying
blueprints and faint pencil drawn images.

Original Copy
High Set High Not Set

4-90 Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness)

Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features] ➞

[Sharpness].

2 Press [Low] or [High] to adjust the sharpness for the Text and
Photo/Image areas ➞ press [OK].

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

To copy text or lines clearly, the setting should be towards [High] for the Text
area. To copy originals containing printed photographs or other halftones, the
setting should be towards [Low] for the Photo/Image area.

Mail Box (Scan)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ place your originals

➞ press [Scan] ➞ [Special Features] ➞ [Sharpness].

2 Specify the Sharpness settings in accordance with step 2 of

"Copying," on p. 4-91.

Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness) 4-91

 Composing Images (Form Composition)
The Form Composition mode enables you to superimpose a previously scanned
image which has been stored in the hard disk of the machine (image form) on the
output.
Entire Image
Composition Original Copy

Image Form
4
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

Transparent
Image Original Copy

IMPORTANT
• For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with this mode, see
"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.
• To use the Form Composition mode, the image form must be stored in the machine
beforehand. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
• The Form Composition mode can be used with other copy modes, to process images.
However, the combinated functions can only be used for copying images, and not for
stored image forms.
• Up to 100 image forms can be stored. However, this number varies depending on the
free space of the hard disk.
• The Form Composition mode cannot be used with documents with resolution of less than
600 x 600 dpi.
• Printing performance may not be optimal in the Form Composition mode, depending on
the selected document and image form.
• The exposure of CMYK format images for Form Composition may become lighter when
copying or printing with the Form Composition mode.

4-92 Composing Images (Form Composition)

Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features] ➞

[Composition].

2 Press [Form Composition].

3 Press [Settings] for the side you want to superimpose.

To superimpose a different image on both sides of a sheet, it is necessary to set
the 2-Sided mode.
To superimpose the same image on both sides of the sheet, specify the settings 4
for the front side ➞ press [Same as Front Side].

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

4 Select the image form to be superimposed over the original ➞
press [Next].
To check images stored as forms, press [Check Print] to print a sample of the
image.
Image forms stored in the RGB color format are indicated with a icon. Image
forms stored in the CMYK color format are indicated with a icon. (Color image
forms are indicated with a color icon.)
Press [Details] to display the detailed information of the image form.

IMPORTANT
You cannot use CMYK format images in the Form Composition mode.

● If [Check Print] is selected:

❑ Select the paper size ➞ press [Start Print].
Press [Cancel] to cancel the sample print.

NOTE
When [Check Print] is selected, the color mode selected in step 6 is applied.

Composing Images (Form Composition) 4-93

 5 Select the desired form composition type.

● If [Transparent Image] is selected:

❑ Press [-] or [+] to adjust the halftone density.

4
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

6 Press the color selection drop-down list ➞ select [Auto-Color

Select], [Black], or [Single Color] ➞ press [OK].

● If [Single Color] is selected:

❑ Select a color ➞ press [OK].

IMPORTANT
If the color format of the selected image form is CMYK, only [Auto-Color Select]
can be selected.

Mail Box (Print)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to

print ➞ press [Print] ➞ [Change Pr. Settings] ➞ [Special
Features] ➞ [Composition] ➞ [Form Composition].

2 Specify the Form Composition mode settings in accordance

with steps 3 to 6 of "Copying," on p. 4-93.

4-94 Composing Images (Form Composition)

Composing Images (Image Composition)
The Image Composition mode enables you to designate an area on a previously
scanned image (image form), which has been stored in the hard disk of the
machine, and then embed a different original into the designated area to output.

6 June 6 June

4
6 June
SU N MON TUE WED THU FRI SA T SU N MON TUE WED THU FRI SA T
SU N MON TUE WED THU FRI SA T
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 25 26 27 28 29 30

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

25 26 27 28 29 30

IMPORTANT
• For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with this mode, see
"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.
• To use the Image Composition mode, the image form must be stored in the machine
beforehand. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
• The Image Composition mode can be used with other copy modes, to process images.
However, the combinated functions can only be used for copying images, and not for
stored image forms.
• Up to 100 image forms can be stored. However, this number varies depending on the
free space of the hard disk.
• The Image Composition mode cannot be used with documents with resolution of less
than 600 x 600 dpi.
• Printing performance may not be optimal in the Image Composition mode, depending on
the selected document and image form.
• The exposure of CMYK format images for Image Composition may become lighter when
copying or printing with the Image Composition mode.

Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features] ➞

[Composition].

2 Press [Image Composition].

Composing Images (Image Composition) 4-95

 3 Press [Settings] for the side you want to superimpose.
To superimpose a different image on both sides of a sheet, it is necessary to set
the 2-Sided mode.
To superimpose the same image on both sides of the sheet, specify the settings
for the front side ➞ press [Same as Front Side].

4 Select the image form to be superimposed over the original ➞

press [Next].
To check images stored as forms, press [Check Print] to print a sample of the
image.
Image forms stored in the RGB color format are indicated with a icon. Image
forms stored in the CMYK color format are indicated with a icon. (Color image
4 forms are indicated with a color icon.)
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

Press [Details] to display the detailed information of the image form.

IMPORTANT
You cannot use CMYK format images in the Image Composition mode.

● If [Check Print] is selected:

❑ Select the paper size ➞ press [Start Print].
Press [Cancel] to cancel the sample print.

4-96 Composing Images (Image Composition)

5 Designate the area.

NOTE
If you designate an area using the edit pen, the output image may not reflect the
designated area precisely. To designate an area precisely, entering values by using
the numeric keys is recommended.

● Using the edit pen:

❑ Press [Pen Entry].
❑ Designate the area using the edit pen.
Mark the two opposing points with the edit pen.

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

NOTE
• To clear the first point entered, press [Erase Point]. (Once an area is designated,
[Erase Point] changes to [Clear Area].)
• To clear a designated area, press [Clear Area].
• To zoom in on any area on the original, press the ratio drop-down list ➞ select an
enlargement ratio ➞ press [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] to specify the area to display.
• To check the designated area, press [Preview].
• To modify a designated area that was specified by using the edit pen, press [Area
Fine Adj.] ➞ [Point select] ➞ select the point that you want to modify ➞ press [ ],
[ ], [ ], or [ ] to move the point ➞ press [Done] ➞ [Preview] to check the
modified area.
• You can designate only one rectangular area to embed the image.

❑ Press [OK].

● Using the numeric keys:

❑ Press [Numeric Key Entry].

Composing Images (Image Composition) 4-97

 IMPORTANT
• Before performing the next step, you must manually measure the size and position
of the area that you want to designate on the original.
• When you measure the XY values, always start measuring from the image out to
the right side edge of the original, and up to the top of the original. These
measurements tell the machine the desired framed area's size and position.
❑ Press [X1], [X2], [Y1], and [Y2] ➞ use - (numeric keys) to specify the
respective measurements.

4
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

[X1]: The distance of the area's right border to the original's right edge.
[X2]: The distance of the area's left border to the original's right edge.
[Y1]: The distance of the area's top border to the original's top edge.
[Y2]: The distance of the area's bottom border to the original's top edge.

NOTE
• To change a value you entered, press [X1], [X2], [Y1], or [Y2] ➞ enter the correct
value using - (numeric keys).
• To check the designated area, press [Check Area].
• To clear all your entries, press [Clear Area].
• You can designate only one rectangular area to embed the image.

❑ Press [OK].

Mail Box (Print)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to

print ➞ press [Print] ➞ [Change Pr. Settings] ➞ [Special
Features] ➞ [Composition] ➞ [Image Composition].

2 Specify the Image Composition mode settings in accordance

with steps 3 to 5 of "Copying," on p. 4-95.

4-98 Composing Images (Image Composition)

Embedding Hidden Text in the Background
The Secure Watermark mode enables you to embed hidden text in the background
of copies/prints. You can embed text such as "CONFIDENTIAL," the date and time,
or a department name. The embedded text appears when the copies are copied.

Original Copy A Copy B

(Secure Watermark (Copy of Copy A)
Is Selected)

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

Original Copy C Copy D
([Print Characters (Copy of Copy C)
Vertically] Is Selected)

IMPORTANT
• For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with this mode, see
"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.
• You cannot change the copy/print exposure while copying/printing in the Secure
Watermark mode.
• The embedded hidden text may not appear as specified even if the copy with the Secure
Watermark mode applied is copied, depending on the copy machine.
• Printing performance may not be optimal in the Secure Watermark mode, depending on
the selected document and combination of printing modes.
• The Secure Watermark mode is only available if the optional Secure Watermark is
activated.

Embedding Hidden Text in the Background 4-99

 Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features] ➞ press

[Secure Watermark].

2 Select the type of secure watermark (Watermark, Date, Copy

Set Numbering, Serial Number, ID/User Name).

● If you select [Watermark]:

❑ Select a preset watermark ➞ press [Next].

4
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

● If you select [Watermark] ➞ [Create]:

❑ Press [Enter] ➞ enter the text ➞ press [OK] ➞ [OK].

You can also select the text which has been registered in Register Characters
for Page No./Watermark in Common Settings from the Additional Functions
screen.

IMPORTANT
If you want to register your newly created secure watermark to be selected
whenever necessary, press [Register] ➞ enter the text to be registered.

4-100 Embedding Hidden Text in the Background

● If you select [Date]:
❑ Enter the date using - (numeric keys) ➞ select the date format from the
Date Type drop-down list ➞ press [Next].

NOTE 4
• There are six different date formats that you can select in the drop-down list.

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

• If you do not specify a date, the date set in Date and Time Settings in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is printed. Confirm that the date
and time settings are correct.

● If you select [Copy Set Numbering]:

❑ Enter the starting number using - (numeric keys) ➞ press [Next].

Embedding Hidden Text in the Background 4-101

 ● If you select [Serial Number]:
❑ Press [Next].

NOTE
4 The Serial Number is the number which is displayed at the bottom left of the screen
when you press (Counter Check) on the control panel.
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

● If you select [ID/User Name]:

❑ Press [Next].

NOTE
• The current ID or user name is displayed if you are using a login service.
• [ID/User Name] is grayed out and cannot be selected if you are not using a login
service.

4-102 Embedding Hidden Text in the Background

 3 Select Background Pattern from the Background Pattern
drop-down list ➞ select the size and color of the text ➞ press
[OK].

To embed a pattern in the background of the output, select a background pattern 4

from the Background Pattern drop-down list.

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

You can select [Small] ('36 pt.'), [Medium] ('54 pt.'), or [Large] ('72 pt.') for the
size of the text.
You can select [Magenta], [Cyan], or [Black] for the color of the text.
To change the orientation of characters, press [Print Characters Vertically].
To use white letters on a colored background, press [White Letters on Colored
Backgnd].
To adjust the contrast of the embedded letters and the background pattern,
press [Character/Backgrnd Contrast Adjustment].

Mail Box (Print)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to

print ➞ press [Print] ➞ [Change Pr. Settings] ➞ [Special
Features] ➞ [Secure Watermark].

2 Specify the Secure Watermark settings in accordance with

steps 2 and 3 of "Copying," on p. 4-100.

Embedding Hidden Text in the Background 4-103

 Page and Copy Set Numbering
This mode enables you to print page numbers, copy set numbers, and user-defined
text onto the output.

IMPORTANT
• For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with this mode, see
"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.
• For the Mail Box function, the Pg/Copy Set Numbering mode cannot be used with
documents with resolution of less than 600 x 600 dpi.
4 • Printing performance may not be optimal in the Page/Copy Set Numbering mode,
depending on the selected document and combination of printing modes.
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

NOTE
• If you select [Numbered Chapters] in combination with the Cover/Sheet Insertion (Sheet
Insertion, Chapter Page) mode or the Cover/Job Separator mode (for the Mail Box
function), the chapter numbers are counted as follows:
- Copy: After each chapter page is inserted
After each sheet insertion is inserted
- Mail Box: After each chapter page is inserted
After each sheet insertion or job separator sheets is inserted

• If the copy number has fewer than five digits, the machine copies it as follows:
- Example: If the copy number is 10, "00010" is printed.
• If the Scan Image Check mode is used with the Copy Set Numbering mode, the number
is copied as "XXXXX."
• If the Pg/Copy Set Numbering mode is used with the Cover/Sheet Insertion or Cover/Job
Separator mode (for the Mail Box function), page numbers are not printed on the inserted
pages.
• For instructions on entering values in inches, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.

4-104 Page and Copy Set Numbering

■ Page Numbering
Documents can be copied with page numbers (numbers only, numbers enclosed with
hyphens, with chapter numbers, or with the total page number).

Original Output

■ Copy Set Numbering 4

This mode enables you to copy or print a document with a five digit number in the

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

background of each page.

Original Output

Page and Copy Set Numbering 4-105

 Page Numbering

Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features] ➞ [Pg/Copy

Set Numbering].

2 Press [Page Numbering].

3 Select the type of numbering ([Numbers Only], [Numbers with

4 Hyphens], [Numbered Chapters], or [Total Page Numbering]).
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

4 Select the orientation and the position of the page numbers ➞

press [Next].
Orientation:
[Vertical]: Prints the page number vertically.
[Horizontal]: Prints the page number horizontally.

NOTE
If you set any two of the Page Numbering, Copy Set Numbering, Watermark, or
Print Date modes to print in the same position, a message asking for your
confirmation is displayed when you press (Start).

4-106 Page and Copy Set Numbering

 ● If you press [Reverse Page Num.]:
❑ Select the desired position of the page numbers ➞ press [Done].

● If you press [Adjust Position]:

❑ Press [X] and [Y] ➞ press [-] or [+] to set their respective position ➞ press [OK].

5 Enter the page number to start numbering from using -

(numeric keys) ➞ press [Next].

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

If you want to insert chapter numbers along with page numbers, specify the
starting chapter number on the left (1 to 9,999), and the starting page number on
the right (1 to 9,999).
If you want to insert the total page number along with page numbers, specify to
have the page numbers start on the left side (1 to 9,999), and the total page
number starts on the right side (1 to 20,000). To set the total page number
automatically, press [Auto].

NOTE
If [Total Page Numbering] is used with the Booklet mode, the total number of pages
are printed automatically.

● If you press [Inserted Sheets]:

❑ Select whether to count the inserted sheets ➞ press [Done].
[Number]: Counts the sheet insertions, chapter pages, job separator, or back
cover that you inserted after the first page, but only prints chapter numbers
and page numbers onto the main document pages.
[Do not number]: Does not count the sheet insertions, chapter pages, job
separator, or back cover that you inserted after the first page, and only prints
chapter numbers and page numbers onto the main document pages.

Page and Copy Set Numbering 4-107

 ● To specify the number of digits to be printed:
❑ Press [Number of Digits to Print] ➞ specify the number of digits by pressing [-]
or [+].

NOTE
• The number of digits you can specify is '2' to '5'.

- Example: If the page number is 10 and number of digits is 2, "10" is printed.

If the page number is 10 and number of digits is 5, "00010" is
printed.
• If the specified number of digits is less than the number of digits of the actual page
number, the setting is invalid.

● To add text:
4 ❑ Press [Add Characters] ➞ [Next].
❑ Press [Enter] ➞ enter the text ➞ press [OK] ➞ [Next].
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

You can also select the text which has been registered in Register Characters
for Page No./Watermark in Common Settings from the Additional Functions
screen.
❑ Set the position of the text ➞ press [Next].

6 Set the size and color of the page numbers ➞ press [OK].
Select the size of the page numbers from [Small], [Medium], and [Large] ('10.5
pt.', '12.0 pt.', and '14.0 pt.').
You can select [Yellow], [Magenta], [Cyan], [Black], [Red], [Green], [Blue], or
[White] for the color of the page numbers.

Mail Box (Print)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to

print ➞ press [Print] ➞ [Change Pr. Settings] ➞ [Special
Features] ➞ [Pg/Copy Set Numbering].

2 Specify the Page Numbering settings in accordance with

steps 2 to 6 of "Copying," on p. 4-106.

4-108 Page and Copy Set Numbering

Copy Set Numbering

Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features] ➞ [Pg/Copy

Set Numbering].

2 Press [Copy Set Numbering].

3 Select the orientation and the position of the copy set

numbers ➞ press [Next]. 4

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

Press [Full Surface] to print the copy set number repeatedly over the surface of
the output.
Press [Numbers in 5 Locations] to select all five print positions.

NOTE
• If Copy Set Numbering Option Settings in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) is set to 'On', [Numbers in 5 Locations] is grayed out and cannot
be selected. (See Chapter 6, "System Manager Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
• If you set any two of the Page Numbering, Copy Set Numbering, Watermark, or
Print Date modes to print in the same position, a message asking for your
confirmation is displayed when you press (Start).

● If [Adjust Position] is selected:

❑ Press [X] and [Y] ➞ press [-] or [+] to set their respective position ➞ press [OK].

Page and Copy Set Numbering 4-109

 4 Enter the number to start numbering from ➞ select the
character size, density, and color ➞ press [OK].
Enter the number to start numbering with, from 1 to 9,999 using - (numeric
keys).
Select the size of the page numbers from [Small], [Medium], and [Large] ('12.0
pt.', '24.0 pt.', and '36.0 pt.').
Adjust the character density by pressing [Light] or [Dark].
You can select [Yellow], [Magenta], [Cyan], [Black], [Red], [Green], or [Blue] for
the specified text.

NOTE
If Copy Set Numbering Option Settings in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) is set to 'On', the size of the page numbers becomes [Small]
4 '10.5 pt.', [Medium] '12.0 pt.', [Large] '14.0 pt.'. (See Chapter 6, "System Manager
Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

Mail Box (Print)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to

print ➞ press [Print] ➞ [Change Pr. Settings] ➞ [Special
Features] ➞ [Pg/Copy Set Numbering].

2 Specify the Copy Set Numbering settings in accordance with

steps 2 to 4 of "Copying," on p. 4-109.

4-110 Page and Copy Set Numbering

Printing a Watermark and Date
This mode enables you to print a watermark, date, and user-defined text onto the
output.

IMPORTANT
• For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with this mode, see
"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.
• You cannot use the Watermark/Print Date mode to print a document stored in an inbox, if
the resolution of the document is lower than 600 x 600 dpi.
• Printing performance may not be optimal in the Watermark/Print Date mode, depending 4
on the selected document and combination of printing modes.

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

NOTE
• You can also adjust the position of watermark and date. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing
Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
• If the Watermark/Print Date mode is used with the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode or the
Cover/Job Separator mode (for the Mail Box function), the watermark/date will not be
printed on the inserted pages.
• For instructions on entering values in inches, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.

■ Watermark
Prints watermark or user-defined text onto the output.

Original Outout

Printing a Watermark and Date 4-111

 ■ Print Date
Prints the date onto the output.

Original Output

Watermark Printing
4
Copying
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features] ➞ [Watermark/

Print Date].

2 Press [Watermark].

3 Set the watermark orientation and position ➞ press [Next].

Orientation:

[Vertical]: Prints the watermark vertically.

[Horizontal]: Prints the watermark horizontally.

NOTE
If you set any two of the Page Numbering, Copy Set Numbering, Watermark, or
Print Date modes to print in the same position, a message asking for your
confirmation is displayed when you press (Start).

4-112 Printing a Watermark and Date

 ● If [Reverse Page Num.] is selected:
❑ Select the desired position of the page numbers ➞ press [Done].

● If [Print Type] is selected:

❑ Select [All Pages] or [Print on Top Page Only] ➞ press [Done].

● If [Adjust Position] is selected:

❑ Press [X] and [Y] ➞ press [-] or [+] to set their respective position ➞ press [OK].

4 Select the desired preset watermark ➞ press [Next].

● If [Create] is selected:
❑ Press [Enter] ➞ enter the text ➞ press [OK]. 4
You can also select the text which has been registered in Register Characters

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

for Page No./Watermark in Common Settings from the Additional Functions
screen.

5 Specify the text size, print type, and color ➞ press [OK].
Select the size of the watermark from [Small], [Medium], and [Large] ('36.0 pt.',
'54.0 pt.', and '72.0 pt.').
You can select [Transparent] or [Overlay] for the print type. If [Transparent] is
selected, you can also adjust the halftone density by pressing [Light] or [Dark].
You can select [Yellow], [Magenta], [Cyan], [Black], [Red], [Green], or [Blue] for
the specified text.

Mail Box (Print)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to

print ➞ press [Print] ➞ [Change Pr. Settings] ➞ [Special
Features] ➞ [Watermark/Print Date].

2 Specify the Watermark settings in accordance with steps 2 to

5 of "Copying," on p. 4-112.

Printing a Watermark and Date 4-113

 Date Printing

Copying

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features] ➞ [Watermark/

Print Date].

2 Press [Print Date].

3 Set the number orientation and position ➞ press [Next].

4
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

NOTE
If you set any two of the Page Numbering, Copy Set Numbering, Watermark, or
Print Date modes to print in the same position, a message asking for your
confirmation is displayed when you press (Start).

● If [Adjust Position] is selected:

❑ Press [X] and [Y] ➞ press [-] or [+] to set their respective position ➞ press [OK].

4 Select the date type ➞ specify the date using - (numeric

keys) ➞ press [Next].

NOTE
• There are six types of date format you can select from.
• If no date is set, the date set in Date and Time Settings in the System Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen) is printed. Confirm that the date and time
settings are correct.

4-114 Printing a Watermark and Date

 5 Set the number size, print type, and color ➞ press [OK].
Select the size of the numbers from [Small], [Medium], and [Large] ('10.5 pt.',
'12.0 pt.', and '14.0 pt.').
You can select [Transparent] or [Overlay] for the print type. If [Transparent] is
selected, you can also adjust the halftone density by pressing [Light] or [Dark].
You can select [Yellow], [Magenta], [Cyan], [Black], [Red], [Green], or [Blue] for
the specified text.

Mail Box (Print)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to

print ➞ press [Print] ➞ [Change Pr. Settings] ➞ [Special 4
Features] ➞ [Watermark/Print Date].

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

2 Specify the Print Date settings in accordance with steps 2 to 5
of "Copying," on p. 4-114.

Printing a Watermark and Date 4-115

 Combining Multiple Batches of Originals with
Different Copy Settings
The Job Block Combination mode enables you to scan multiple batches of originals
with different copy settings and print them as one document.
You can set copy settings (for example, the Job Separator and Page Numbering
modes) for the combined document. You can also store the combined document in
a User Inbox.

Original Batch Copy

4 REPORT
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

First Batch:
The Shift Mode Is Selected

First Batch
Second Batch
Third Batch
Fourth Batch
Second Batch: REPORT

1
The 1 2-Sided Mode
Is Selected
1 2

1 1

3 4

Third Batch:
The 2-Page Separation Mode
Is Selected

1 2

1
2
3 4

3
4

Fourth Batch:
The Image Combination (4 on 1) Is Selected

4-116 Combining Multiple Batches of Originals with Different Copy Settings

IMPORTANT
• For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with this mode, see
"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.
• You can use the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode for the combined document. You cannot
use the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode for each batch of originals.
• If you use the Job Block Combination mode, the Job Build mode is automatically set for
each batch of originals. You cannot use the Job Build mode for the combined document.
• You cannot make an Interrupt copy while copying with the Job Block Combination mode.
• You cannot store the Job Block Combination mode in Standard Settings.
• You cannot store the Job Block Combination mode in Mode Memory.
• You cannot recall the Job Block Combination mode.

NOTE
• The Job Block Combination mode is available for the Copy function only.
• The maximum number of batches of originals you can combine as one document is 32.
4

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features] ➞ [Job Block
Combination].

Combining Multiple Batches of Originals with Different Copy Settings 4-117

 2 Specify the copy settings for the combined document ➞ press
[OK].

If you select special features before setting the Job Block Combination mode, the
4 selected special features will be retained for the combined document.
For instructions on specifying copy settings, see Chapter 3, "Basic Copying and
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

Mail Box Features," and Chapter 4, "Special Copying and Mail Box Features."

3 For each batch of originals, specify the copy settings ➞ press

(Start).

For instructions on specifying copy settings and their available combination, see
Chapters 3 through 4.
If you have set two or more batches of originals, you can press [Recall Last
Settings] to cancel the settings for the previous batch of originals.

4-118 Combining Multiple Batches of Originals with Different Copy Settings

4 Check the settings on the Scan screen.

You can change or specify the Color, 2-Sided Original, Copy Ratio, Original Type,
or Copy Exposure mode before scanning the next batch of originals (i.e.,
between batches).
4
If you want to continue to scan another batch of originals without changing the

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

copy settings, place your originals and press (Start).
If you want to rescan or cancel the current batch of originals, press [Clear/
Re-enter This Block] and repeat the procedure from step 3.
If you want to change the copy modes and scan another batch of originals, press
[Next Block] and repeat the procedure from step 3.

5 When you have finished scanning all of your originals, press

[Conf./Combine All Blocks].
You can also press [Conf.Blocks] in step 3 to proceed to step 6.

Combining Multiple Batches of Originals with Different Copy Settings 4-119

 6 Check the copy settings for the combined document and each
batch.

To check the copy settings for the combined document, press [Set. Conf.
4 (Overall)].
To select all of the batches of originals, press [Select All]. However, if a batch of
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

originals is already selected, this key changes to [Clear Selection].

To add another batch, press [Add Block] and repeat the procedure from step 3.
❑ Select the batches of originals in the order in which you want to combine them.
❑ To view the detailed information of a batch of originals, select the batch of
originals ➞ press [Details].
❑ To erase a batch of originals, select the batch of originals ➞ press [Erase].
❑ To make a sample print of a selected batch of originals or the combined
document, press [Sample Print].
To make a sample print of a selected batch of originals, press [Sample Set of
Selected Block].
To make a sample print of the combined document, press [Sample Set of
Combined Job].
❑ To use the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode for the combined document, press
[Cover/Sheet Insertion].
For instructions on using the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode, see "Cover/Sheet
Insertion," on p. 4-12.
❑ To change the number of copies, enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 9,999)
using - (numeric keys).

4-120 Combining Multiple Batches of Originals with Different Copy Settings

 NOTE
• The selected batches are numbered and printed in the specified order.
• You can cancel a selection by selecting the batch of originals again.
• To cancel all batches, press [Clear Selection]. ([Clear Selection] changes to [Select
All (Max 100 doc.)].)

7 Press [Start Print].

● If you selected [Copy upon Storing] in the Store In User Inbox mode
for the combined document in step 2:
❑ Press [Print/Store].
The combined document will be stored in the selected User Inbox at the same
time as printing.
4
To store the combined document without printing, press [Store and Finish].

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

● If you selected the Store In User Inbox mode without setting [Copy
upon Storing] for the combined document in step 2:
❑ Press [Store].

NOTE
• You can adjust the exposure during printing. However, you cannot adjust the
exposure during printing if the Secure Watermark mode is set for the combined
document.
• To cancel the Job Block Combination mode with other copy modes, press [Cancel
Combination].
• To return to step 3, press (Reset).

Combining Multiple Batches of Originals with Different Copy Settings 4-121

 Storing Scanned Originals with Copy Settings in a
User Inbox
This mode enables you to store scanned originals in a User Inbox from the Regular
Copy Basic Features screen. The copy settings are stored with the document. You
can also make copies of the scanned originals while storing them in the User Inbox.

IMPORTANT
• For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with this mode, see
"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.
• When you press (Stop) while copying in the Store In User Inbox (Copy upon Storing)
4 mode, the job is not paused, but canceled.
• You cannot store documents in the Memory RX Inbox or a Confidential Fax Inbox. For
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

instructions on storing documents in the Memory RX Inbox and Confidential Fax Inboxes,
see Chapter 6, "Sending and Receiving Documents Using the Inboxes."

NOTE
• The Store In User Inbox mode is available for the Copy function only.
• If you do not change the print settings when printing out documents stored in inboxes
from a computer or using the Store In User Inbox mode of the Copy function, documents
sent from computers are printed with the settings set at the computers, and the
documents scanned into memory are printed with Standard Local Print Settings. (See
Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)

1 Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features] ➞ [Store In

User Inbox].

4-122 Storing Scanned Originals with Copy Settings in a User Inbox

2 Select the User Inbox number ➞ press [OK].

● If you want to name the document:

❑ Press [Document Name] ➞ enter a name for the document ➞ press [OK]. 4

Special Copying and Mail Box Features

NOTE
If you store a document without giving it a name, the machine automatically
assigns the document a name using the year, month, day, and time the document
was scanned. For example, if a document is stored at 1:35 (PM), 41 seconds, on
January 15, 2006, its name will be <20060115133541>.

● If you want to make copies of the scanned originals while storing

them in the User Inbox:
❑ Press [Copy upon Storing].
To store the scanned originals without copying them, deselect [Copy upon
Storing] to clear the check mark.

Storing Scanned Originals with Copy Settings in a User Inbox 4-123

4
Special Copying and Mail Box Features

4-124 Storing Scanned Originals with Copy Settings in a User Inbox

Memory Features 5
CHAPTER

This chapter describes the memory features.

Recalling Previous Copy Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Memory Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Storing Scan/Print/Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Naming a Memory Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
Recalling Scan/Print/Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
Erasing Scan/Print/Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9

5-1
 Recalling Previous Copy Jobs
You can recall the three most recent copy jobs and make copies using these
settings.

IMPORTANT
• The machine considers any one of the following operations a copy job:
- When copy settings, such as the copy ratio, number of copies, and copy exposure, are
specified and then, the control panel power switch, (Energy Saver), (Start), or
(Reset) is pressed
- If and when the Auto Clear mode activates after copy settings are specified
- If you recall copy settings stored in Mode Memory
5 Therefore, if you make settings but do not press the control panel power switch,
(Energy Saver), (Start), or (Reset), and the Auto Clear mode does not activate, the
Memory Features

settings you have made are not stored memory for recall by pressing [Recall].
• You cannot recall the Job Block Combination mode.
• The Standard mode is not stored in Recall memory.
• Identical copy settings are stored only once in Recall memory.

NOTE
• The Recall mode is available for the Copying function only.
• Once stored, the last three copy jobs are kept in memory even if the power is turned OFF.

1 Place your original ➞ press [Special Features] ➞ [Recall].

2 Select [1 Before], [2 Before], or [3 Before].

5-2 Recalling Previous Copy Jobs

3 Verify the settings ➞ press [OK].

NOTE
You can change the recalled copy settings before making copies.

Memory Features

Recalling Previous Copy Jobs 5-3

 Memory Keys
You can set any possible combination of scan settings, print settings, or copy
settings, and then store them in a memory key. There are nine memory keys, and
they can be assigned names for increased convenience. This feature is useful for
storing frequently used scan, print, and copy settings.

NOTE
The scan, print, and copy settings stored in memory are not erased, even if the power is
turned OFF.

Storing Scan/Print/Copy Settings

5
Memory Features

IMPORTANT
You cannot store the Job Block Combination mode in Mode Memory.

Copying

1 Specify the copy settings on the Copy Basic Features screen

and/or Special Features screen.

2 Press [Special Features] ➞ [Mode Memory].

3 Select a key ([M1] to [M9]) for storing the settings ➞ press

[Register].

5-4 Memory Keys

 NOTE
• Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle
( ) in the lower right corner of the key.
• If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.

● If you select a key without settings:

❑ A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to store the settings. Press
[Yes].

● If you select a key that already has settings stored in it:

❑ A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to overwrite the previous
settings. Press [Yes].

4 Press [Cancel].

NOTE 5
You can assign a name to the memory key by pressing [Register Name].

Memory Features
Mail Box (Scan)

1 Specify the scan settings on the Scan screen and/or Special

Features screen.

2 Press [Special Features] ➞ [Mode Memory].

3 Store the scan settings in accordance with steps 3 and 4 of

"Copying," on p. 5-4.

Mail Box (Print)

1 Specify the print settings on the Change Print Settings screen

and/or Special Features screen.

2 Press [Special Features] ➞ [Mode Memory].

3 Store the print settings in accordance with steps 3 and 4 of

"Copying," on p. 5-4.

Memory Keys 5-5

 Naming a Memory Key

Copying

1 Press [Special Features] ➞ [Mode Memory].

2 Select a key ([M1] to [M9]) to name ➞ press [Register Name].

5
Memory Features

NOTE
• Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle
( ) in the lower right corner of the key.
• If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
• You can also name keys with no settings stored in them.

3 Enter a name ➞ press [OK].

NOTE
If you press [OK] without entering any characters, the key name reverts to its
current name (default M1 to M9).

4 Press [Cancel].

5-6 Memory Keys

 Mail Box (Scan)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ press [Scan] ➞

[Special Features] ➞ [Mode Memory].

2 Name a memory key in accordance with steps 2 to 4 of

"Copying," on p. 5-6.

Mail Box (Print)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number and a document ➞

press [Print] ➞ [Change Pr. Settings] ➞ [Special Features] ➞
[Mode Memory].
5
2

Memory Features
Name a memory key in accordance with steps 2 to 4 of
"Copying," on p. 5-6.

Recalling Scan/Print/Copy Settings

Copying

1 Press [Special Features] ➞ [Mode Memory].

2 Select the key containing the copy settings that you want to
recall.

Memory Keys 5-7

 3 Verify the settings ➞ press [OK].
If you select a key that does not have settings stored in it, [OK] is grayed out and
you cannot press it. You can select another key that has copy settings stored in it,
or press [Cancel].

NOTE
• Recalling settings from memory cancels the current settings.
• You can make changes to the recalled settings.
• If you press another key, the settings stored in that key are recalled.

Mail Box (Scan)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ place your originals

➞ press [Scan] ➞ [Special Features] ➞ [Mode Memory].
5
2 Recall the scan settings in accordance with steps 2 and 3 of
Memory Features

"Copying," on p. 5-7.

Mail Box (Print)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number and a document ➞

press [Print] ➞ [Change Pr. Settings] ➞ [Special Features] ➞
[Mode Memory].

2 Recall the scan settings in accordance with steps 2 and 3 of

"Copying," on p. 5-7.

5-8 Memory Keys

Erasing Scan/Print/Copy Settings

Copying

1 Press [Special Features] ➞ [Mode Memory].

2 Select the key containing the copy settings that you want to
erase ➞ press [Erase].

Memory Features
IMPORTANT
Make sure to check the settings first before erasing them.

NOTE
• Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle
( ) in the lower right corner of the key.
• If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.

3 Press [Yes].

NOTE
Key names are not erased. For instructions on changing a key name, see "Naming
a Memory Key," on p. 5-6.

4 Press [Cancel].

Memory Keys 5-9

 Mail Box (Scan)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ press [Scan] ➞

[Special Features] ➞ [Mode Memory].

2 Erase the scan settings in accordance with steps 2 to 4 of

"Copying," on p. 5-9.

Mail Box (Print)

1 Select the desired User Inbox number and a document ➞

press [Print] ➞ [Change Pr. Settings] ➞ [Special Features] ➞
[Mode Memory].
5
2
Memory Features

Erase the scan settings in accordance with steps 2 to 4 of

"Copying," on p. 5-9.

5-10 Memory Keys

Sending and Receiving
Documents Using the Inboxes 6
CHAPTER

This chapter describes how to save documents received by I-fax in the Memory RX Inbox and
Confidential Fax Inboxes.

Memory RX Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Memory RX Inbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Divided Data RX Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6

Confidential Fax Inboxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Receiving Confidential Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Printing a Document in the Confidential Fax Inbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11

Sending a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

6-1
 Memory RX Inbox
You can select either the Memory RX Inbox or Divided Data RX Inbox from the
Memory RX Inbox screen.

Memory RX Inbox
The Memory RX (Receive) Inbox is an inbox for receiving and storing documents
received by I-fax. Documents received in the Memory RX Inbox are stored without
being printed. You can print or send the stored documents later, or whenever
necessary.

6
Sending and Receiving Documents Using the Inboxes

Memory RX Inbox
Memory Lock

I-fax Reception

Print documents Send documents

received by I-fax received by I-fax
whenever necessary. whenever necessary.

6-2 Memory RX Inbox

 IMPORTANT
• You can use the Memory RX Inbox function for receiving and storing I-fax documents
only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
• If you want to use Memory Lock, you must first set Use I-Fax Memory Lock to 'On' in
Memory RX Inbox Settings. To access the Memory RX Inbox Settings screen, press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Communications Settings]. (See Chapter
10, "System Manager Settings," in the Sending Guide.)

Receiving Documents through I-Fax

1 Set Memory Lock to 'On' from the Additional Functions

screen.

NOTE
• For instructions on setting the I-Fax Memory Lock mode, see Chapter 10, "System
Manager Settings," in the Sending Guide.
• The following message is displayed while Memory Lock is being set to 'On':
- <I-Fax Memory RX is on.>: I-Fax documents will be received in memory
6

Sending and Receiving Documents Using the Inboxes

2 The machine is now ready to receive documents in memory.

NOTE
The message below is displayed when a document is received in the Memory RX
Inbox:
- <Check the Memory RX doc.>

Settings for Receiving Documents in Memory

You can use the Memory Lock mode outside of the preset Memory Lock start and
end times.

IMPORTANT
If you want to use Memory Lock, you must first set Use I-Fax Memory Lock to 'On' in
Memory RX Inbox Settings. To access the Memory RX Inbox Settings screen, press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Communications Settings]. (See Chapter
10, "System Manager Settings," in the Sending Guide.)

1 Press [Memory RX Inbox] on the Inbox Selection screen ➞

press [Memory RX Inbox].

Memory RX Inbox 6-3

 2 Select [On] or [Off] for I-Fax Memory Lock.

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Documents are received and stored in the Memory RX Inbox.

[Off]: Documents are received and printed.

NOTE
• If Memory Lock start and end times have been set, the time at which Memory Lock
6 will automatically switch 'Off' is displayed when you set I-Fax Memory Lock to 'On',
and the time at which Memory Lock will automatically switch 'On' is displayed when
Sending and Receiving Documents Using the Inboxes

you set Memory Lock to 'Off'.

• If I-Fax Memory Lock is set to 'Off', documents received through the I-Fax function
are printed and erased from the Memory RX Inbox.

3 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Inbox Selection screen

appears.

Printing a Document in the Memory RX inbox

IMPORTANT
• The Memory RX inbox is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is
activated.
• You can print documents stored in the Memory RX Inbox only with the settings that were
used when the documents were received.
• A document stored in the Memory RX Inbox is automatically deleted after it is printed.

NOTE
• You can print only one document at a time. You cannot print multiple documents stored in
the Memory RX Inbox simultaneously.
• If I-Fax Memory Lock is set to 'Off', documents transmitted to the Memory RX Inbox are
printed as they are received. (See "Memory RX Inbox," on p. 6-2.)

6-4 Memory RX Inbox

1 Press [Memory RX Inbox] on the Inbox Selection screen ➞
press [Memory RX Inbox].

2 Select the document that you want to print ➞ press [Print].

3 Press [Start Print].

6

Sending and Receiving Documents Using the Inboxes

Memory RX Inbox 6-5

 Divided Data RX Inbox
When the machine receives a large I-fax document which has been divided into
several parts before being sent, the Divided Data RX Inbox stores the divided data,
and automatically combines it into a single I-fax document. After the document has
been combined, it is printed, forwarded, or stored in memory in the same way as
when a regular I-fax document is received.

2
1
2
3
Divided TX

6
Sending and Receiving Documents Using the Inboxes

Divided Data RX Inbox

1
2
3 Divided Data RX

Stored in Memory. You can check,

Print or forward erase, and print the
whenever received divided
necessary. data.

IMPORTANT
You can use the Divided Data RX Inbox function for storing the divided data of I-fax
documents only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.

6-6 Memory RX Inbox

Confirming Documents in the Divided Data RX Inbox
You can check the status of divided data, and the remaining capacity of the Divided
Data RX Inbox.

1 Press [Memory RX Inbox] on the Inbox Selection screen ➞

press [Divided Data RX Inbox].

2 Select the document you want to confirm ➞ press [Divide Data

List].

Sending and Receiving Documents Using the Inboxes

3 Select the divided data you want to confirm ➞ press [Details].

Memory RX Inbox 6-7

 Erasing Divided Data
You can print and erase the divided data while the machine is receiving the divided
data.

1 Press [Memory RX Inbox] on the Inbox Selection screen ➞

press [Divided Data RX Inbox].

2 Select the data to erase ➞ press [Erase].

6
Sending and Receiving Documents Using the Inboxes

To erase the document without printing it, deselect [Print When Erased].
If you force the machine to print the document which is being erased, only the
data which has already been received is combined to form the document. Data
which can be combined to form complete pages is printed, and any remaining
data is erased without being printed.

IMPORTANT
• If you delete the divided data, it cannot be combined to form a document even if the
remaining divided data is received later.
• As the divided data is not valid image data, it will not be printed correctly.
• If the divided data is erased while the forwarding settings or the Memory Lock
mode is being set to the divided data, any process for the forced printed image will
not be performed.

6-8 Memory RX Inbox

Confidential Fax Inboxes
If a document received by I-fax, matches the specified forwarding conditions, it is
stored in a Confidential Fax Inbox without being printed. This feature is useful for
receiving confidential documents. You can print the documents stored in
Confidential Fax Inboxes whenever necessary.

A B

6
I-fax Reception

Sending and Receiving Documents Using the Inboxes

Forward

A B

Print received by I-fax

documents whenever
necessary.

Confidential Fax Inboxes 6-9

 IMPORTANT
• You can use the Confidential Fax Inbox function for receiving and storing I-fax documents
if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
• Confidential Fax Inboxes are available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is
activated.
• In order to use a Confidential Fax Inbox, it is necessary to first register the Confidential
Fax Inbox as a forwarding destination in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from
the Additional Functions screen). (See Chapter 10, "System Manager Settings," in the
Sending Guide.)
• It is necessary to inform the other party of the forwarding conditions beforehand.

Receiving Confidential Documents

1 Register a Confidential Fax Inbox as a forwarding destination.

NOTE
For instructions on specifying forwarding settings for documents received by I-Fax,
6 see Chapter 10, "System Manager Settings," in the Sending Guide.
Sending and Receiving Documents Using the Inboxes

2 The machine is now ready to receive documents in the

specified Confidential Fax Inbox.

NOTE
The message below is displayed when a document is received in a Confidential
Fax Inbox:
- <Check received documents in Confidential Fax Inbox.>

6-10 Confidential Fax Inboxes

Printing a Document in the Confidential Fax Inbox
IMPORTANT
• Confidential Fax Inboxes are available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is
activated.
• You can print documents stored in Confidential Fax Inboxes only with the settings used
when the documents were received.

NOTE
You can print only one document at a time. You cannot print multiple documents stored in
Confidential Fax Inboxes simultaneously.

1 Press [Conf. Fax Inbox] on the Inbox Selection screen ➞ press

the desired Confidential Fax Inbox number.

2 Select the document that you want to print ➞ press [Print].

6

Sending and Receiving Documents Using the Inboxes

3 Press [Start Print].

NOTE
If you want to automatically delete the selected document after it is prints, press
[Erase Doc. After Printing].

Confidential Fax Inboxes 6-11

 Sending a Document
You can send documents stored in User Inboxes or the Memory RX (Receive)
Inbox to a desired destination.

IMPORTANT
You can send documents only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.

NOTE
You cannot send documents stored in a Confidential Fax Inbox.

1 Select the desired User Inbox number ➞ select the document

that you want to send ➞ press [Send].
6
Sending and Receiving Documents Using the Inboxes

To select all of the documents (up to 100 documents from the top) in the User
Inbox, press [Select All (Max 100 doc.)]. If a document is already selected, this
key appears as [Clear Selection] instead.
To select all of the documents (up to 32 documents from the top) in the selected
Memory RX Inbox, press [Select All (Max 32 doc.)]. If a document is already
selected, this key changes to [Clear Selection].

NOTE
• A maximum of 32 documents stored in the same inbox can be selected and sent at
the same time.
• A maximum of 999 pages can be sent simultaneously.

6-12 Sending a Document

2 Specify the desired send settings ➞ press [Start Send].
See the Sending Guide for instructions on the following:
• Specifying a destination
• Selecting the file format
• Specifying the Send settings

NOTE
• If Restrict New Address is set to 'On' in the System Manager Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen), you cannot enter a destination in [New Address]. You
have to select a stored destination by pressing [Address Book], [Network
Add.Book], or [One-touch Buttons].
• If you want to automatically delete the selected document after it is sent, press
[Delete After Sending].
• While the document is being sent, you cannot print or store it in another inbox.
• If the selected destination is a group address that includes an inbox, the document
you are sending will not be sent to (and stored in) that inbox.

3 Press [Done].
6

Sending and Receiving Documents Using the Inboxes

Sending a Document 6-13

 6
Sending and Receiving Documents Using the Inboxes

6-14
Sending a Document
Using the Express Copy Basic
Features Screen 7
CHAPTER

This section describes the Express Copy Basic Features screen.

Switching to the Express Copy Basic Features Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Various Features of the Express Copy Basic Features Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Operating the Express Copy Basic Features Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Automatic Color Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9
Adjusting Copy Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Selecting Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11
Specifying the Copy Ratio by Percentage (Zoom by Percentage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Enlarging/Reducing Originals to a Standard Size (Preset Zoom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
Automatically Setting the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy Paper Sizes (Auto
Zoom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Slightly Reducing Images to Prevent the Original Periphery from Being Trimmed (Entire
Image) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Calculating the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy Paper Sizes (Zoom Program) . . .7-15
Enlarging/Reducing Originals with Copy Ratios Set Independently for the X and Y Axes (XY
Zoom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Enlarging an Image onto Multiple Pages (Poster) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
Making Two-Sided Copies from One-Sided Originals (1 to 2-Sided) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21
Making Two-Sided Copies from Two-Sided Originals (2 to 2-Sided) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22
Making One-Sided Copies from Two-Sided Originals (2 to 1-Sided) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-23
Making Two-Sided Copies from Facing Pages in a Book (Book to 2-Sided) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24
Collating Copies into Sets in Page Order (Collate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-25
Collating Copies into Groups of the Same Page (Group). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-27
Collating Pages and Stapling (Staple) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-29
Setting Standard Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-30
Interrupting the Current Job to Make Priority Copies (Interrupt Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-32
Sample Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-32
Recalling a Previous Copy Setting (Recall) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-34
Registering Frequently Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-35

Scan Originals Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

7-1
 7. Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

Copying Facing Pages in a Book on Two Separate Sheets of Paper (2-Page Separation). . . . 7-39
Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Feeding Different-Sized Originals Together in the Feeder (Different Size Originals) . . . . . . . . 7-41
Copying while Verifying Scanned Images (Scan Image Check) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42

Book/Page Edit/Shift Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43

Adding Front and Back Covers, Sheet Insertions, and Chapter Pages to Copy Sets (Front
Cover/Back Cover) (Paper Insertion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Page and Copy Set Numbering (Page Numbering) (Copy Set Numbering) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
Printing a Watermark and Date (Watermark/Print Date). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Making Copies with the Original Image Shifted (Shift) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
Making Copies with Margins (Margin). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Tab Paper Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58

Process/Layout Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59

Reducing Two, Four, or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Copy Sheet (Image Combination). . 7-61
Composing Images (Form Composition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
Composing Images (Image Composition). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
7 Embedding Hidden Text in the Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

Making Copies of a Designated Area (Area Designation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68

Making Copies by the Original Image Repeated (Image Repeat). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71
Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erase) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved between Transparencies (Transparency
Interleaving) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76
Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77
Making Copies with the Original Image Reversed (Mirror Image). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-78

Image Adjustment Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-79

Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80
Adjusting the Image Quality (Image Quality Adjustment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81
Adjusting the Color (Color Balance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
Specifying the Look of the Image (One Touch Color) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83

Setting Job Block Combination, Store In User Inbox, and Job Done Notice . . . . . . . . . 7-84
Combining Multiple Batches of Originals with Different Copy Settings (Job Block
Combination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85
Storing Scanned Originals with Copy Settings in a User Inbox (Store In User Inbox) . . . . . . . 7-88
E-mail Notification at the End of a Copy Job (Job Done Notice). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-89

7-2
Switching to the Express Copy Basic Features
Screen
You can switch the Regular Copy Basic Features screen to the Express Copy Basic
Features screen. Press [Express Copy] to switch to the Express Copy Basic
Features screen. To return to the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, press
[Copy].

Express Copy Basic Features screen

7
NOTE

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

• By default, only the [Copy] function key is displayed on top of the Basic Features screen.
You can set to display the [Express Copy] function key from the Additional Functions
screen.
• After changing the copy settings, even if you switch to the Express Copy Basic Features
screen from the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, or vice versa, the copy settings will
be retained.
• If you press (Reset) on the Express Copy Basic Features screen, the display returns
to the Express Copy Basic Features screen (Standard mode). If you press (Reset) on
the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, the display returns to the Regular Copy Basic
Features screen (Standard mode).
• You can set to display only the [Copy] function key, only [Express Copy] function key, or
both [Copy] and [Express Copy] function keys. (See Chapter 4 "Customizing Settings," in
the Reference Guide.)

Switching to the Express Copy Basic Features Screen 7-3

 Various Features of the Express Copy Basic Features
Screen
The following is an explanation of the keys displayed on the Express Copy Basic
Features screen. For detailed explanations of the functions of these keys, see the
related chapters in this manual.

NOTE
The Special Features modes displayed on the Express Copy Basic Features screen are
displayed on the Regular Copy Basic Features screen by pressing [Special Features].

This screen enables you to set basic copying modes. You can adjust the exposure,
set basic copying modes such as the Collate mode, and Special Features modes
such as Mode Memory and the Recall modes.

7
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

a Color Mode
You can select the color mode. (See "Automatic Color Selection," on p. 7-9.)

b Adjusting Exposure, Automatic Adjustment of Exposure

You can adjust the copy exposure. (See "Adjusting Copy Exposure," on p.
7-10.)

c Image Quality
You can adjust image quality to the level best suited for the quality of text or
photo originals. (See "Selecting Image Quality," on p. 7-11.)

7-4 Various Features of the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

d Copy Ratio
You can set the machine to select the copy ratio automatically, or you can
manually specify the copy ratio for a copy job. (See "Specifying the Copy Ratio
by Percentage (Zoom by Percentage)," on p. 7-12, "Enlarging/Reducing
Originals to a Standard Size (Preset Zoom)," on p. 7-13, "Automatically Setting
the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy Paper Sizes (Auto Zoom)," on
p. 7-14, "Slightly Reducing Images to Prevent the Original Periphery from
Being Trimmed (Entire Image)," on p. 7-15, "Calculating the Copy Ratio Based
on the Original and Copy Paper Sizes (Zoom Program)," on p. 7-15, "Enlarging/
Reducing Originals with Copy Ratios Set Independently for the X and Y Axes
(XY Zoom)," on p. 7-17, and "Enlarging an Image onto Multiple Pages
(Poster)," on p. 7-18.)

e Paper Select
You can set the machine to select the paper size. (See "Selecting the Copy
Paper Size (Paper Select)," on p. 7-19.)

f Two-Sided
This mode enables you to make two-sided copies from one-sided originals or
one-sided copies from two-sided originals. (See "Making Two-Sided Copies
from One-Sided Originals (1 to 2-Sided)," on p. 7-21, "Making Two-Sided
Copies from Two-Sided Originals (2 to 2-Sided)," on p. 7-22, "Making
One-Sided Copies from Two-Sided Originals (2 to 1-Sided),"on p. 7-23, and
"Making Two-Sided Copies from Facing Pages in a Book (Book to 2-Sided)," on 7
p. 7-24.)

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

g Finishing
The Finishing mode can be selected to collate copies in various ways, either by
pages or copy sets. (See "Collating Copies into Sets in Page Order (Collate),"
on p. 7-25, "Collating Copies into Groups of the Same Page (Group)," on p.
7-27, and "Collating Pages and Stapling (Staple)," on p. 7-29.)

h Standard Key Settings

You can register copy modes that you have specified as Standard Keys. This
key is a shortcut key to Standard Key Settings for Express Copy Screen in
Copy Settings from the Additional Functions screen. (See "Setting the
Standard Keys for the Regular Copy Basic Features Screen," on p. 8-6.)

i Interrupt Mode
The Interrupt mode enables you to interrupt a reserved or current job long
enough to make higher priority copies. (See "Interrupting the Current Job to
Make Priority Copies (Interrupt Mode)," on p. 7-32.)

j Sample Set
This mode enables you to check the copy result before making multiple copies.
(See "Sample Set," on p. 7-32.)

Various Features of the Express Copy Basic Features Screen 7-5

 k Others
You can set copy modes other than Scan Originals, Book/Page Edit/Shift,
Process/Layout, Image Adjustment. (See "Setting Job Block Combination,
Store In User Inbox, and Job Done Notice," on p. 7-84.)

l Image Adjustment
You can make copies of original images with a sharper or softer contrast. (See
"Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness)," on p. 7-80.)

m Process/Layout
You can process original images and change the layout of the originals. (See
"Process/Layout Settings," on p. 7-59.)

n Book/Page/Edit/Shift
You can make booklets, add page numbers, and set finishing modes for
scanned images. (See "Book/Page Edit/Shift Settings," on p. 7-43.)

o Scan Originals
You can make various settings for the scanning of bound originals and
different-sized originals. (See "Scan Originals Settings," on p. 7-38.)

p Recall
This function enables you to recall the three most recently performed copy
settings, and make copies using those settings. (See "Recalling a Previous
7 Copy Setting (Recall)," on p. 7-34.)
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

q Mode Memory
You can store any possible combination of Copy functions. A memory key can
be named and can hold up to nine settings. (See "Registering Frequently Used
Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memory)," on p. 7-35, "Registering a Memory
Key Name," on p. 7-36, "Recalling a Copy Mode," on p. 7-36, and "Erasing a
Copy Mode," on p. 7-37.)

7-6 Various Features of the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

Operating the Express Copy Basic Features Screen
This section describes cautions to take when making a copy using the Express
Copy Basic Features screen.

■ Pop-up displays on the Express Copy Basic Features screen

Pop-up displays appear on the Express Copy Basic Features screen. Press [ ] or any
point outside the pop-up display to close the pop-up displays.

Example: The pop-up display which appears when [Enlarge] is pressed.

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

■ Grayed Out Keys
Keys which are grayed out cannot be set. [Option] is only available when there are
optional settings for a copy mode you have selected. Keys for modes which cannot be
used in combination with a selected copy mode are also grayed out.

Example: When [Option] becomes available after you press [1 2-Sided].

Operating the Express Copy Basic Features Screen 7-7

 ■ Combinations of Copy Modes
Some copy modes can be used in combination with other copy modes. Depending on the
copy modes you have selected, some copy modes which are not selected may be
displayed with an [ ]. You cannot select these copy modes in combination with the
currently selected copy modes.

Example: The display of the Different Size Originals key when the 2-Page Separation
mode is set.

7
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

7-8 Operating the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic
Features Screen
This section explains the basic procedure for making a copy with the Express Copy
Basic Features screen.

IMPORTANT
For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with these modes, see
"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.

Automatic Color Selection

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Changing Color Modes," on p. 3-54.

IMPORTANT
• When the Auto-Color Select mode is set and your originals contain color sections, the
machine scans them in the Full Color mode. However, the machine may scan the color
originals in the Black mode under the following conditions. To avoid this, set the color 7
mode to 'Full Color'.

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

- If the originals contain a few color sections
- If the color sections are located only on the left side (within 5 mm from the left edge) or
the right side (within 5 mm from the right edge) of the originals when loading the
originals into the feeder
- If the originals contain light color densities
- If the color sections of the originals are close to black
• If the Single Color mode is selected, you can select Red, Green, Blue, Yellow, Magenta,
or Cyan as the color.
• If the Two Colors mode is selected, you can select Red, Green, Blue, Yellow, Magenta, or
Cyan as the color.

Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen 7-9
 1 Select the color mode.

Auto-Color Select

Black
Two Colors
Single Color
Full Color

● If you select [Single Color] or [Two Colors]

❑ Select the desired color.

Adjusting Copy Exposure

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Exposure Adjustment during Copying/Printing," on p. 3-8.
7
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

1 Press [ ], [ ] or [Auto Density] to adjust the copy exposure.

Adjusting Exposure

Press [ ] and [ ] to move the indicator to the left to make the exposure lighter,
or to the right to make the exposure darker.

7-10 Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen
Selecting Image Quality
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Exposure and Original Type Settings," on p. 3-2.

IMPORTANT
If you make copies of an original containing half-tones, such as a printed photograph,
moiré or screen clash may occur. If this happens, you can soften this moiré effect by
using the Sharpness mode. (See "Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness)," on p.
7-80.)

1 Select the image quality ([Text/Printed Img.], [Text/Photo],

[Printed Image], [Photo], [Text], [Map], or [Color Copy Orig.]).

Printed Image Mode

Text/Printed Img. Mode
Text/Photo Mode
Photo Mode
Map Mode
7
Priority Level

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

Color Copy Orig. Mode
Text Mode

● If you want to adjust the text/printed img., text/photo, map, or color

copy original processing priority level:
❑ Press [Priority Level] ➞ [Text Priority] or [Photo/Image Priority] to adjust the
degree of priority for text or photo images.
Details of each item are shown below.
[Text Priority]: Priority is given to the faithful reproduction of text.
[Photo/Image Priority]: Priority is given to the faithful reproduction of photos/
images, with as little moiré effect as possible.

Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen 7-11
 Specifying the Copy Ratio by Percentage (Zoom by
Percentage)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Zoom by Percentage," on p. 3-12.

1 Set the copy ratio by pressing [-] or [+].

To return the copy ratio to 100%, press [1:1].

7 You can also use - (numeric keys) on the pop-up display to enter values.
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

7-12 Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen
Enlarging/Reducing Originals to a Standard Size (Preset
Zoom)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Preset Zoom," on p. 3-10.

IMPORTANT
• Place your originals horizontally in the following cases:
- If you are enlarging A4 originals to A3 or B4
- If you are enlarging B5 originals to B4
- If you are enlarging A5 originals to A3 (when the original is placed on the platen glass)
• If you are reducing A3 or B4 originals to A4 or B5 with Auto Orientation in Copy Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen) set to 'Off', place A4R or B5R size paper in a
paper drawer, or stack bypass.

1 To reduce, select a preset reduction ratio. To enlarge, select a

preset enlargement ratio.

2 Select the copy ratio. Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen 7-13
 Automatically Setting the Copy Ratio Based on the
Original and Copy Paper Sizes (Auto Zoom)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Auto Zoom," on p. 3-14.

IMPORTANT
• You cannot copy highly transparent originals, such as transparencies, in the Auto Zoom
mode. Use the Preset Zoom or Zoom by Percentage modes.
• To use the Auto Zoom mode, your originals must conform to a standard paper size: A3,
B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, or A6R. (You can place A5R and A6R originals only on
the platen glass.)

1 Press [Auto].

7
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

IMPORTANT
Select a paper size other than [Auto]. If you select [Auto], the copy ratio will
automatically be set to match the paper size loaded in Paper Drawer 1.

7-14 Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen
Slightly Reducing Images to Prevent the Original
Periphery from Being Trimmed (Entire Image)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Entire Image," on p. 3-16.

1 Press [Entire Image].

Calculating the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy 7

Paper Sizes (Zoom Program)

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Making Copies (Scanning) with the Same XY Copy/Zoom Ratio (Zoom)," on p.
3-18.

NOTE
For instructions on entering values in inches, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.

Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen 7-15
 1 Press [Other Ratio Settings] ➞ [Zoom Program].

2 Press [Zoom] or [XY Zoom].

● Making Copies with the Same XY Copy Ratio (Zoom):

❑ Press [Original Size] ➞ enter the original size ➞ press [Copy Size] ➞ enter the
copy size.
If the zoom ratio is less than 25%, a message appears telling you that the ratio
will be adjusted to 25%. If it is more than 400%, a message appears telling
7 you that the ratio will be adjusted to 400%.
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

● Making Copies with Different XY Copy Ratios (XY Zoom):

❑ Press [X] (horizontal direction) and [Y] (vertical direction) for both the original
size and the copy size ➞ enter each value for X and Y.
If the zoom ratio is less than 25%, a message appears telling you that the ratio
will be adjusted to 25%. If it is more than 400%, a message appears telling
you that the ratio will be adjusted to 400%.

3 Press [Done].

7-16 Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen
Enlarging/Reducing Originals with Copy Ratios Set
Independently for the X and Y Axes (XY Zoom)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Making Copies (Scanning) with Different XY Copy/Zoom Ratios (XY Zoom),"
on p. 3-20.

IMPORTANT
• You cannot enlarge/reduce highly transparent originals, such as transparencies, in the
Auto XY Zoom mode. To make such copies, specify the copy ratio.
• If you set the Auto XY Zoom mode, select the paper size using Manual Paper Selection.
If you do not select the paper size, the copy ratio is automatically set to the size of the
paper loaded in Paper Drawer 1.

1 Press [Other Ratio Settings] ➞ [XY Zoom].

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

2 Press [X] (horizontal axis) or [Y] (vertical axis) ➞ enter a value.
Press [Auto XY Zoom] to set the copy ratios automatically.

IMPORTANT
Select a paper size other than [Auto] when setting [Auto XY Zoom]. If you select
[Auto], the copy ratio is automatically set to match the paper size loaded in Paper
Drawer 1.

3 Press [Done].

Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen 7-17
 Enlarging an Image onto Multiple Pages (Poster)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Poster," on p. 3-25.

IMPORTANT
• Place your original on the platen glass. The Poster mode cannot be used if the original is
placed in the feeder.
• If you set the Poster mode while the color mode is set to 'Auto-Color Select', the color
mode is automatically set to 'Full Color'.
• The Poster mode cannot be used to make copies on nonstandard size paper,
transparencies, and tab paper.

1 Press [Other Ratio Settings] ➞ [Poster].

7
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

2 Press [Copy Ratio(s)] or [Number Of Output Pages].

● If you select [Copy Ratio(s)].

❑ Enter a copy ratio.

● If you select [Number of Output Pages].

❑ Select the number of output pages.

NOTE
The number of output pages that you have selected is used as a guideline. The
actual number of output pages may be less than what you have selected,
depending on a combination of factors that determine the most appropriate number
of pages. These factors include the size of the original, the selected paper size,
and the enlargement ratio.

7-18 Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen
 ❑ Select the desired paper size.
If you select the stack bypass, the screens for specifying the paper size and
paper type in the stack bypass are displayed.

Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Paper Selection," on p. 1-13.

IMPORTANT
When printing on special types of paper, such as heavy paper or transparencies, be sure
to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavy paper. If the type of
paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the
fixing unit may become dirty, or the paper could jam, and a service repair may be
needed.

1 Select the paper source.

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

The paper sizes/types are indicated by icons on the touch panel display, in the
order in which they are loaded in the paper drawers (Manual Paper Selection).
Press [Auto] to set the machine to automatically select the copy paper size.
To select the stack bypass for the current job, or to reserve the stack bypass for a
reserved job, select [Stack Bypass Settings].

Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen 7-19
 IMPORTANT
• If you want to copy an A3 original with an image that extends all the way to the
edges without the periphery of the original being cut off, load the stack bypass or
paper drawer with 320 x 450 mm or 305 x 457 mm paper. (See Chapter 2, "Basic
Operations," in the Reference Guide and "Slightly Reducing Images to Prevent the
Original Periphery from Being Trimmed (Entire Image)," on p. 7-15.)
• The following types of originals cannot be copied by using Automatic Paper
Selection. Copy these using Manual Paper Selection:
- Non-Standard sized originals
- Highly transparent originals, such as transparencies
- Originals with an extremely dark background
- A5R or smaller originals on the platen glass

● If you select stack bypass settings:

❑ Press [All].
❑ Press [Stack Bypass Settings].
❑ Select the paper size ➞ press [Next].

IMPORTANT
If you select a nonstandard size paper, the Poster, Rotate Collate, Rotate Group,
Offset Collate, Offset Group, Staple, 1 2-Sided, 2 2-Sided, Book 2-Sided,
7 2-Page Separation, Front Cover/Back Cover, Paper Insertion, Image Combination,
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

Booklet, Tab Paper Creation, or Store In User Inbox mode cannot be specified.

NOTE
• When placing paper other than a standard size, press [Irreg. Size] ➞ enter the
paper size. You can also select or register a size key ([S1] to [S5]) containing the
paper size setting.
• To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].

❑ Select the desired paper type ➞ press [OK].

7-20 Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen
 NOTE
• [Transparency] can be selected only if [A4] is selected as the paper size.
• [Register/Set] is a shortcut key to Register Paper Type in Common Settings (from
the Additional Functions screen), Paper Select Key Size for Express Copy Screen
in Copy Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), and Stack Bypass
Standard Settings in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).

Register/Set

Making Two-Sided Copies from One-Sided Originals (1 to

2-Sided)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "1 to 2-Sided," on p. 3-44. 7

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

IMPORTANT
• You may not be able to make 2-sided copies on some types of paper, depending on the
paper.
• Make sure to place originals with a horizontal (landscape) orientation, such as A4R, B5R,
and A5R, horizontally. If these originals are placed vertically, the back side of the original
is copied upside down. (You can place A5R originals only on the platen glass.)

1 Press [1 2-Sided] ➞ [Option].

1 2-Sided

Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen 7-21
 2 Select the type of two-sided orientation.

Making Two-Sided Copies from Two-Sided Originals (2 to

2-Sided)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "2 to 2-Sided," on p. 3-46.

IMPORTANT
You may not be able to make 2-sided copies on some types of paper, depending on the
paper.

1 Press [2 2-Sided] ➞ [Option].

7
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

2 2-Sided

2 Select the type of two-sided orientation for both the original

and the copy.

7-22 Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen
Making One-Sided Copies from Two-Sided Originals (2 to
1-Sided)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "2 to 1-Sided," on p. 3-48.

IMPORTANT
• You may not be able to make 2-sided copies on some types of paper, depending on the
paper.
• Make sure to place originals with a horizontal (landscape) orientation, such as A4R, B5R,
and A5R, horizontally. If these originals are placed vertically, the back sides of the copies
will be printed upside down. (You can place A5R originals only on the platen glass.)

1 Press [2 1-Sided] ➞ [Option].

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

2 1-Sided

2 Select the orientation of the originals.

Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen 7-23
 Making Two-Sided Copies from Facing Pages in a Book
(Book to 2-Sided)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Book to 2-Sided," on p. 3-49.

IMPORTANT
• You may not be able to make 2-sided copies on some types of paper, depending on the
paper.
• When using this feature, select A4 or B5 size paper.
• When copying with the Front/Back 2-Sided mode, the front side of the first two-sided
page and the back side of the last two-sided page, are left blank. (The machine's counter
does not count the blank pages as copies.)
• Place the originals on the platen glass. You cannot use the Book 2-sided mode when
the original is placed in the feeder.

1 Press [Book 2-Sided] ➞ select the layout type of original.

7
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

Book 2-Sided

7-24 Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen
Collating Copies into Sets in Page Order (Collate)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Page Order (Collate)," on p. 3-36.

IMPORTANT
The Finishing modes cannot be set if [Transparencies], [Labels], or [Tab Paper] is
selected as the paper type.

1 Press [Collate].

Collate Not Set

Collate

7
Press [Collate Not Set] if you do not want to collate the output.

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

If you want the copies slightly offset vertically in the output tray, press [Offset].

Offset

Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen 7-25
 If you want hole punches made, press [Hole Punch].

Hole Punch

If you want the copies to be output in alternating directions and no finisher is

attached, press [Rotate].

Rotate

7
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

IMPORTANT
• [Rotate] can be selected only in the following cases:
- When the available paper size is selected manually
- When the available paper size is loaded in both the horizontal and vertical
directions
- The selected paper source must have Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) set to 'On'. (See Chapter 4,
"Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
• When you have selected Automatic Paper Selection for the Rotate mode, make
sure to load only paper that can be rotated. Otherwise, the output will not be
rotated.
• If there is no paper which can be rotated, the output will be collated.

7-26 Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen
Collating Copies into Groups of the Same Page (Group)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Same Page (Group)," on p. 3-38.

IMPORTANT
The Finishing modes cannot be set if [Transparencies], [Labels], or [Tab Paper] is
selected as the paper type.

1 Press [Group].

Collate Not Set

Group

7
Press [Collate Not Set] if you do not want to collate the output.

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

If you want the copies slightly offset vertically in the output tray, press [Offset].

Offset

Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen 7-27
 If you want hole punches made, press [Hole Punch].

Hole Punch

If you want the copies to be output in alternating directions and no finisher is

attached, press [Rotate].

Rotate

7
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

IMPORTANT
• [Rotate] can be selected only in the following cases:
- When the available paper size is selected manually
- When the available paper size is loaded in both the horizontal and vertical
directions
- The selected paper source must have Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) set to 'On'. (See Chapter 4,
"Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
• When you have selected Automatic Paper Selection for the Rotate mode, make
sure to load only paper that can be rotated. Otherwise, the output will not be
rotated.
• If there is no paper which can be rotated, the output will be collated.

7-28 Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen
Collating Pages and Stapling (Staple)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Page Order (Staple)," on p. 3-40.

IMPORTANT
• The Finishing modes cannot be set if [Transparencies], [Labels], or [Tab Paper] is
selected as the paper type.
• The accuracy of folds created in the Saddle Stitch mode may vary, depending on the
paper type and the number of sheets.
• The Staple mode can be set only if an optional finisher is attached.
• When printing on special types of paper, such as heavy paper or transparencies, be sure
to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavy paper. If the type of
paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the
fixing unit may become dirty, or the paper could jam, and a service repair may be
needed.

1 Press [Staple].

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

Collate Not Set

Staple

Press [Collate Not Set] if you do not want to collate the output.
If you want hole punches made, press [Hole Punch].

Hole Punch

Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen 7-29
 2 Select the type of staple ([Corner], [Double], or [Saddle
Stitch]) and the stapling position.
❑ Specify the Saddle Stitch.
If you select [Add Cover], select the paper source, the copy settings, and the
paper type ➞ press [OK].

IMPORTANT
• The paper used for the cover page must be the same size as the other pages in
your document.
• If you select [No] in the Cover Settings window, you can select Heavy 5 paper.
• Only 64 to 105 g/m2 paper can be used for the main document.
• Paper of the following weight can be used as a cover sheet:
- If printing on the cover: 64 to 209 g/m2
- If not printing on the cover: 64 to 256 g/m2
• The orientation to place the side of the paper to use for the cover page in the stack
bypass depends on the type of the paper, as shown below:
- Plain, Recycled, Color, Heavy 1 to 4: face up
- Heavy 5: face down
• If you select [Add Cover], you cannot specify the stack bypass as the paper source
used for the main document.
7 ❑ Press [Paper Select] ➞ select the paper source.
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

Setting Standard Keys

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Setting the Standard Keys for the Regular Copy Basic Features Screen," on p.
8-6.

1 Press [Register frequently used keys.].

Register frequently
used keys.

7-30 Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen
2 Select the number of Standard Keys that are displayed on the
Express Copy Basic Features screen.
[Up to 5 Set Keys]: Displays a maximum of 5 Standard Keys.
[Up to 10 Set Keys]: Displays a maximum of 10 Standard Keys.

3 Select the Standard Key to be stored ➞ press [Settings].

4 Display the group of functions to be stored as Standard Keys

by pressing [▼] or [▲] ➞ select the desired function.

5 Select the desired mode to be stored as a Standard Key ➞

press [OK].
The five stored Standard Keys are displayed as shown below.

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

The ten stored Standard Keys are displayed as shown below.

Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen 7-31
 Interrupting the Current Job to Make Priority Copies
(Interrupt Mode)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Interrupt Mode," on p. 1-28.

1 Press [Interrupt].

Interrupt

If you want to make copies after changing the Department ID while Department
ID Management is enabled, press (Log In/Out) ➞ enter the Department ID and
7 Password using - (numeric keys). (See Chapter 6, "System Manager
Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

2 Place your originals ➞ select the desired copy modes.

Sample Set
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Sample Set," on p. 1-30.

IMPORTANT
[Sample Set] appears only if you set to make multiple copies of your original in the
Collate, Offset Collate, Rotate Collate, Staple, Front Cover/Back Cover, Paper Insertion,
Booklet, or Transparency Interleaving mode. [Sample Set] does not appear if the Group
or Offset Group mode is set.

7-32 Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen
1 Place your originals ➞ select the desired copy modes ➞ press
[Sample Set].

IMPORTANT
[Sample Print] is not displayed if only one print is set.

2 Select [All Pages] or [Specified Pages] ➞ press [OK].

● If you select [Specified Pages]:

❑ Press [First Page] and [Last Page] ➞ press [-] or [+] to set their respective page 7
numbers ➞ press [OK].

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

3 Press (Start).

4 Check the sample set ➞ select [Start Print], [Cancel], or

[Change Settings].
To make the remaining copies, press [Start Print].
To cancel copying, press [Cancel].
To change the copy settings, press [Change Settings] ➞ change the necessary
settings ➞ press [Done].
• To change the number of copies, use - (numeric keys) and (Clear) to
clear your entry.
• To change the exposure, press [ ] or [ ]. (See "Adjusting Copy Exposure," on
p. 7-10.)
• To make two-sided copies, press [2-Sided Copy]. (See "Making Two-Sided
Copies from One-Sided Originals (1 to 2-Sided)," on p. 7-21, "Making
Two-Sided Copies from Two-Sided Originals (2 to 2-Sided)," on p. 7-22, or
"Making One-Sided Copies from Two-Sided Originals (2 to 1-Sided)," on p.
7-23.)

Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen 7-33
 • To change the paper size, press [Paper Select]. (See "Selecting the Copy Paper
Size (Paper Select)," on p. 7-19.)
• To collate the copies, press [Finishing]. (See "Collating Copies into Sets in Page
Order (Collate)," on p. 7-25, "Collating Copies into Groups of the Same Page
(Group)," on p. 7-27, or "Collating Pages and Stapling (Staple)," on p. 7-29.)
• To set a margin for binding, press [Margin]. (See "Making Copies with Margins
(Margin)," on p. 7-57.)
• To make color balance adjustments, press [Color Balance]. (See "Adjusting the
Color (Color Balance)," on p. 7-82.)
• To embed hidden text in the background, press [Secure Watermark]. (See
"Embedding Hidden Text in the Background," on p. 7-67.)
If you print one sample set and then change the settings, the machine will print
from the first set with the new settings.

Recalling a Previous Copy Setting (Recall)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Recalling Previous Copy Jobs," on p. 5-2.

IMPORTANT
• One copy job is defined by setting the number of copies, exposure, zoom, etc., and by
pressing the control panel power switch, (Energy Saver), (Start), or (Reset),
7 when the Auto Clear function is 'On', or by calling up a copy job stored in memory. If one
of these keys was not pressed, or if the Auto Clear function is not active, calling up a copy
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

job by pressing [Recall] is not possible.

• You cannot recall the Job Block Combination mode.
• The Standard mode cannot be recalled or stored.
• Identical copy modes that are stored, are counted as one setting.

1 Press [Recall].

2 Select either [1 Before], [2 Before], or [3 Before].

7-34 Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen
Registering Frequently Used Copy Settings in Memory
(Mode Memory)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Storing Scan/Print/Copy Settings," on p. 5-4.

Storing Copy Settings

IMPORTANT
You cannot store the Job Block Combination mode in Mode Memory.

1 Specify the copy settings to register on the Express Copy

Functions screen ➞ press [Mode Memory].

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

2 Press [Register].

3 Select a memory key ([M1] to [M9]) to store a desired mode ➞

press [Register].

● If you select an empty memory key (no settings have been stored):
❑ Press [Yes], when the confirmation message appears asking you to store the
mode.
The memory key registering the copy mode is highlighted, and the registered
settings are displayed.

● If you select an occupied memory key (settings have been stored):

❑ Press [Yes], when the confirmation message appears asking you to overwrite
the mode.

Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen 7-35
 The memory key registering the copy mode is highlighted, and the registered
settings are displayed.

4 Press [Done].

Registering a Memory Key Name

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Naming a Memory Key," on p. 5-6.

1 On the Mode Memory screen, press [Register].

2 Select a memory key ([M1] to [M9]) to give a name to ➞ press

[Register Name].

3 Enter the new name ➞ press [OK].

7 4 Press [Done].
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

Recalling a Copy Mode

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Recalling Scan/Print/Copy Settings," on p. 5-7.

1 Press [Mode Memory] ➞ select a memory key that registers

the copy settings you want to use.

7-36 Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen
Erasing a Copy Mode
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Erasing Scan/Print/Copy Settings," on p. 5-9.

1 Press [Mode Memory] ➞ [Register].

2 Select a memory key to be erased ➞ press [Erase].

IMPORTANT
Make sure to check the settings first before erasing them. 7

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

3 Press [Yes].

4 Press [Done].

Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen 7-37
 Scan Originals Settings
This section describes the functions that you can use from [Scan Originals] on the
Express Copy Basic Features screen. This screen enables you to scan facing
pages of a book or bound original, print them in two separate pages, or store them
as two separate pages with the 2-Page Separation mode, and copy different size
originals together as one group with the Different Size Originals mode, and so on.
Press [Scan Originals] to set these modes.

7
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

IMPORTANT
For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with these modes, see
"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.

NOTE
To cancel the settings for each function, press [Do Not Set].

a 2-Page Separation
This mode enables you to copy facing pages in a book or magazine onto
separate sheets of paper. (See "Copying Facing Pages in a Book on Two
Separate Sheets of Paper (2-Page Separation)," on p. 7-39.)

b Job Build
This mode enables you to scan originals that are too many to be set at once by
dividing them into multiple batches. (See "Copying Separately-Set Originals
(Job Build)," on p. 7-40.)

7-38 Scan Originals Settings

 c Different Size Originals
This mode enables you to copy different-size originals, such as A3 and A4, or
B4 and B5, together as one group by setting them in the feeder. (See "Feeding
Different-Sized Originals Together in the Feeder (Different Size Originals)," on p.
7-41.)

d Scan Image Check

This mode enables you to confirm scanned images page by page while copying
them when you scan originals in succession on the platen glass. (See "Copying
while Verifying Scanned Images (Scan Image Check)," on p. 7-42.)

Copying Facing Pages in a Book on Two Separate Sheets

of Paper (2-Page Separation)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "2-Page Separation," on p. 4-10.

IMPORTANT
Place the original on the platen glass. The 2-Page Separation mode cannot be used
when the original is placed in the feeder.

NOTE 7
To make two-sided copies of books or bound originals, use the Book 2-Sided copying

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

feature in the 2-Sided mode. (See "Making Two-Sided Copies from Facing Pages in a
Book (Book to 2-Sided)," on p. 7-24.)

1 Press [Scan Originals] ➞ [2-Page Separation].

2 Press [Set].

3 Press [Done].

Scan Originals Settings 7-39

 Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Job Build," on p. 4-53.

IMPORTANT
• You cannot change the copy settings while the machine is scanning originals in the Job
Build mode. You need to set the necessary copy settings beforehand, according to the
type of originals and the desired result.
• If you place the originals in the feeder, remove each original from the original output area
when scanning is complete.
• When copying, you can change or specify the following settings before scanning the next
batch of originals (i.e., between batches): the number of copies, 2-Sided Original mode,
original type, copy exposure, color mode, and copy ratio. However, if you specify the
Image Combination mode with the Job Build mode, you cannot change the original type,
copy exposure, color mode, and copy ratio.
• If you use the Job Block Combination mode, the Job Build mode is automatically set for
each batch of originals. You cannot use the Job Build mode for the combined document.

1 Press [Scan Originals] ➞ [Job Build].

7
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

2 Press [Set].

3 Press [Done].

7-40 Scan Originals Settings

Feeding Different-Sized Originals Together in the Feeder
(Different Size Originals)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Different Size Originals," on p. 4-52.

IMPORTANT
• All originals placed together in the feeder must be the same weight (paper type).
• If the Different Size Originals mode is set, the scanning speed may be slower than
normal.

1 Press [Scan Originals] ➞ [Different Size Originals].

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

2 Select the type of originals.

3 Press [Done].

Scan Originals Settings 7-41

 Copying while Verifying Scanned Images (Scan Image
Check)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Scan Image Check," on p. 4-56.

IMPORTANT
• When 1 2-Sided is set, two-sided copying is not performed and the machine copies
each original at a time.
• The originals must be set on the platen glass. You cannot copy using Scan Image Check
mode with the originals set in the feeder.

1 Press [Scan Originals] ➞ [Scan Image Check].

7
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

2 Press [Set].

3 Press [Done].

7-42 Scan Originals Settings

Book/Page Edit/Shift Settings
This section describes the functions that you can use from [Book/Page Edit/Shift]
on the Express Copy Basic Features screen. This screen enables you to make
copies for use as a booklet with the Booklet mode, make copies with the original
image shifted with the Shift mode, and so on. Press [Book/Page Edit/Shift] to set
these modes.

7
IMPORTANT

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with these modes, see
"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.

NOTE
• The Book/Page Edit/Shift screen consists of a list of individual settings. Press [▼] or [▲]
to scroll to the desired setting.
• To cancel the settings for each function, press [Do Not Set].

a Front Cover/Back Cover

This mode enables you to program the machine to automatically add front and
back covers using a different type of paper stock from what is used for the main
text. (See "Making a Copy with Front and Back Covers," on p. 7-45.)

b Paper Insertion
This mode enables you to program the machine to automatically add sheet
insertions or chapter pages using a different type of paper stock from what is
used for the main text. (See "Making a Copy with Inserted Sheets," on p. 7-46.)

Book/Page Edit/Shift Settings 7-43

 c Booklet
This mode enables you to copy one-sided or two-sided originals in such a way
that the copies are made into a booklet. (See "Making Copies for Use as a
Booklet (Booklet)," on p. 7-48.)

d Page Numbering
Documents can be copied with page numbers (numbers only, numbers
surrounded by hyphens, or chapter numbers). (See "Page Numbering," on p.
7-51.)

e Copy Set Numbering

This mode enables you to copy a document with a five digit serial number in the
background on each page. (See "Copy Set Numbering," on p. 7-52.)

f Watermark
This mode enables you to copy a watermark and user-defined text onto the
output. (See "Watermark," on p. 7-53.)

g Print Date
This mode enable you to copy the date onto the output. (See "Print Date," on p.
7-54.)

h Shift
This mode enables you to make copies with the entire image shifted to the
7 center or a corner. (See "Making Copies with the Original Image Shifted (Shift),"
on p. 7-55.)
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

i Margin
This mode enables you to make copies with the entire original image shifted by
a designated width to the left, right, top, or bottom to create a margin on the
copies. Use this mode when you want the copies placed in a ring binder. (See
"Making Copies with Margins (Margin)," on p. 7-57.)

j Tab Paper Creation

Load tab paper into the paper drawer, and you can copy onto the tab part of the
tab paper. (See "Tab Paper Creation," on p. 7-58.)

7-44 Book/Page Edit/Shift Settings

Adding Front and Back Covers, Sheet Insertions, and
Chapter Pages to Copy Sets (Front Cover/Back Cover)
(Paper Insertion)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Cover/Sheet Insertion," on p. 4-12.

IMPORTANT
• If you select the Staple mode when the optional Finisher-AA1 or Saddle Finisher-AA2 is
attached, you cannot staple more than 30 sheets of A3, B4, or A4R paper, or 50 sheets
of A4 or B5 paper, including sheet insertions.
• If you are using labels, you cannot copy onto the front cover, back cover, or sheet
insertions. However, you can copy on the inside of the back cover.

Making a Copy with Front and Back Covers

1 Press [Book/Page Edit/Shift] ➞ [Front Cover/Back Cover].

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

Book/Page Edit/Shift Settings 7-45

 2 Select the front cover and/or back cover.
❑ Select the desired Front Cover/Back Cover feature.
❑ Press [Paper Select] ➞ select the paper source.

IMPORTANT
• Select the same sized paper for [Front Cover] and [Back Cover]. If you set [Paper
Insertion] (or [Chapter Page]), or [Tab Paper], select the same sized paper as the
front and back covers.
• When you select [Front Cover], [Back Cover], [Sheet Insertion] (or [Chapter Page]),
or [Tab Paper], if the paper size for one feature is changed to another size, the
other three features are changed. However, you may change the paper drawer for
one feature without affecting the others, as long as the paper size is the same.
• If you select [Tab Paper], only A4 paper can be used.

❑ Select whether to copy on the front cover and/or back cover.

3 Press [Done].

Making a Copy with Inserted Sheets

7
1 Press [Book/Page Edit/Shift] ➞ [Paper Insertion].
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

7-46 Book/Page Edit/Shift Settings

2 Select the desired paper insertion feature ([Sheet Insertion],
[Chapter Page], or [Tab Paper]) ➞ press [Add].
You cannot select [Sheet Insertion] and [Chapter Page] at the same time.
To check/change a specific setting, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired page
➞ select the page ➞ press [Edit].
To erase a specific setting, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired page ➞ select
the page ➞ press [Erase].
If you select [Tab Paper], set the shift width for tab paper.

3 Enter the page number where you want sheet insertions,

chapter pages, or tab papers to be inserted.
❑ Enter the page number where you want the sheet insertion added using -
(numeric keys).
❑ Press [Paper Select] ➞ select the paper source.

IMPORTANT
• Select the same sized paper for [Sheet Insertion] (or [Chapter Page]) and [Tab
Paper]. If you set [Paper Insertion], select the same sized paper as the front and
back covers.
7
• When you select [Front Cover], [Back Cover], [Sheet Insertion] (or [Chapter Page]),

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

or [Tab Paper], if the paper size for one feature is changed to another size, the
other three features are changed. However, you may change the paper drawer for
one feature without affecting the others, as long as the paper size is the same.
• If you select [Tab Paper], only A4 paper can be used.

❑ Select whether to print on the front side, back side, or both sides of the paper.
If you set [Chapter Page] or [Tab Paper], you cannot set the side of paper to
print on.
❑ Press [OK].

IMPORTANT
• You cannot insert the sheet insertion and chapter page on the first page. Set their
positions starting from the second page. However, you can insert the tab paper in
front of the first cover.
• If you select [Copy on Both Sides] for the front cover and tab paper is set to insert
in front of the first page, the front cover is output first as blank and then the printed
tab paper is output.
• If you select [Leave Blank] for the sheet insertion, you can set the same page with
tab paper. In this case, the paper for the sheet insertion is output first and then the
tab paper is output.

Book/Page Edit/Shift Settings 7-47

 4 Press [Done].

Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Booklet Mode," on p. 4-21.

IMPORTANT
• Saddle stitching is not performed when there is only one sheet.
• Saddle stitching can be performed only if the optional Saddle Finisher-AA2 is attached.
• The accuracy of folds created in the Saddle Stitch mode may vary, depending on the
paper type and the number of sheets.
• Make sure to place originals with a vertical (portrait) orientation vertically. If these
originals are placed horizontally, the even numbered pages will be printed upside down.
• When printing on special types of paper, such as heavy paper or transparencies, be sure
to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavy paper. If the type of
paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the
fixing unit may become dirty, or the paper could jam, and a service repair may be
needed.

7
1 Press [Book/Page Edit/Shift] ➞ [Booklet].
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

2 Press [Set] ➞ specify each setting.

❑ Press [Select Original Size] ➞ set the size of the original to scan.
❑ If the original is two-sided, press [2-Sided Original] ➞ select the type of
two-sided original ➞ press [OK].
❑ Press [Option] ➞ select the desired orientation.
❑ Press [Paper Select] ➞ select the paper source.

7-48 Book/Page Edit/Shift Settings

❑ If you want to add a cover, press [Add Cover], select the paper source for the
cover ➞ select whether to copy on the cover page ➞ select paper type ➞ press
[OK].

IMPORTANT
• The paper used for the cover page must be the same paper size as that which is
used for copying the main document.
• If you are using Heavy 5 paper for the cover sheets, you can only print on the inside
of the front cover or inside of the back cover.
• 64 to 105 g/m2 paper can be used for the main document.
• Paper of the following weight can be used as a cover sheet:
- If you are printing on the front cover or back cover: 64 to 209 g/m2
- If you are printing on the inside of the front cover or inside of the back cover: 64 to
256 g/m2
• The orientation to place the side of the paper to use for the cover page in the stack
bypass depends on the type of the paper, as shown below:
- Plain, Recycled, Color, Bond, Heavy 1 to 4: face up
- Heavy 5: face down
• If you select [Add Cover], you cannot specify the stack bypass as the paper source
used for the main document.
❑ Select whether to saddle stitch the booklet.
❑ If you select [Divided Booklet], enter the number of sheets that you want to 7
divide by pressing [-] or [+] ➞ press [OK].

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

❑ If the printing position of the image is out of place, and you want to set the
creep (displacement) correction, press [Creep Correct] ➞ select [Auto] or
[Manual] ➞ press [OK] ➞ [OK].
❑ If you select [Manual], press [ ] or [ ] to adjust the correction width.

IMPORTANT
The maximum number of sheets, including cover sheets, that can be saddle
stitched is:
- 15 sheets (64 to 80 g/m2)
- 10 sheets (81 to 105 g/m2)

Book/Page Edit/Shift Settings 7-49

 3 Set the Booklet Tray guide to match the paper size.

305 mm x 457 mm/A3/B4 A4R

IMPORTANT
Make sure to set the Booklet Tray guide correctly to match the paper size. Setting
the Booklet Tray guide incorrectly may result in a paper jam.

4 Press [Done].

7
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

7-50 Book/Page Edit/Shift Settings

Page and Copy Set Numbering (Page Numbering) (Copy
Set Numbering)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Page and Copy Set Numbering," on p. 4-104.

IMPORTANT
Printing performance may not be optimal in the Page Numbering or Copy Set Numbering
mode, depending on the scanned original and combination of copy modes.

Page Numbering

1 Press [Book/Page Edit/Shift] ➞ [Page Numbering].

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

2 Select the type of numbering ([Numbers Only], [Numbers with
Hyphens], [Numbered Chapters], or [Total Page Numbering])
➞ specify each setting.
❑ Select the orientation and the position of the page numbers.
❑ Press [Option], you can select the position of the page number for the backside
and whether to count the inserted sheets.
❑ If you select [Number of Digits], enter the size of page number by pressing [-] or
[+] ➞ press [OK].
❑ If you select [Add Character], set the character and position for page
numbering ➞ press [OK].
You can also select the text which has been registered in Register Characters
for Page No./Watermark in Common Settings from Additional Functions
beforehand.
❑ If you want to adjust the print position, press [Adjust Position] ➞ press [X] and
[Y] ➞ press [-] or [+] to set their respective position ➞ press [Done].

Book/Page Edit/Shift Settings 7-51

 ❑ Set the page number to start numbering, size and color of the page numbers.
If you want to insert chapter numbers along with page numbers, specify the
starting chapter number on the left, and the starting page number on the right
(1 to 9,999).
If you want to insert the total page number along with page numbers, specify
to have the page numbers start on the left side (1 to 9,999), and the total page
number starts on the right side (1 to 20,000). To set the total page number
automatically, press [Auto].

3 Press [Done].

Copy Set Numbering

1 Press [Book/Page Edit/Shift] ➞ [Copy Set Numbering].

7
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

2 Press [Set] ➞ specify each setting.

❑ Select the orientation and print position of the copy set numbers.
❑ If you want to adjust the print position, press [Adjust Position] ➞ press [X] and
[Y] ➞ press [-] or [+] to set their respective position ➞ press [Done].
❑ Set the starting page number, size, density, and color of the page numbers.

3 Press [Done].

7-52 Book/Page Edit/Shift Settings

Printing a Watermark and Date (Watermark/Print Date)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Printing a Watermark and Date," on p. 4-111.

IMPORTANT
Printing performance may not be optimal in the Watermark mode, depending on the
scanned original and combination of copy modes.

Watermark

1 Press [Book/Page Edit/Shift] ➞ [Watermark].

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

2 Press [Set] ➞ specify each settings.
❑ Set the watermark orientation and position.
❑ Select the text size, the desired preset watermark, and the color.

IMPORTANT
You cannot select multiple watermark types at the same time. If you select one of
these types, the previously set type is canceled.
❑ If you want to create a user-defined watermark, press [Create] from the
Watermark Type drop-down list ➞ press [Enter] ➞ enter the text ➞ press [OK].
You can also select the text which has been registered in Register Characters
for Page No./Watermark in Common Settings from the Additional Functions
screen.
❑ Press [Print Type] ➞ select the desired print type.
You can select [Transparent] or [Overlay] for the print type. If [Transparent] is
selected, you can adjust the halftone density by pressing [Light] or [Dark].
❑ Press [Option] ➞ set the page to print on and the position to print on the back
side of the paper.

Book/Page Edit/Shift Settings 7-53

 ❑ If you want to adjust the print position, press [Adjust Position] ➞ press [X] and
[Y] ➞ press [-] or [+] to set their respective position ➞ press [Done].

3 Press [Done].

Print Date

1 Press [Book/Page Edit/Shift] ➞ [Print Date].

7 2 Press [Set] ➞ specify each setting.

❑ Set the number orientation and position.
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

❑ Select the number size, date format, and character color.

❑ Specify the date.
❑ Press [Print Type] ➞ select the desired printing type.
You can select [Transparent] or [Overlay] for the print type. If [Transparent] is
selected, you can also adjust the halftone density by pressing [Light] or
[Dark].
❑ If you want to adjust the print position, press [Adjust Position] ➞ press [X] and
[Y] ➞ press [-] or [+] to set their respective position ➞ press [Done].

3 Press [Done].

7-54 Book/Page Edit/Shift Settings

Making Copies with the Original Image Shifted (Shift)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Shifting the Original Image," on p. 4-37.

IMPORTANT
• If [Center/Corner Shift] is selected, and the original and the copy paper are the same size
and the copy ratio is set at 100%, the image of the original is not shifted.
• If you use the numeric keys to enter the shift position, the original image may be partially
cut off on the copy, depending on the size of the original, the size of the copy paper, and
the amount of shift specified.

Making Copies with the Original Image Shifted to the Center or a

Corner

1 Press [Book/Page Edit/Shift] ➞ [Shift].

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

2 Press [Center/Corner Shift] ➞ select the shift direction with an
arrow key.
The shift direction is the direction that you want the original image moved to, if
you visualize the original image as being face up and appearing in the center of
the copy image.

3 Press [Done].

Book/Page Edit/Shift Settings 7-55

 Making Copies with the Original Image Shifted Using the Numeric
Keys
NOTE
For instructions on entering values in inches, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.

1 Press [Book/Page Edit/Shift] ➞ [Shift].

7 2 Press [No. Key Entry] ➞ press [Settings] under <Front Side>

or <Back Side> ➞ select the shift direction ➞ enter the desired
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

value - (numeric keys).

3 Press [Done].

7-56 Book/Page Edit/Shift Settings

Making Copies with Margins (Margin)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Margin Mode," on p. 4-41.

IMPORTANT
When the Margin mode is set, the entire original image is shifted to the left, right, top, or
bottom by a selected width, then copied. When copying an original image that extends to
the edge of the sheet, part of that image will be cut off.

NOTE
For instructions on entering values in inches, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.

1 Press [Book/Page Edit/Shift] ➞ [Margin].

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

2 Select the desired margin type ➞ set the margin width.
Press [-] or [+] to set the margin width (-50 mm to +50 mm) of the front and back
side of the paper.

IMPORTANT
• If you are using the Margin and 2-Sided modes together and copying an original
that already has margins, follow the instructions below:
- 1 2-Sided: Set the margin for the back only.
- 2 2-Sided: You do not need to set a margin. Proceed to make copies in the usual
way.
- 2 1-Sided: Set the margin for the back only.
• If you are using the Margin and 2-Sided modes together and copying an original
that does not have a margin, follow the instructions below:
- 1 2-Sided: Set the margin for both the front and back.
- 2 2-Sided: Set the margin for both the front and back.
- 2 1-Sided: Set the margin for both the front and back.

Book/Page Edit/Shift Settings 7-57

 3 Press [Done].

Tab Paper Creation

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Tab Paper Creation," on p. 4-72.

IMPORTANT
Only A4 originals can be used with the Tab Paper Creation mode.

1 Press [Book/Page Edit/Shift] ➞ [Tab Paper Creation].

7
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

2 Press [Set] ➞ specify each setting.

❑ Press [Paper Select] ➞ select the paper source.
❑ Press [-] or [+] to set the shift width (0 mm to 25 mm).

NOTE
To enter values in inches, press [Inch].

3 Press [Done].

7-58 Book/Page Edit/Shift Settings

Process/Layout Settings
This section describes the functions that you can use from [Process/Layout] on the
Express Copy Basic Features screen. This screen enables you to automatically
reduce multiple originals to fit onto one side or both sides of a selected paper size
with the Image Combination mode, erase shadows and lines that appear when
copying (scanning) with the Frame Erase mode, and so on. Press [Process/Layout]
to set these modes.

i
j

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

IMPORTANT
For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with these modes, see
"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.

NOTE
• The Process/Layout screen consists of a list of individual settings. Press [▼] or [▲] to
scroll to the desired setting.
• To cancel the settings for each function, press [Do Not Set].

a Image Combination
This mode automatically reduces two, four, or eight originals, two-sided
originals, or the facing pages of a book to fit onto one side or both sides of a
selected paper size. (See "Reducing Two, Four, or Eight Originals to Fit on a
Single Copy Sheet (Image Combination)," on p. 7-61.)

b Form Composition
Form Composition is a function that superimposes an image (image form)
previously scanned, registers it in the hard disk of the machine, and places it on
the image of the original. (See "Composing Images (Form Composition)," on p.
7-62.)

Process/Layout Settings 7-59

 c Image Composition
Image Composition is a function that embeds an original into the designated
area of a previously scanned image (image form), which has been stored in the
hard disk of the machine. (See "Composing Images (Image Composition)," on p.
7-64.)

d Secure Watermark
This mode enables you to embed hidden text in the background of copies. (See
"Embedding Hidden Text in the Background," on p. 7-67.)

e Area Designation
This mode enables you to frame areas to copy, or areas to blank out in the
scanned image. You can designate up to four different areas using the edit pen
on the preview screen, or the numeric keys. (See "Making Copies of a
Designated Area (Area Designation)," on p. 7-68.)

f Image Repeat
You can repeatedly copy the image of an original in either the vertical or
horizontal direction. (See "Making Copies by the Original Image Repeated
(Image Repeat)," on p. 7-71.)

g Frame Erase
This mode erases shadows and lines that appear when copying various types of
7 originals. (See "Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erase),"
on p. 7-73.)
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

h Transparency Interleaving
Use this mode when copying onto transparencies fed from the stack bypass.
The machine automatically interleaves a sheet of paper between each
transparency. (See "Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved between
Transparencies (Transparency Interleaving)," on p. 7-76.)

i Nega/Posi
This mode enables you to make copies of the original image by inverting the
black and the white areas. (See "Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi)," on p.
7-77.)

j Mirror Image
This mode enables you to copy the image of the original as if it is reflected in a
mirror or reversed. (See "Making Copies with the Original Image Reversed
(Mirror Image)," on p. 7-78.)

7-60 Process/Layout Settings

Reducing Two, Four, or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single
Copy Sheet (Image Combination)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Image Combination," on p. 4-33.

IMPORTANT
• Originals copied using the Image Combination mode must all be the same size. You
cannot use the Image Combination mode with the Different Size Originals mode.
• Before scanning the next original (between jobs), you can set or change settings for the
number of copy sets and 2-Sided Original mode.

1 Press [Process/Layout] ➞ [Image Combination].

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

2 Specify each setting.
❑ Select the desired image combination type ([2 On 1], [4 On 1], or [8 On 1]).
❑ Press [Option] to select the order of the layout ➞ select the image order.
❑ Press [Select Original Size] ➞ specify the original size.
❑ Press [2-Sided Original] to scan two-sided originals ➞ select the type of
2-sided originals.
❑ Press [2-Sided Copy] to make two-sided copies ➞ select the type of two-sided
orientation.
❑ Press [Paper Select] ➞ select the paper source.

3 Press [Done].

Process/Layout Settings 7-61

 Composing Images (Form Composition)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Composing Images (Form Composition)," on p. 4-92.

IMPORTANT
• To copy in the Form Composition mode, the Image form must be stored in the memory of
the machine. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
• The Form Composition mode can be used with other copy modes (other than those listed
above) to process images. However, copy modes other than the Shift mode are effective
on the copied images, and not on the stored image forms.
• Up to 100 image forms can be stored. However, this number varies depending on the
capacity of the hard disk.
• Printing performance may not be optimal in the Form Composition mode, depending on
the scanned original and image form.
• The exposure of CMYK format images for Form Composition may become lighter when
copying with the Form Composition mode.

1 Press [Process/Layout] ➞ [Form Composition].

7
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

2 Press [Settings] for <Front Side> or <Back Side>.

To superimpose a different image on both sides of a sheet, it is necessary to set
the 2-Sided mode.
To impose the same image on both sides of the sheet, specify the settings for the
front side ➞ press [Same as Front].

7-62 Process/Layout Settings

3 Select an image form to be superimposed over the original ➞
press [Next].
To check the images stored as forms, press [Check Print], and make a copy of
the image.
Image forms stored in the RGB color format are indicated with a icon. Image
forms stored in the CMYK color format are indicated with a icon. (Color image
forms are indicated with a color icon.)
If you press [Details], the detailed information of the image form is displayed.

● If [Check Print] is pressed:

❑ Select the paper size ➞ press [Start Print].
Press [Cancel] to cancel the sample print.

4 Select form composition type and color mode.

● If you select [Transparent Image]:

❑ Press [-] or [+] to adjust the halftone density.

● If you select [Single Color] from the Color Mode drop-down list:
7
❑ Select a color ➞ press [OK].

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

IMPORTANT
Only the Auto-Color Select mode can be set for image forms in the CMYK color
format.

5 Press [Done].

Process/Layout Settings 7-63

 Composing Images (Image Composition)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Composing Images (Image Composition)," on p. 4-95.

IMPORTANT
• To copy in the Image Composition mode, the Image form must be stored in the memory
of the machine. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
• The Image Composition mode can be used with other copy modes (other than those
listed above) to process images. However, copy modes other than the Shift mode are
effective on the copied images, and not on the stored image forms.
• Up to 100 image forms can be stored. However, this number varies depending on the
capacity of the hard disk.
• Printing performance may not be optimal in the Image Composition mode, depending on
the scanned original and image form.
• The exposure of CMYK format images for Image Composition may become lighter when
copying with the Image Composition mode.

1 Press [Process/Layout] ➞ [Image Composition].

7
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

2 Press [Settings] for <Front Side> or <Back Side>.

To superimpose a different image on both sides of a sheet, it is necessary to set
the 2-Sided mode.
To impose the same image on both sides of the sheet, specify the settings for the
front side ➞ press [Same as Front].

7-64 Process/Layout Settings

3 Select an image form to be superimposed over the original.
To check the images stored as forms, press [Check Print], and make a copy of
the image.
Image forms stored in the RGB color format are indicated with a icon. Image
forms stored in the CMYK color format are indicated with a icon. (Color image
forms are indicated with a color icon.)
If you press [Details], the detailed information of the image form is displayed.

● If [Check Print] is pressed:

❑ Select the paper size ➞ press [Start Print].
Press [Cancel] to cancel the sample print.

4 Designate the area.

NOTE
If you designate an area using the edit pen, the output image may not reflect the
designated area precisely. To designate an area precisely, entering values by using
the numeric keys is recommended.

● Using the edit pen:

7
❑ Press [Pen Entry].

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

❑ Designate the area using the edit pen.
Mark the two opposing points with the edit pen.

NOTE
• To clear the first point entered, press [Erase Point]. (Once an area is designated,
[Erase Point] changes to [Clear Area].)
• To clear a designated area, press [Clear Area].
• To zoom in on any area on the original, press the ratio drop-down list ➞ select an
enlargement ratio ➞ press [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] to specify the area to display.
• To check the designated area, press [Preview].
• To modify a designated area that was specified by using the edit pen, press [Area
Fine Adj.] ➞ [Point select] ➞ select the point that you want to modify ➞ press [ ],
[ ], [ ], or [ ] to move the point ➞ press [Done] ➞ [Preview] to check the
modified area.
• You can designate only one rectangular area to embed the image.

❑ Press [OK].

Process/Layout Settings 7-65

 ● Using the numeric keys:
❑ Press [Numeric Key Entry].

IMPORTANT
• Before performing the next step, you must manually measure the size and position
of the area that you want to designate on the original.
• When you measure the XY values, always start measuring from the image out to
the right side edge of the original, and up to the top of the original. These
measurements tell the machine the desired framed area's size and position.
❑ Press [X1], [X2], [Y1], and [Y2] ➞ use - (numeric keys) to specify the
respective measurements.
[X1]: The distance of the area's right border to the original's right edge.
[X2]: The distance of the area's left border to the original's right edge.
[Y1]: The distance of the area's top border to the original's top edge.
[Y2]: The distance of the area's bottom border to the original's top edge.

NOTE
• To change a value you entered, press [X1], [X2], [Y1], or [Y2] ➞ enter the correct
value using - (numeric keys).
• To check the designated area, press [Check Area].
• To clear all your entries, press [Clear Area].
7 • You can designate only one rectangular area to embed the image.
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

❑ Press [OK].

5 Press [Done].

7-66 Process/Layout Settings

Embedding Hidden Text in the Background
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Embedding Hidden Text in the Background," on p. 7-67.

IMPORTANT
• You cannot adjust the exposure during copying if the Secure Watermark mode is set.
• The embedded hidden text may not appear as specified even if the copy with the Secure
Watermark mode applied is copied, depending on the copy machine.
• The Secure Watermark mode is available only if the optional Secure Watermark is
activated.
• Printing performance may not be optimal in the Secure Watermark mode, depending on
the selected document and combination of printing modes.
• The Secure Watermark mode is only available if the optional Secure Watermark is
activated.

1 Press [Process/Layout] ➞ [Secure Watermark].

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

2 Select the type of Secure Watermark (Watermark, Date, Copy
Set Numbering, Serial Number, ID/User Name) ➞ set the
various items for the desired type of Secure Watermark.
❑ If you want to create your own Secure Watermark, select [Create] from the
Watermark Type drop-down list ➞ press [Enter] ➞ enter the text ➞ press [OK].
You can also select the text which has been registered in Register Characters
for Page No./Watermark in Common Settings from the Additional Functions
screen.

IMPORTANT
If you want to register your newly created Secure Watermark to be selected
whenever necessary, press [Register] ➞ enter the text to be registered.

Process/Layout Settings 7-67

 ❑ Select the background pattern, color, and size of the text.
To change the orientation of characters, press [Print Characters Vertically].
To use white letters on a colored background, press [White Letters on Colored
Background].

3 Press [Done].

Making Copies of a Designated Area (Area Designation)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Area Designation," on p. 4-64.

IMPORTANT
• To use Area Designation (Framing) with the Image Repeat mode, first specify the Image
Repeat mode, and then designate the desired area. Only one area can be designated.
• If the designated area is too small, the color original may be scanned in the Black mode
even if the color mode is set to 'Auto-Color Select'.

Using the Edit Pen

7 IMPORTANT
• You can designate only one polygonal area at a time.
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

• You cannot designate a rectangular area and a polygonal area at the same time.
• You can use the numeric keys to modify areas designated with the edit pen.
• You cannot copy or scan documents with the Area Designation mode if you place your
originals into the feeder.

1 Press [Process/Layout] ➞ [Area Designation].

2 Press [Pen Entry].

7-68 Process/Layout Settings

3 Press [Start Scan].

IMPORTANT
Confirm that the original is placed on the platen glass.

4 Designate the area using the edit pen.

IMPORTANT
You cannot designate a rectangular area and a polygonal area at the same time.

● To designate a rectangular area with two points:

❑ Designate two opposing points with the edit pen.
You can designate up to four different areas.

● To designate an area with multiple points:

❑ Press [Multi-point] ➞ specify the area with the edit pen.
❑ After designating the last point, press [Fix Multipoints].
You can designate up to 10 points.

IMPORTANT 7
• If you select [Multi-point], only one area can be designated at a time.

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

• An area that is designated by selecting [Multi-point] cannot be modified using -
(numeric keys).

5 Press [Framing] or [Blanking].

Details of each item are shown below.
[Framing]: Copy only the contents of the designated area while discarding the
rest of the original.
[Blanking]: Copy the original by blanking out the contents of the designated area.
If you want to use different settings for different areas, select the area by pressing
the appropriate area key ➞ select [Framing] or [Blanking].

6 Press [Preview] ➞ check the designated area ➞ press [Done].

7 Press [Next] ➞ select [Shift center] or [Do not shift center].

If only [Blanking] is selected, this step is unnecessary. Skip to step 8.

Process/Layout Settings 7-69

 8 Press [OK] ➞ [Done].
If you need to designate the same area for multiple originals, remove the original
from the platen glass ➞ place all of the originals in the feeder ➞ press (Start).

Using the Numeric Keys

1 Press [Process/Layout] ➞ [Area Designation].

7
2 Press [No. Key Entry].

IMPORTANT
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

• Before performing the next step, you must manually measure the size and position
of the area that you want to designate on the original.
• When you measure the XY values, always start measuring from the image out to
the right side edge of the original, and up to the top of the original. These
measurements tell the machine the desired framed area's size and position.

3 Press [X1], [X2], [Y1], and [Y2] ➞ use - (numeric keys) to

specify the respective measurements.
[X1]: The distance of the area's right border to the original's right edge.
[X2]: The distance of the area's left border to the original's right edge.
[Y1]: The distance of the area's top border to the original's top edge.
[Y2]: The distance of the area's bottom border to the original's top edge.
You can designate up to four areas.

7-70 Process/Layout Settings

 4 Press [Framing] or [Blanking].
Details of each item are shown below.
[Framing]: Copy only the contents of the designated area while discarding the
rest of the original.
[Blanking]: Copy the original by blanking out the contents of the designated area.

5 Press [Next] ➞ select [Shift center] or [Do not shift center].

If only [Blanking] is selected, this step is unnecessary. Skip to step 6.

6 Press [OK] ➞ [Done].

Making Copies by the Original Image Repeated (Image

Repeat)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Image Repeat," on p. 4-59.

IMPORTANT 7
• To use Area Designation (Framing) with the Image Repeat mode, first specify the Image

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

Repeat mode, and then designate the desired area. Only one area can be designated.
• If the color mode is set to 'Auto-Color Select', and the number of times the image to be
repeated is set to too many or the designated area is too small, the color original may be
scanned in the Black mode.

1 Press [Process/Layout] ➞ [Image Repeat].

Process/Layout Settings 7-71

 2 Press [Set] ➞ set the number of times you want the image to
repeat for both the horizontal and vertical directions.
Press [Auto] to set the number of times the image will repeat automatically. To
make repeated images with the number of repeats automatically set, select the
paper size. The original image is then copied so that the maximum number of
images possible fits onto the selected paper size.
Press [-] or [+] to set the number of times the image will repeat manually.
If you want to specify the amount of space between repeated images, press
[Margin Settings].
If you want only a designated area on the original to be repeated, press
[Framing].

IMPORTANT
Depending on how many times you have manually set the image to repeat, some of
the images may overlap.

3 Press [Done].

7
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

7-72 Process/Layout Settings

Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame
Erase)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Frame Erase," on p. 4-44.

NOTE
For instructions on entering values in inches, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.

Making Copies by Erasing the Frame around the Original (Original

Frame Erase)

1 Press [Process/Layout] ➞ [Frame Erase].

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

2 Press [Original Frame Erase] ➞ select the original size ➞ set
the frame width area to erase by pressing [-] or [+].
The frame area is erased evenly (based on the value you set) around each edge
of the original. To set different frame erase width values for the top, right, left, and
bottom sides of the original independently, press [Adjust Each Dim.].
If you press [Adjust Each Dim.], select the frame erase values by pressing [-] or
[+].

IMPORTANT
You can set the Original Frame Erase mode only for the original paper sizes shown
on the touch panel display.

3 Press [Done].

Process/Layout Settings 7-73

 Making Copies by Erasing the Book Frame (Book Frame Erase)

1 Press [Process/Layout] ➞ [Frame Erase].

2 Press [Book Frame Erase] ➞ select the facing-page original

size ➞ press [Center] and [Sides] ➞ set the frame width to
erase by using [-] or [+].
The frame area to be erased is uniformly set for all sides of the original. To set the
value independently for all sides of the original, press [Adjust Each Dim.].

7 If you select [Adjust Each Dim.], press [Top], [Left], [Center], [Right], and
[Bottom] to set the frame width to erase by using [-] or [+].
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

IMPORTANT
You can set the Book Frame Erase mode only for the original paper sizes shown on
the touch panel display.

3 Press [Done].

7-74 Process/Layout Settings

Making Copies by Erasing Binding Holes (Binding Erase)

IMPORTANT
• Do not place originals with binding holes in the feeder, as this may damage the originals.
• When using the Binding Erase mode, the borders you do not select are also erased by 4
mm.

1 Press [Process/Layout] ➞ [Frame Erase].

IMPORTANT
Place your original on the platen glass. 7

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

2 Press [Binding Erase] ➞ designate the area of the binding
holes on the original.
The border is where the binding holes are located on the original, if you visualize
the original as being face up.

3 Press [Done].

Process/Layout Settings 7-75

 Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved between
Transparencies (Transparency Interleaving)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Transparency Interleaving," on p. 4-30.

IMPORTANT
Only A4 is available for the Transparency Interleaving mode.

1 Press [Process/Layout] ➞ [Transparency Interleaving].

7
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

2 Press [Set].
To switch the paper source for transparencies, press [Paper Select] ➞ select the
paper source.
If the following screen is displayed, perform either of the following procedures in
Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) (See Chapter 4,
"Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.):
• Set Register Paper Type for the selected paper source to 'Transparency'.
• Set the paper type setting to 'Transparency' if Stack Bypass Standard Settings
is set to 'On'.

7-76 Process/Layout Settings

 IMPORTANT
Make sure that transparencies are loaded into the selected paper source. Loading
paper types other than transparencies may result in a paper jam.

3 Specify the settings for the interleaf sheets.

❑ Decide whether to copy on the interleaf sheet, or leave the interleaf sheet
blank.
❑ Press [Paper Source of Interleaf Sheet] ➞ select the size of the interleaf
sheets.

4 Press [Done].

Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Inverting Images (Nega/Posi)," on p. 4-58.

1 Press [Process/Layout] ➞ [Nega/Posi]. 7

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

2 Press [Set].

3 Press [Done].

Process/Layout Settings 7-77

 Making Copies with the Original Image Reversed (Mirror
Image)
For instructions in Copy Basic Features Screen, see "Mirror Image," on p. 4-63.

1 Press [Process/Layout] ➞ [Mirror Image].

2 Press [Set].
7
3
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

Press [Done].

7-78 Process/Layout Settings

Image Adjustment Settings
This section describes the functions that you can use from [Image Adjustment] on
the Express Copy Basic Features screen. This screen enables you to adjust the
contrast of the image with the Sharpness mode, adjust the color of the image with
the Color Balance mode, and so on. Press [Image Adjustment] to set these modes.

IMPORTANT 7
For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with these modes, see

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.

NOTE
To cancel the settings for each function, press [Do Not Set].

a Sharpness
This mode enables you to make copies of original images with a sharper
contrast or a softer contrast. (See "Making Sharp Contrast Copies
(Sharpness)," on p. 7-80.)

b Image Quality Adjustment

This mode enables you to erase the background color of the original and to
prevent the original image on the reverse side of thin originals from appearing
on the copies. (See "Adjusting the Image Quality (Image Quality Adjustment),"
on p. 7-81.)

c Color Balance
This mode enables you to adjust the color by changing the relative strength and
density of yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. (See "Adjusting the Color (Color
Balance)," on p. 7-82.)

Image Adjustment Settings 7-79

 d One Touch Color
This mode enables you to change the color tones, saturation, or density by
selecting the look of the image with just one touch of a key. (See "Specifying the
Look of the Image (One Touch Color)," on p. 7-83.)

Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness)," on p. 4-90.

1 Press [Image Adjustment] ➞ [Sharpness].

7
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

2 Press [Low] or [High] to adjust the sharpness for the Text and
Photo/Image areas.

3 Press [Done].

7-80 Image Adjustment Settings

Adjusting the Image Quality (Image Quality Adjustment)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Image Quality Adjustment," on p. 4-75.

IMPORTANT
• If [A] (Auto) is selected as the scan/copy exposure on the Scan screen or the Copy Basic
Features screen, pressing [Image Qual. Adjustment] and making fine adjustments
cancels the automatic copy/scan exposure setting. Similarly, if you select [A] (Auto) for
the scan/copy exposure setting when image quality adjustments have been made, the
Image Quality Adjustment mode is canceled and the automatic exposure is used instead.
• To automatically adjust the quality of the background, select [A] (Auto) for the scan/copy
exposure. (See "Automatic Exposure Adjustment," on p. 3-7.)

Remove Background

1 Press [Image Adjustment] ➞ [Image Quality Adjustment].

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

2 Press [Remove Background].
If you want to make fine adjustments to the density of the background color,
press [Fine Adj.].

3 Press [Done].

Image Adjustment Settings 7-81

 Prevent Bleeding

1 Press [Image Adjustment] ➞ [Image Quality Adjustment].

2 Press [Prevent Bleed-thru].

If you want to make fine adjustments to the density, press [Fine Adj.].

3 Press [Done].

Adjusting the Color (Color Balance)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Adjusting the Color," on p. 4-78.

1 Press [Image Adjustment] ➞ [Color Balance].

7
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

2 Press [-] or [+] to adjust the strength of each color.

If you want to adjust the saturation level, press [Saturation] ➞ specify the setting.
If you want to adjust the hue level, press [Hue] ➞ specify the setting.
If you want to make fine adjustments for each color, press [Density Fine Adj.] ➞
specify the setting.
To register the specified color balance settings, press [Recall/Store] ➞ select the
key to recall color balance settings from ➞ press [Register].
To recall the specified color balance settings, press [Recall/Store] ➞ select a key
that already has settings stored on it.
To name the specified color balance settings, press [Recall/Store] ➞ select a key
that already has settings stored in it ➞ press [Register Name].

7-82 Image Adjustment Settings

 To erase the specified color balance settings, press [Recall/Store] ➞ select a key
that already has settings stored in it ➞ press [Erase].

3 Press [Done].

Specifying the Look of the Image (One Touch Color)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Storing Scanned Originals with Copy Settings in a User Inbox (Store In User
Inbox)," on p. 7-88.

IMPORTANT
One Touch Color mode settings are actually preset color balance settings. Therefore, if
you change the One Touch Color mode settings, any color balance settings that you may
have made are also changed.

1 Press [Image Adjustment] ➞ [One Touch Color].

2 Select the desired One Touch Color type. Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

3 Press [Done].

Image Adjustment Settings 7-83

 Setting Job Block Combination, Store In User Inbox,
and Job Done Notice
This section describes the functions that you can use from [Others] on the Express
Copy Basic Features screen. This screen enables you to specify the Job Block
Combination, Store In User Inbox, and Job Done Notice modes. Press [Others] to
set these modes.

7 IMPORTANT
For information on the modes which cannot be set in combination with these modes, see
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

"Combination of Functions Chart," on p. 9-8.

NOTE
To cancel the settings for each function, press [Do Not Set].

a Job Block Combination

This mode enables you to scan multiple batches of originals with different copy
settings and print them as one document. (See "Combining Multiple Batches of
Originals with Different Copy Settings (Job Block Combination)," on p. 7-85.)

b Store In User Inbox

This mode enables you to store scanned originals in a User Inbox from the
Express Copy Basic Features screen. (See "Storing Scanned Originals with
Copy Settings in a User Inbox (Store In User Inbox)," on p. 7-88.)

c Job Done Notice

This feature enables you to send a <Job Done> notification to specified e-mail
addresses when a copy job is complete. (See "E-mail Notification at the End of
a Copy Job (Job Done Notice)," on p. 7-89.)

7-84 Setting Job Block Combination, Store In User Inbox, and Job Done Notice
 NOTE
The Job Done Notice can be set if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated by
registering a license key.

Combining Multiple Batches of Originals with Different

Copy Settings (Job Block Combination)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Combining Multiple Batches of Originals with Different Copy Settings," on p.
4-116.

IMPORTANT
• You can use the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode for the combined document. You cannot
use the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode for each batch of originals.
• If you use the Job Block Combination mode, the Job Build mode is automatically set for
each batch of originals. You cannot use the Job Build mode for the combined document.
• You cannot make an Interrupt copy while copying with the Job Block Combination mode.
• You cannot store the Job Block Combination mode in Standard Settings.
• You cannot store the Job Block Combination mode in Mode Memory.
• You cannot recall the Job Block Combination mode.
7

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

1 Press [Others] ➞ [Job Block Combination].

2 Press [Set] ➞ specify the copy settings for the combined

document ➞ press [OK].
If you select special features before setting the Job Block Combination mode, the
selected special features will be retained for the combined document.
For instructions on specifying copy settings and their available combinations,
see Chapter 3, "Basic Copying and Mail Box Features,", Chapter 4, "Special
Copying and Mail Box Features," and "Combination of Functions Chart," on p.
9-8.

Setting Job Block Combination, Store In User Inbox, and Job Done Notice 7-85
 3 For each batch of originals, specify the copy settings ➞ press
(Start).
For instructions on specifying copy settings and their available combinations,
see Chapters 3 through 4.
If you are scanning two or more batches of originals, press [Recall Last Setting]
to return to the copy settings for the previous batch.

4 Check the settings on the Scan screen.

You can change or specify the Color Mode, 2-Sided Original, Copy Ratio,
Original Type or Copy Exposure mode before scanning the next batch of
originals (i.e., between batches).
If you want to continue to scan another batch of originals without changing the
copy settings, place your originals and press (Start).
If you want to rescan or cancel the current batch of originals, press [Clear/
Re-enter This Block] and repeat the procedure from step 3.
If you want to change the copy modes and scan another batch of originals, press
[Next Block] and repeat the procedure from step 3.

7 5 When you have finished scanning all of your originals, press

[Conf./Combine All Blocks].
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

You can also press [Conf.Blocks] in step 3 to proceed to step 6.

6 Combine the Batches of documents.

To check the copy settings for the combined document, press [Set. Conf.
(Overall)].
To select all of the batches of originals, press [Select All]. However, if a batch of
originals is already selected, this key changes to [Clear Selection].
To add another batch, press [Add Block] and repeat the procedure from step 3.
❑ Select the batches of originals in the order in which you want to combine them.
❑ To view the detailed information of a batch of originals, select the batch of
originals ➞ press [Details].
❑ To erase a batch of originals, select the batch of originals ➞ press [Erase].
❑ To make a sample print of a selected batch of originals or the combined
document, press [Sample Print].
To make a sample print of a selected batch of originals, press [Sample Set of
Selected Block].
To make a sample print of the combined document, press [Sample Set of
Combined Job].

7-86 Setting Job Block Combination, Store In User Inbox, and Job Done Notice
 ❑ To use the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode for the combined document, press
[Cover/Sheet Insertion].
❑ To change the number of copies, enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 9,999).

7 Press [Start Print].

● If you selected [Copy upon Storing] in the Store In User Inbox mode
for the combined document in step 2:
❑ Press [Print/Store].
To store the combined document without printing, press [Store and Finish].

● If you selected the Store In User Inbox mode without setting [Copy
upon Storing] for the combined document in step 2:
❑ Press [Store].

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

Setting Job Block Combination, Store In User Inbox, and Job Done Notice 7-87
 Storing Scanned Originals with Copy Settings in a User
Inbox (Store In User Inbox)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Storing Scanned Originals with Copy Settings in a User Inbox," on p. 4-122.

IMPORTANT
• When you press (Stop) while copying in the Store In User Inbox (Copy upon Storing)
mode, the job is not paused, but canceled.
• You cannot store documents in the Memory RX Inbox or a Confidential Fax Inbox. For
instructions on storing documents in the Memory RX Inbox and Confidential Fax Inboxes,
see Chapter 6, "Sending and Receiving Documents Using the Inboxes."

1 Press [Others] ➞ [Store In User Inbox].

7
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

2 Press [Set] ➞ select the User Inbox number ➞ press [OK].

❑ If you want to name the document, press [Document Name] ➞ enter a name for
the document ➞ press [OK].
❑ If you want to make copies of the scanned originals while storing them in the
User Inbox, press [Copy upon Storing] ➞ [OK].
To store the scanned originals without copying them, press [Copy upon
Storing] to clear the check mark.

3 Press [Done].

7-88 Setting Job Block Combination, Store In User Inbox, and Job Done Notice
E-mail Notification at the End of a Copy Job (Job Done
Notice)
For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen,
see "Job Done Notice," on p. 4-50.

IMPORTANT
To send a job done notice, you need to store e-mail addresses in the Address Book
beforehand. (See Chapter 9, "Storing/Editing Address Book Settings," in the Sending
Guide.)

1 Press [Others] ➞ [Job Done Notice].

Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

2 Select the destination to send the Job Done Notice.
If you want to select a destination managed with the Access Number
Management setting, press [Access Number] ➞ enter the access number for the
selected destination using - (numeric keys) ➞ press [OK]. If you press [No
Access Number], the designations that are not managed with the Access
Number Management setting are displayed. (See Chapter 11, "System Manager
Settings," in the Sending Guide.)

3 Press [Done].

Setting Job Block Combination, Store In User Inbox, and Job Done Notice 7-89
7
Using the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

7-90 Setting Job Block Combination, Store In User Inbox, and Job Done Notice
Customizing Settings 8
CHAPTER

This chapter explains how to change the machine's default settings and customize them to suit
your needs.

What Are Additional Functions? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Customizing Copy Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Copy Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Setting the Paper Select Key Size for the Express Copy Basic Features Screen . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Setting the Standard Keys for the Regular Copy Basic Features Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Setting the Standard Keys for the Express Copy Basic Features Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Auto Collate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Image Orientation Priority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Auto Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Changing the Current Standard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Restoring the Default Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12

Customizing Mail Box Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Mail Box Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Setting/Storing a User Inbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Initializing a User Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Standard Scan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Setting/Storing a Confidential Fax Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Initializing a Confidential Fax Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19

8-1
 What Are Additional Functions?
Additional Functions enable you to customize the machine's various settings.

NOTE
Settings specified from the Additional Functions screen are never changed when you
press (Reset).

1 Press (Additional Functions).

The Additional Functions screen is displayed.
Customizing Settings

2 Select an Additional Functions setting.

3 Press a mode key to specify its settings.

For an overview of all the settings you can change from the Additional Functions
screen, see "Copy Settings Table," on p. 8-4 and "Mail Box Settings Table," on p.
8-13.

8-2 What Are Additional Functions?

 NOTE
The Copy Settings screen consist of a list of individual settings. Press [ ] or [ ] to
scroll to the desired setting.

4 Specify the desired mode ➞ press [OK].

Customizing Settings
8
The selected mode is set.

5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen

appears.

What Are Additional Functions? 8-3

 Customizing Copy Settings

Copy Settings Table

The following items can be stored or set in Copy Settings from the Additional
Functions screen.

Additional Functions Available Settings Delivered Applicable Page

Large*1: Four paper sources
maximum (Stack Bypass, Stack
Bypass Settings,
1: Paper Drawer 1,
Customizing Settings

Paper Select Key Size for

2: Paper Drawer 2, No p. 8-5
Express Copy Screen
3: Paper Drawer 3,
4: Paper Drawer 4,
5: Paper Deck-AA1),
Small
Standard Key 1/2
Settings for Regular All modes (No settings*1) No p. 8-6
Screen
8
The number of the displayed
Standard Key Settings for Standard Keys: Up to 5 Set
No p. 8-7
Express Copy Screen Keys*1/Up to 10 Set Keys
All modes (No settings*1)
Auto Collate*2 On*1/Off Yes p. 8-9
Image Orientation Priority On/Off*1 Yes p. 8-9
Auto Orientation On*1/Off Yes p. 8-10
Standard Settings Store, Initialize No p. 8-10
Initialize Copy Settings Initialize No p. 8-12
*1 Indicates the default setting.
*2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.

8-4 Customizing Copy Settings

 NOTE
• For instructions on setting the modes not described in this manual, refer to the other
manuals listed in the front of this Copying and Mail Box Guide. (See "Manuals for the
Machine," on p. ii.)
• The Copy Settings screen consists of a list of individual settings. Press [ ] or [ ] to
scroll to the desired setting.
• Information that is delivered when the Device Information Delivery Settings mode is set,
is marked with a "Yes" in the "Delivered" column. For instructions on setting the Device
Information Delivery Settings mode, see Chapter 6, "System Manager Settings," in the
Reference Guide.

Setting the Paper Select Key Size for the Express Copy
Basic Features Screen
This feature enables you to set the order and number of paper sources and paper
drawers to display for the paper select keys on the Express Copy Basic Features

Customizing Settings
screen.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Copy Settings] ➞ [Paper

Select Key Size for Express Copy Screen].

2 Select [Large] or [Small] ➞ press [OK]. 8

If you want to display all the paper drawers, press [Small].

● If you select [Large]:

❑ Select the keys to display first.
You can select up to four paper sources.
Example: The large keys appear as shown below.

Customizing Copy Settings 8-5

 Example: The small keys appear as shown below.

Setting the Standard Keys for the Regular Copy Basic

Features Screen
This feature is useful when you want to store frequently-used copy functions on the
Customizing Settings

Regular Copy Basic Features screen.

You can store up to two Standard Keys in addition to the Copy Ratio, Finishing, and
2-Sided Mode keys on the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, the Special
Features screen, and the memory keys containing stored copy settings in Mode
Memory.

8
1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Copy Settings] ➞
[Standard Key 1 Settings for Regular Screen].
To set Standard Key 2, press [Standard Key 2 Settings for Regular Screen].

2 Display the group of functions to be stored as Standard Keys

by pressing [▼] or [▲] ➞ select the desired function.
To cancel the Standard Key setting already stored, press [No Settings].

8-6 Customizing Copy Settings

 3 Select the desired mode to be stored as a Standard Key ➞
press [OK].
Example: The stored Standard Keys appear on the Regular Copy Basic Features
screen as shown below.

Standard Key 1

Standard Key 2

Setting the Standard Keys for the Express Copy Basic

Customizing Settings
Features Screen
This feature is useful when you want to store frequently-used copy functions on the
Express Copy Basic Features screen.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Copy Settings] ➞ 8

[Standard Key Settings for Express Copy Screen].

2 Select the number of Standard Keys that are displayed on the

Express Copy Basic Features screen.

[Up to 5 Set Keys]: Displays a maximum of 5 Standard Keys.

[Up to 10 Set Keys]: Displays a maximum of 10 Standard Keys.

Customizing Copy Settings 8-7

 3 Select the Standard Key to register ➞ press [Settings].

4 Display the group of functions to be stored as Standard Keys

by pressing [▼] or [▲] ➞ select the desired function.
To cancel the Standard Key setting already stored, and press [No Settings].

5 Select the desired mode to be stored as a Standard Key ➞

press [OK].
Example: The five stored Standard Keys are displayed as shown below.
Customizing Settings

Example: The ten stored Standard Keys are displayed as shown below.

8-8 Customizing Copy Settings

Auto Collate
If Auto Collate is set to 'On', the machine automatically sets the Collate (Offset
Collate) mode when originals are placed in the feeder. This is useful when making
multiple sets of copies, because you do not need to remember to select the
Finishing mode.

NOTE
If Auto Collate is set to 'On' and an optional finisher is attached, the Offset Collate mode
is set. However, if no finisher is attached, the Collate mode is set instead.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Copy Settings] ➞ [Auto

Collate].

Customizing Settings
2 Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].

Image Orientation Priority

If Image Orientation Priority is set to 'On', the machine always copies an image in
the same orientation as the original image. This is because the images on originals
may be copied upside down, depending on the copy mode set.
8
NOTE
If Image Orientation Priority is set to 'On', the copy speed is slower than normal.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Copy Settings] ➞ [Image

Orientation Priority].

2 Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].

Customizing Copy Settings 8-9

 Auto Orientation
If Auto Orientation is set to 'On', the machine uses information, such as the size of
the original and the zoom ratio, to determine the most suitable orientation for the
specified paper size and automatically rotates the image, if necessary.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Copy Settings] ➞ [Auto

Orientation].

2 Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].

NOTE
• If A4, B5, or A5 originals are enlarged onto A3 or B4 copy paper, Auto Orientation
is not performed even if you select [On].
Customizing Settings

• Only the images of standard size originals, up to A4 paper, can be rotated when
the copy ratio is set to 100%.
• If Automatic Paper Selection is set and the most suitable paper size is not
available, the paper source that is loaded with paper of the same size, even if the
orientation is different, is displayed as the optimal paper to use.

8
Changing the Current Standard Settings
The Standard Settings refers to a combination of copy modes that the machine
automatically returns after the power is turned ON, or when (Reset) is pressed.
The Standard Settings can be changed to suit your needs, or restored to their
default settings.

NOTE
The default settings are:
- Copy Quantity: 1
- Paper Selection: Auto
- Exposure and Original Type: Auto
- Original Type: Text/Printed Img.
- Copy Ratio: 1:1
- Copy Function: 1 1-Sided Copy
- Color Mode: Auto-Color Select

8-10 Customizing Copy Settings

Storing New Standard Settings
You can store your own copy settings as the Standard Settings.
To store your own standard settings, specify the desired settings on the Copy Basic
Features screen and/or the Special Features screen, and then follow the procedure
below.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Copy Settings] ➞

[Standard Settings].

2 Press [Store].

3 Press [Yes] ➞ [Done].

Customizing Settings
Initializing Standard Settings
You can restore the Standard Settings to their default settings.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Copy Settings] ➞

[Standard Settings]. 8

2 Press [Initialize].

3 Verify the settings ➞ press [Yes] ➞ [Done].

Customizing Copy Settings 8-11

 Restoring the Default Copy Settings
Modes that have been changed in Copy Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) can be restored to their default settings. (See "Copy Settings Table," on p.
8-4.)

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Copy Settings] ➞ [Initialize

Copy Settings].

2 Press [Yes] ➞ [Done].

Customizing Settings

8-12 Customizing Copy Settings

Customizing Mail Box Settings

Mail Box Settings Table

The following items can be stored or set in Mail Box Settings from the Additional
Functions screen.

Applicable
Item Settings Delivered
Page
User Inbox Settings Inbox Number: 00 to 99 Yes*3 p. 8-14
Register Inbox Name: 24 characters
maximum

Customizing Settings
Password: Seven digit number
Doc. Auto Erase: 1, 2, 3, 6, 12
hours; 1, 2, 3*1, 7, 30 days; 0 (no
limit)
Print upon storing from the printer
driver: On, Off*1
URL Send Settings
Initialize*2
Standard Scan Settings Store, Initialize No p. 8-16
8
Confidential Fax Inbox Number: 00 to 49 Yes*3 p. 8-17
Inboxes Settings Register Inbox Name: 24 characters
maximum
Password: Seven digit number
URL Send Settings
Initialize*2
*1 Indicates the default setting.
*2 Indicates items that are not delivered as device information.
*3 Information is not delivered if a password is set for the inbox.

NOTE
• For instructions on how to set the modes or settings not described in this manual, refer to
the other manuals that come with this machine. See "Manuals for the Machine," on p. ii.
• For instructions on setting the Memory RX Inbox, see Chapter 10, "System Manager
Settings," in the Sending Guide.
• Information that is delivered when the Device Information Delivery Settings mode is set,
is marked with a "Yes" in the "Delivered" column. For instructions on setting the Device
Information Delivery Settings mode, see Chapter 6, "System Manager Settings," in the
Reference Guide.

Customizing Mail Box Settings 8-13

 Setting/Storing a User Inbox
You can set and store a name and password for a User Inbox, as well as specify the
time that has to elapse before the documents in that inbox are automatically
erased.

NOTE
• You can create up to 100 User Inboxes.
• The numbers for User Inboxes are 00 to 99.
• Setting a name for a User Inbox is optional.
• Setting a password for a User Inbox is optional.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Mail Box Settings] ➞ [User

Inboxes Settings].
Customizing Settings

2 Select the desired User Inbox number.

If you enter User Inbox number using - (numeric keys), make sure to enter a
two digit number ➞ press [OK].

3 Specify each setting ➞ press [OK].

8

[Register Inbox Name]:

Press [Register Inbox Name] ➞ enter the new name ➞ press [OK].
[Password]:
If you want to set a password for this User Inbox, enter the password using -
(numeric keys). You can leave the password blank. You cannot store a password
with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>.
<Time until Document Auto Erase>:
Press [ ] or [ ] to set the time that has to elapse before documents in the
selected User Inbox are automatically erased.

8-14 Customizing Mail Box Settings

 [URL Send Settings]:
If you set the machine to send a link via e-mail to the User Inbox in which the
document is stored, you can check or perform operations on the document in the
User Inbox, using the Remote UI (User Interface) of the machine. To send a link
to a User Inbox via e-mail, press [URL Send Settings] ➞ specify the destination ➞
press [OK].
<Print upon storing from the printer driver>:
You can select whether to print a document when it is sent from a computer and
stored in an inbox. To print the document when it is stored in an inbox, select
[On].

IMPORTANT
Since there is no way to check a stored password, make sure that you write down
the password that you enter, and keep it in a safe place.

NOTE
If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Password in System Settings (from the

Customizing Settings
Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the password is not displayed as
asterisks (*******). (See Chapter 6, "System Manager Settings," in the Reference
Guide.)

4 Press [Done].

Initializing a User Inbox 8

You can restore a stored User Inbox name, password, and the document automatic
erase time to their default settings.

IMPORTANT
You cannot initialize a User Inbox if there are documents still remaining in it.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Mail Box Settings] ➞ [User

Inboxes Settings].

2 Select the User Inbox that you want to initialize.

If you enter User Inbox number using - (numeric keys), make sure to enter a
two digit number ➞ press [OK].

3 Press [Initialize].

Customizing Mail Box Settings 8-15

 4 Press [Yes] ➞ [Done].

Standard Scan Settings

The Standard Scan Settings refer to a combination of scan settings that the
machine automatically returns to after the power is turned ON, or when (Reset)
is pressed.
The Standard Scan Settings can be changed to suit your needs, or restored to their
default settings.

NOTE
The default settings are:
- Document Size: Auto
- Record Size: Auto
- Original Type: Text/Printed Img.
Customizing Settings

- Copy Ratio: 1:1

- Color Mode: Auto-Color Select

Storing the Standard Scan Settings

You can store your own scan settings as the Standard Scan Settings.
To store your own standard scan settings, specify the desired settings on the Scan
8 screen, then follow the procedure below. (See "Storing Originals into an Inbox," on
p. 2-12.)

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Mail Box Settings] ➞

[Standard Scan Settings].

2 Press [Store].

3 Press [Yes] ➞ [Done].

8-16 Customizing Mail Box Settings

 Initializing the Standard Scan Settings
You can restore the Standard Scan Settings to their default settings.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Mail Box Settings] ➞

[Standard Scan Settings].

2 Press [Initialize].

3 Verify the settings ➞ press [Yes].

4 Press [Done].

Customizing Settings
Setting/Storing a Confidential Fax Inbox
You can set and store a name and password for any Confidential Fax Inbox.

NOTE
• Confidential Fax Inboxes are available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is
activated.
• You can create up to 50 Confidential Fax Inboxes. 8
• The numbers for Confidential Fax Inboxes are 00 to 49.
• Setting a name for a Confidential Fax Inbox is optional.
• Setting a password for a Confidential Fax Inbox is optional.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Mail Box Settings] ➞

[Confidential Fax Inboxes Settings].

2 Press the desired Confidential Fax Inbox number.

If you enter Confidential Fax Inbox number using - (numeric keys), make
sure to enter a two digit number ➞ press [OK].

Customizing Mail Box Settings 8-17

 3 Specify each setting ➞ press [OK].

[Register Inbox Name]:

Press [Register Inbox Name] ➞ enter a name ➞ press [OK].
[Password]:
If you want to set a password for this Confidential Fax Inbox, enter the password
Customizing Settings

using - (numeric keys) ➞ press [OK]. You can leave the password blank.
You cannot store a password with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>.
[URL Send Settings]:
If you set the machine to send a link via e-mail to the Confidential Fax Inbox in
which the document is stored, you can check or perform operations on the
document in the Confidential Fax Inbox, using the Remote UI (User Interface) of
the machine. If you want to send a link to a Confidential Fax Inbox via e-mail,
press [URL Send Settings] ➞ specify the destination ➞ press [OK].
8
IMPORTANT
Since there is no way to check a stored password, make sure that you write down
the password that you enter, and keep it in a safe place.

NOTE
If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Password in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the password is not displayed as
asterisks (*******). (See Chapter 6, "System Manager Settings," in the Reference
Guide.)

4 Press [Done].

8-18 Customizing Mail Box Settings

Initializing a Confidential Fax Inbox
You can restore a stored Confidential Fax Inbox name and password to their default
settings.

NOTE
• [Confidential Fax Inboxes Settings] appears only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit
is activated.
• You cannot initialize a Confidential Fax Inbox if there are documents still remaining in it.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Mail Box Settings] ➞

[Confidential Fax Inboxes Settings].

2 Select the Confidential Fax Inbox that you want to initialize.

Customizing Settings
If you entering Confidential Fax Inbox number using - (numeric keys), make
sure to enter a two digit number ➞ press [OK].

3 Press [Initialize].

4 Press [Yes] ➞ [Done]. 8

Customizing Mail Box Settings 8-19

Customizing Settings

8-20 Customizing Mail Box Settings

Appendix 9
CHAPTER

This chapter provides the color copy samples and index.

Color Copy Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Color Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
One Touch Color. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Image Quality Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6
Single Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Two Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7

Combination of Functions Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Mail Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

9-1
 Color Copy Samples
This section provides you with a visual description of how color copies/prints are
produced using different color adjustment modes.

Color Balance
This mode enables you to make fine adjustments to the color by varying the relative
strength and density of yellow, magenta, cyan, and black.

Increase Yellow Decrease Yellow

Increase Magenta Decrease Magenta

Appendix

Original

9 Increase Cyan Decrease Cyan

Increase Black Decrease Black

9-2 Color Copy Samples

Saturation Adjustment
This mode enables you to make fine adjustments to the brightness of yellow, green,
cyan, blue, magenta, and red.

Original Low High

Hue Adjustment
This mode enables you to make fine adjustments to the hue of yellow, green, cyan,
blue, magenta, and red.

Counter-
Original Clockwise Clockwise

Appendix
9

Color Copy Samples 9-3

 Density Fine Adjustment
This mode enables you to make fine adjustments to the density of yellow, magenta,
cyan, and black for each density area.

Lighten the high density Darken the high density

part of magenta part of magenta

Lighten the middle density Darken the middle density

Original part of magenta part of magenta

Lighten the low density Darken the low density

Appendix

part of magenta part of magenta

9-4 Color Copy Samples

One Touch Color
This mode enables you to make copies/prints by selecting the look of the image
with just one touch of a key.

Vivide Colors Tranquil Colors

Original Lighten Image Darken Image

Highlight
Reproduction Retro Photo Image

Appendix
9

Color Copy Samples 9-5

 Image Quality Adjustments
You can improve the image quality of copies by erasing the background color of
originals, and by making sure that dark areas on the reverse side of originals do not
appear on the copies/prints.

Remove Background
This mode enables you to make copies/prints by erasing the background color of
the original. This mode is especially useful for copying/scanning originals, such as
catalogues and paper, that have turned yellow from age.

Copy with the Background

Original Color Erased

Prevent Bleeding
This mode enables you to make copies/prints by preventing the original image on
Appendix

the reverse side of thin originals from appearing on the copies/prints.

Copy

9 Two-Sided Original
on Thin Paper
Image on Image on Normal Settings
Front Side Back Side

Prevent Bleeding
Selected

9-6 Color Copy Samples

Single Color
This mode enables you to make copies/prints in one specific color only.

Original Copy

Two Colors
This mode enables you to make copies/prints in two colors.

Original Copy

Appendix
9

Color Copy Samples 9-7

 Combination of Functions Chart
These charts show the available combinations of settings when you want to set
more than one function at a time.

Copying

ation

nk)
Orient
Combination Available )

unch nt/Leave Bla

tomatic

n
n

electio
Bypass lection, Auto
electio

✕ Combination
Set

ge

Unavailable

l
Autom py Origina
Text/P osure (Au

aper S
rcenta
lready

olor S

▲ Priority
Text/P ted Img.

to

d
per Se
m

ri
Latest Set Mode

Collatin

Reserv Copy
ge
Auto Z Zoom

1 2-S Copy

2-Side
Offset ollate

over (P
Offset roup

Add C titch
Progra

Staple roup
Zoom oom

Image

atic C

Color
by Pe

● Combination and atic P

d Ima
nA

ided
2 1-S ed
ided
olors

Priority to Image
Zoom m

Printe to

atic Pa
Exp
Black r
om

oo

S
Co

id
rin
ho

G
olo

pt
tZ

G
C

e
Y
Functio

Saddle

2 2-S
Collate
Auto X

Hole P
Autom

Rotate
Rotate

Interru
r

Two C

Group
Single

Booklet Modes (Ratio

XY Zo

Photo
Prese

Entire

Full C
Poste

Stack
Color
Copy

Book
Autom
Map
Text

can be changed)
Function to Be Set
Preset Zoom
Zoom by Percentage
XY Zoom
Auto XY Zoom
Auto Zoom
Zoom Program
Entire Image
Poster *4 *4 *3
Appendix

Automatic Color Selection

Full Color
Black
Single Color
Two Colors
Copy Exposure (Automatic)
Text/Printed Img.
Text/Photo
9 Printed Image
Photo
Text
Map
Color Copy Original
Automatic Paper Selection *4
Automatic Paper Selection, Auto Orientation *4
Stack Bypass *3 *1 *1 *3 *3 *3 *3 *3 *3 *3 *3
Collate
Group
Rotate Collating *1
Rotate Group *1
Offset Collate *3
Offset Group *3
Staple *3
Saddle Stitch *3
Add Cover (Print/Leave Blank) *3
Hole Punch
Interrupt Copy
Reserve Copy
1 2-Sided *3
2 2-Sided *3
2 1-Sided
Book 2-Sided *3

*1 You cannot combine these modes if you select a paper type and size other than plain, recycled, color, and heavy
types of A4, A4R, B5, and B5R.
*3 You cannot combine these modes when a nonstandard paper size is selected.
*4 You cannot set these modes in combination with the Poster (Copy Ratio(s)) mode.

9-8 Combination of Functions Chart

 ation

nk)
Orient
Combination Available

Text/ nted Img tomatic)

e Bla
Stack Paper Selec lection
on
✕ Combination

Auto
Set

electi
Unavailable

Leav
tion,
ge

inal
lready

e
●
Priority to Image

per S
XY Z y Percenta

Text/ xposure (A
.
Full C tic Color S
Combination and

Hole ver (Print/

Autom opy Orig

Grou g

ed
Entire rogram
Booklet Modes (Ratio

Photo Image

tin
oom

rve C y
opy
Colla ypass

Offse ollate
lor

p
a

Add C Stitch

op
on A

Zoom oom

Staple roup

2-Sid
Poste age
can be changed)

Colla
atic P
Zoom om

Interr nch
Printe oto

d
d
d
Copy lors
le Co

upt C
XY Z

-Side
-Side
-Side
Black r
oom

Im

olo
tZ

Zo

tG
tC
Pri
Ph

Pu
P

Co

B
atic
b
Functi

o
E

te

le
Rotate
Rotate
r
Autom

p
Prese

Shing

Color

Offse

Sadd

Rese

Book
utom

Grou

1 2
2 2
2 1
Text
Map
Auto
Auto

Two

A
Function to Be Set
2-Page Separation *3
Image Combination *3
Original Frame Erase
Book Frame Erase
Binding Erase
Margin
Shift (Using the Arrow Keys) *9 *9
Shift (Using the Numeric Keys) *9 *9
Front Cover *9 *3
Back Cover *9 *3
Sheet Insertion (Printed/Leave Blank) *9 *3
Chapter Page *9 *3
Tab Paper
Transparency Interleaving *3
Booklet *12
Booklet : Saddle Stitch *12
Booklet : Add Cover (Printed/Leave Blank) *12
Divided Booklet *12
Creep Correction *12
Sample Set *7 *8
Different Size Originals
Job Build
Sharpness
Nega/Posi
Image Repeat *10 *10 *10
Mirror Image
Blanking
Framing
Color Balance
One Touch Color *11 *11 *11 *13 *13
Remove Background *6
Prevent Bleed-thru *6
Form Composition

Appendix
Image Composition
Page Numbering
Copy Set Numbering
Watermark/Print Date
Scan Image Check
Tab Paper Creation
Job Block Combination *3
Store In User Inbox *16
Store In User Inbox (Copy Upon Storing)
Secure Watermark (Watermark)
*16 9
Secure Watermark (Date)
Secure Watermark (Copy Set Numbering)
Secure Watermark (Serial Number)
Secure Watermark (ID/User Name)

*3 You cannot combine these modes when you select a nonstandard paper size as the paper type.
*6 You cannot combine these modes when you make fine adjustments to the density.
*7 You cannot set the Sample Set mode as the Interrupt mode.
*8 You can set the Sample Set mode as the reserve copy mode.
*9 You cannot combine these modes when you set the Different Size Originals mode.
*10 You can set these modes in combination with the Image Repeat (manual setting).
*11 If you select the Retro Photo Image mode in combination with these modes, the mode which is set last has priority
(Priority to Latest Set Mode).
*12 You cannot combine these modes when you set the 2nd Side of 2-Sided Page mode and a nonstandard paper size
is selected as the paper type.
*13 You cannot combine these modes when you set the Retro Photo Image mode.
*15 You cannot combine these modes with the Secure Watermark, Page Numbering, Copy Set Numbering, Watermark,
and Print Date modes in the Job Block Combination mode.
*16 You cannot combine these modes when a nonstandard paper size is selected.

Combination of Functions Chart 9-9

 lank)

)
bering
ng)
eave B

ark (W y Upon Stori

ark (ID l Number)

)
t Num
Blank)

Name
ark)
eys)

rinted/L

e
e Num eys)

aterm
Leave

/User
Combination Available

opy S
eric K

aving

ate)

eria
Set

op
K
✕ Combination

als

ation
Divide Add Cover (P
Bookle Saddle Stitch

Secure ser Inbox (C

Chapte rtion (Printed/
Shift (U g the Arrow

ark (D
ark (C
nt Date

ark (S
Frame Erase

nd

Waterm Numbering
Unavailable

Interle
lready

Origin

reation
ination

osition

x
aper C eck
Image eparation

Erase

ed-thru
ckgrou

osition

r Inbo
ombin
● Priority

ion

olor
to Image

ering
klet

Waterm
Waterm
Waterm
Waterm
Waterm
Ch
me
Combination and

ark/Pri
sing th

Correct

ce
Margin rase

Tab p r P age
arency

nt Size

Repea

ouch C
on A

Comb

Comp
Image

In Use
Booklet Modes (Ratio

d B oo

Image

lock C
Cover

Comp

Numb
al Fra

Balan

ve Ba
over

le Set

nt Ble
ness
sin

osi
Transp r

In U
Inse
can be changed)

gE

ape
eS

uild

S et
t:
t:

ng
g
Functi

Shift (U

Nega/P
Back C

Secure
Secure
Secure
Secure
Framin
Bookle
Bookle

Differe
Bindin

Image

O ne T

Image
Creep

Blanki
2-Pag

Origin

Sharp

Remo

Tab P
S amp

Mirror

Preve
Job B

Job B
Sheet

Color

Store
Store
Front

Form

P age
Copy
B ook

Scan
Function to Be to Set
Preset Zoom
Zoom by Percentage
XY Zoom
Auto XY Zoom *10
Auto Zoom *10
Zoom Program
Entire Image ✕ ✕
Poster
Automatic Color Selection *11
Full Color *11
Black *11
Single Color *13
Two Colors *13
Copy Exposure (Automatic) *6 *6
Text/Printed Img.
Text/Photo
Printed Image
Photo
Text
Map
Color Copy Original
Automatic Paper Selection *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *10
Automatic Paper Selection, Auto Orientation *9 *9
Stack Bypass *3 *3 *3 *3 *3 *3 *3 *12 *12 *12 *12 *12 *3*6 *6
Collate
Group
Rotate Collating
Rotate Group
Offset Collate
Offset Group
Appendix

Staple
Saddle Stitch
Add Cover (Print/Leave Blank)
Hole Punch
Interrupt Copy *7
Reserve Copy *8
1 2-Sided
2 2-Sided
9 2 1-Sided
Book 2-Sided

*1 You cannot combine these modes when you select a paper type and size other than plain, recycled, color, or heavy
types of A4, A4R, B5, and B5R.
*3 You cannot combine these modes when you select a nonstandard paper size as the paper type.
*6 You cannot combine these modes when you make fine adjustments to the density.
*7 You can set the Sample Set mode as the Interrupt mode.
*8 You can set the Sample Set mode as the reserve copy mode.
*9 You cannot combine these modes when you set the Different Size Originals mode.
*10 You can set these modes in combination with the Image Repeat (manual setting).
*11 If you select the Retro Photo Image mode in combination with these modes, the mode which is set last has priority
(Priority to Latest Set Mode).
*12 You cannot combine these modes when you set the 2nd Side of 2-Sided Page mode and a nonstandard paper size
is selected as the paper type.
*13 You cannot combine these modes when you set the Retro Photo Image mode.
*15 You cannot combine these modes with the Secure Watermark, Page Numbering, Copy Set Numbering, Watermark,
and Print Date modes in the Job Block Combination mode.

9-10 Combination of Functions Chart

 )

g)
e Blank

Secure atermark (W Upon Storing)

umberin
ark (ID l Number)
)
Name
)
e Blank

ark)
eys)

ted/Leav

Waterm (Copy Set N

e Num eys)

aterm
Combination Available

/User
eric K

aving
d/Leav

ate)

eria
Set

K
✕ Combination

y
riginals

ation
er (Prin
Booklet Saddle Stitch

Secure ser Inbox (Cop

Shift (U ng the Arrow

Secure atermark (D
nt Date

ark (S
se

nd

Waterm Numbering
Unavailable

Interle
lready

(Printe

lock C ation
ination

osition

Store In ser Inbox

me Era

aper C eck
Image eparation

Bindin me Erase

ed-thru
ckgrou

osition

ombin
▲ Priority

olor

ark
to

ering
ov

O
Creep C ooklet

Waterm
Ch
re
Latest Set Mode

ark/Pri

Waterm
sing th

ce
: Add C
g Erase

r Page

arency

nt Size

Repea
Insertion

ouch C
on A

Comb

Comp
Blanki age
orrectio

Image
Cover

Comp

Numb
al Fra

Balan

ve Ba
over

le Set

nt Ble
ness
Transp r

osi

In U

W
W
ape

dB
eS

uild

Set
Fra

si

U
Im
t:

ng
g
Functi

Shift (U

Nega/P
Back C

Chapte

Secure
Secure
Framin
Margin

Bookle
Bookle

Differe
Divide

Image

One T

Image
2-Pag

Origin

Tab P

Sharp

Remo

Tab P
Samp

Mirror

Preve
Job B

Job B
Color

Store
Sheet
Front

Form

Page
Copy
Book

Scan
Function to Be Set
2-Page Separation
Image Combination
Original Frame Erase *20
Book Frame Erase *20
Binding Erase *20
Margin
Shift (Using the Arrow Keys) *18
Shift (Using the Numeric Keys) *18 *20
Front Cover *18
Back Cover *18
Sheet Insertion (Printed/Leave Blank) *18
Chapter Page *18
Tab Paper
Transparency Interleaving
Booklet
Booklet : Saddle Stitch
Booklet : Add Cover (Printed/Leave Blank)
Divided Booklet *21
Creep Correction *21
Sample Set
Different Size Originals *18 *18 *18 *18 *18 *18
Job Build
Sharpness
Nega/Posi
Image Repeat
Mirror Image
Blanking
Framing
Color Balance
One Touch Color *19 *13 *13 *13 *13 *23
Remove Background *19
Prevent Bleed-thru

Appendix
Form Composition *13
Image Composition
Page Numbering *13 *22
Copy Set Numbering *13 *22
Watermark/Print Date *13 *22
Scan Image Check
Tab Paper Creation
*20 *20 *20 *20 *23 *22 *22 *22 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20
Job Block Combination
Store In User Inbox
Store In User Inbox (Copy Upon Storing)
9
Secure Watermark (Watermark) *20
Secure Watermark (Date) *20
Secure Watermark (Copy Set Numbering) *20
Secure Watermark (Serial Number) *20
Secure Watermark (ID/User Name) *20

*13 You cannot combine these modes when you set the Retro Photo Image mode.
*18 You cannot combine these modes when the Automatic Paper Selection mode is set.
*19 If you select Lighten Image, Darken Image, or Highlight Reproduction in the One Touch Color mode in combination
with these modes, the mode which is set last has priority (Priority to Latest Set Mode).
*20 You cannot combine these modes with the Secure Watermark, Page Numbering, Copy Set Numbering, Watermark,
and Print Date modes in the Job Block Combination mode.
*21 Combination available if [Auto] is selected for the Creep Correction mode.
*22 You cannot combine these modes with the Secure Watermark mode in the Job Block Combination mode.
*23 You cannot combine these modes with the Secure Watermark in the Job Block Combination mode. Also, if the
Retro Photo image mode is set, you cannot combine these modes with the Page Numbering, Copy Set Numbering,
Watermark, and Print Date modes in the Job Block Combination mode.

Combination of Functions Chart 9-11

 Mail Box
■ Scan Function

Prese Size Auto S al Select

Preve Backgroun ontrol

Combination

Record nt Size Man elect

Available

elect
Combination Set

als
ing

C
u

Book Frame Erase

d
Unavailable

e Auto

n
osure

Job B t Size Origin

Feede lass Scann

Origin ombination

Full C lor Selectio

eady

aration

Bindin me Erase
XY Zo esignation

2-Side Scanning
2-Pag Scanning
Priority to

Differe Scanning
ent Siz g

Text/P Bleeding
Img.

1-Side py Orig.
nin
Latest Set Mode

Autom rogram
atic Exp

Bookle Erase
on Alr

r Scan

t Zoom

d Imag
Priority to Image

rinted

e Sep
Zoom om

Printe to

Nega/P ss
Framin si
Combination and

olor
om

uild
Fra
ho

Co
G

ng
C

ne
e

ve

g
o
D
Booklet Modes

o
P

n
nt

d
d

al

g
t
Docum
Docum
Functi

Auto C
Auto Z

Text/P
Platen

Image

Blanki
Remo

Sharp
Photo
(Ratio can be Zoom

Black
Color
Text
Map
changed)
Function to Be Set
Platen Glass Scanning *1
Feeder Scanning *1 *2 *2
Document Size Auto Select
Document Size Manual Select *4 *4 *4 *5 *4
Record Size Auto Select
Preset Zoom
Zoom Designation
XY Zoom
Auto Zoom
Zoom Program
Automatic Exposure Control
Remove Background
Prevent Bleeding
Text/Printed Img.
Text/Photo
Printed Image
Photo
Text
Map
Color Copy Orig.
1-Sided Scanning
2-Sided Scanning
2-Page Separation
Image Combination *4
Original Frame Erase *4
Appendix

Book Frame Erase *4

Binding Erase *5
Booklet Scanning *4
Different Size Originals
Job Build
Auto Color Selection
Full Color
Black
9 Sharpness
Nega/Posi
Framing *2 *3
Blanking *2 *3

*1 Combination available when the Job Build mode is set.

*2 If you are designating areas with the edit pen, scanning cannot be performed.
*3 Any combination of up to four areas can be designated.
*4 Combination unavailable if [Auto] or [A3+] is selected as the document size.
*5 Combination unavailable if [A3+] is selected as the document size.

9-12 Combination of Functions Chart

■ Print Function

(Seria umbering)
ion

rinting

k (ID/U Number)
e)
rientat

ser Nam
uous P

k (Dat mark)
inting

ank)
nk)
Auto O

tN
ve Bla

er Pag rint/Leave Bl

)
ent Sep te Duplex Pr
n

er

opy Se
l
ooklet

e)
als *7
Combination

Contin
electio
aper S uts

k (Wat
Available

lection,

(Bookl )
dy Set

ng

et

Compo t Date
et)
Autom ber of Printo

ring
rint/Lea

(Bookl

Single Size Origin

Combination

Stack wer Switchi

ion (B

Secur atermark (C
ents

Secur er Creation
sition

k
Printin g

arate

Compo n
ents
Unavailable

ermar
ermar
ermar
ermar
rintin

sitio
umbe
Numbe or
ent
per Se

ring
Offset rouping

(P
g
n Alrea

Rotate ollating

Prin
para

et

um

ol
Priority to

One To ance
Docum
ct
or

Docum
e

Bookl
Collate

uch C
Collate ass

Insertion
over (P

e Stitch
Add C titch

Differen rint
ided P
Group
Latest Set Mode

le Doc
Corre

Color
eparat

e Wat
e Wat
atic P

e Wat
e Wat
Cover
ent Se

Cover

mark/
Set N
Cover
One-S ch

olors
atic Pa

aper
Byp

eP

Bal

W
un
um

eS
G
C
ra

ap
t
Functio

2-Sided

Divided
et

Secure
Auto D

Docum
Hole P

Two C
Rotate

Merge
Sampl

Image
Single
Staple

Tab P
Docum

Creep

Water
Group

Secur
Multip

Secur
Tab P
Cover
Chapt
The N

Offset

Margi
Saddl
Job S
Saddl

Bookl

Color
Autom

Form
Page
Copy
Front
Front

Sheet
Back

Shift
Function to Be Set
The Number of Printouts
Automatic Paper Selection
Automatic Paper Selection, Auto Orientation *12
Auto Drawer Switching
Stack Bypass *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6
Collate
Group
Rotate Collating *6
Rotate Grouping *6
Offset Collate *6
Offset Group *6
Staple *12 *6 *13 *13
Saddle Stitch *6
Add Cover (Print/Leave Blank) *6
Hole Punch *6
One-Sided Printing
2-Sided Printing *6
Document Separate Duplex Printing *6
Document Separate Continuous Printing *6
Front Cover *6
Back Cover *6
Sheet Insertion (Print/Leave Blank) *6
Chapter Page *6
Tab Paper *13
Cover *6
Job Separator *6
Booklet *6 *9
Saddle Stitch (Booklet) *6 *9
Front Cover (Booklet) *6 *9
Divided Booklet *6 *14 *9
Creep Correction (Booklet) *6 *14 *9
Sample Print
Different Size Originals *7
Single Document
Multiple Documents *9 *9 *9 *9 *9
Merge Documents
Single Color *10

Appendix
Two Colors *10
Color Balance *11
One Touch Color *10 *10 *11
Page Numbering
Copy Set Numbering *6
Watermark/Print Date *6
Form Composition *6
Image Composition
Margin *6
Shift
Tab Paper Creation
Secure Watermark (Watermark)
*6
*13 9
Secure Watermark (Date)
Secure Watermark (Copy Set Numbering)
Secure Watermark (Serial Number)
Secure Watermark (ID/User Name)

*6 Combination unavailable if [Irreg. Size] is selected.

*9 Combination unavailable if the record sizes of the selected documents are different.
*10 Combination unavailable if the Retro Photo Image mode is set.
*11 If the One Touch Color mode is used for color balance settings, any color balance settings that have been made
are also changed.
*12 Combination unavailable if the Double Staple mode is selected.
*13 You cannot use the Staple for Top Right Corner, Bottom Right Corner, or Right Double stapling with tab paper.
*14 Combination available if [Auto] is selected for the Creep Correction mode.

Combination of Functions Chart 9-13

 Index

Numeric Automatic exposure adjustment, 3-7

1 to 2-Sided, 3-44, 7-21

2-Page Separation, 4-10, 7-39 B
2-Sided Copying, 3-43
1 to 2-Sided, 3-44 Back cover copy, 4-13
2 to 1-Sided, 3-48 Back cover print, 4-18
2 to 2-Sided, 3-46 Binding Erase, 4-48
Book to 2-Sided, 3-49 Black mode, 3-55
2-Sided Original, 3-52 Blanking, 4-64
2-Sided Printing, 3-43 Using the edit pen, 4-65
Book Type, 3-45 Using the numeric keys, 4-69
Calendar Type, 3-45 Blueprints, 4-90
2 On 1, 4-33, 4-35 Book/Page Edit/Shift, 7-43
2 to 1-Sided, 3-48, 7-23 Book Frame Erase, 4-46
Appendix

2 to 2-Sided, 3-46, 7-22 Adjust At All Once, 4-47

4 On 1, 4-33, 4-35 Adjust Each Dim., 4-47
8 On 1, 4-33, 4-35 Book to 2-Sided, 3-49, 7-24
Front/back two sided, 3-50
9
Left/right two sided, 3-49

A Book Type, 3-45

Booklet mode, 4-21, 7-48
Add Cover, 4-24 Creep (Displacement) Correction, 4-22
Adjusting the color, 4-78 Divided Booklet, 4-22
Adjusting the contrast, 4-90 Booklet Scanning, 4-28
High, 4-90 Bottom Margin, 4-41
Low, 4-90
Area Designation, 4-64, 7-68
Area Fine Adj., 4-67 C
Arranging Documents Stored in an inbox, 2-47
Auto Collate, 8-9 Calendar Type, 3-45
Auto Orientation, 8-10 Cancel, 1-18, 2-30
Auto XY Zoom, 3-22 Canceling a Job, 2-30
Auto Zoom, 3-14, 7-14 Using the stop key, 2-30
Automatic color selection, 3-54, 7-9 Using the System Monitor Screen, 2-31

9-14 Index
 Using the touch panel display, 2-30, 2-31 Copy Set Numbering, 7-51
While printing, 2-31 Copy settings, 5-4
While scanning, 2-30 Recalling, 5-7
Center/Corner Shift, 4-37 Copy settings table, 8-4
Center Shift Copy, 4-37 Copying with different XY copy ratio, 3-18, 3-20
Change Print Settings Screen, 2-9 Copying with the same XY copy ratio, 3-17, 3-18
Changing the name of a document, 2-47 Corner, 3-34, 3-41
Check Area, 4-70 Cover/Job Separator, 4-18
Checking a document's detailed information, Cover/Sheet Insertion, 4-12
2-48 Creep (Displacement) Correction, 4-22
Clear Area, 4-66, 4-71 Current standard settings, changing, 8-10
Collate, 3-34, 3-36, 7-25
Color adjustment, 4-78
Density Fine Adjustment, 4-80 D
Hue, 4-80
Darkening Image, 4-87
Saturation, 4-79
Density Fine Adjustment, 4-80
Color Balance, 7-82
Designating a polygonal area, 4-65, 4-67
Adjusting, 4-78
Designating a rectangular area, 4-65, 4-66
Color balance keys
Designating area with the edit pen
Erasing, 4-86
Designating a polygonal area, 4-65
Naming, 4-83

Appendix
Designating a rectangular area, 4-65
Recalling, 4-84
Different Size Originals, 4-52, 7-41
Storing, 4-81
Divided Booklet, 4-22
Color Copy, 3-55
Color copy samples, 9-2
Do not shift center, 4-68, 4-71 9
Document Editing Screen, 2-7
Color balance, 9-2
Document list, printing, 2-51
Image quality adjustments, 9-6
Document Name, changing , 2-47
One touch color, 9-5
Document Selection Screen, 2-6
Color selection drop down list, 3-56
Double, 3-34, 3-41
Confidential Fax Inboxes, 6-9
Duplicating a document, 2-52
Confidential Fax Inboxes Settings, 8-17
Confirming selected settings, 1-33
Copy Ratio, 3-10
Auto XY Zoom, 3-14
E
Entire Image, 3-16 Edit Menu, 2-7
Poster, 3-25 Document Insertion, 2-57
Preset Zoom, 3-10 Merge and Save, 2-55
Zoom by percentage, 3-12 Page Erase, 2-58
Zoom Program, 3-17 View Page, 2-54

Index 9-15
 Editing/checking the contents of a document, Image Repeat, 4-59
2-54 Using the edit pen, 4-65
Entire Image, 7-15 Using the numeric keys, 4-69
Copy ratio, 3-16 Front Cover Copy, 4-13
Erase Front Cover/Back Cover, 7-45
Color balance settings, 4-86 Front Cover Print, 4-18
Copy settings, 5-9 Full Color, 3-55
Print settings, 5-9
Scan settings, 5-9
Erase Document After Printing, 2-23 G
Erase Point, 4-66
Group, 3-34, 3-38, 7-27
Erasing a document, 2-50
Exposure adjustment, 3-2, 7-10
Automatic, 3-7
During copying, 3-8
H
During printing, 3-8 Highlight Reproduction, 4-88
Exposure adjustment during printing, 3-8 Hue, 4-80
Express Copy Basic Features screen, 7-3

I
F
Appendix

I-Fax Memory Lock, 6-4

Faint images, 4-90 Image Adjustment, 7-79
Fine Adjustment, 4-77 Image Combination, 4-33, 7-61
9 Finishing modes, 3-32 2 On 1, 4-33
Collate, 3-34 4 On 1, 4-33
Group, 3-34 8 On 1, 4-33
No finisher mode, 3-35 Image Composition, 4-95, 7-64
Offset, 3-36 Image Creation, 4-58
Rotate, 3-36 Image Repeat, 4-59
Saddle Stitch, 3-35 Mirror Image, 4-63
Staple, 3-34 Nega/Posi, 4-58
Flow of copy operations, 1-7 Image form, 4-92, 4-95
Flow of mail box operations, 2-12 Image Orientation Priority, 8-9
Form Composition, 4-92, 7-62 Image Quality Adjustment, 7-81, 9-6
Frame Erase, 4-44, 7-73 Photo mode, 3-5
Binding Erase, 4-48, 7-75 Prevent Bleeding, 4-77, 7-82, 9-6
Book Frame Erase, 4-46, 7-74 Printed image mode, 3-5
Original Frame Erase, 4-44, 7-73 Remove Background, 4-75, 7-81, 9-6
Framing, 4-64 Text/Printed Img. mode, 3-4

9-16 Index
 Text mode, 3-5 Mirror Image, 4-63, 7-78
Image Repeat, 4-59, 7-71 Mode Memory, 5-4, 7-35
Automatic setting, 4-60, 4-61 Moiré effect, 4-90
Framing, 4-61 Moving a document, 2-52
Manual setting, 4-60, 4-61
Inbox Selection Screen, 2-4
Initialize Copy Settings, 8-11 N
Initializing a Confidential Fax Inbox, 8-19
Nega/Posi, 4-58, 7-77
Initializing a User Inbox, 8-15
Numeric keys, 1-10
Initializing the Standard Scan settings, 8-17
Interrupting copy/print jobs, 1-12, 1-28, 7-32
Inverting images, 4-58
O
Offset, 3-36
J One Touch Color Mode, 4-87, 7-83
Darken Image, 4-87
Job Block Combination, 4-116, 7-85
Highlight Reproduction, 4-88
Job Build, 4-53, 7-40
Lighten Image, 4-87
Job Done Notice, 4-50, 7-89
Retro Photo Image, 4-88
Job separator, 4-18, 4-19
Tranquil Colors, 4-87

Appendix
Original Frame Erase, 4-44
Adjust All At Once, 4-45
L Adjust Each Dim., 4-45
Left Margin, 4-41 Original type drop-down list, 3-5
9
Lightening Image, 4-87 Original type selection, 3-4, 3-5, 7-11
Overview, 1-2

M
Mail Box function, 2-2
P
Mail Box settings table, 8-13 Page Numbering, 7-51
Making scanning with different XY zoom ratio, Paper Insertion, 7-45
3-20 Paper Select Key Size for Express Copy Screen,
Making scanning with the same XY zoom ratio, 8-5
3-18 Paper selection, 2-25, 7-19
Manual exposure adjustment, 3-2 Auto, 2-26
Margin mode, 4-41, 7-57 Irregular size, 2-28
Memory keys, naming, 5-4 Manual, 2-27
Memory RX Inbox, 6-2, 6-3 Photo mode, 3-5
Merge Document, 3-59 Point select, 4-67

Index 9-17
 Poster, 3-25, 7-18 Reserving Copy Jobs, 1-21
Determining the copy ratio, 3-26 While the machine is printing, 1-21
Number of sheets needed, 3-26 While the machine is waiting, 1-21
Pasting the sheets of the divided image Reserving print jobs, 2-33, 2-34
together, 3-30 Using the stack bypass, 2-37
Selecting the number of output pages, 3-28 Resume Copying, 1-19
Specifying the copy ratio in percentage, 3-27 Retro Photo Image, 4-88
Preserving color copies, xx Right Margin, 4-41
Preset zoom, 3-10, 7-13 Rotate, 3-36, 3-37
Enlargement, 3-11
Reduction, 3-10
Prevent Bleeding, 4-77 S
Preview, 4-67
Saddle Stitch, 3-35
Print Date, 7-54
Sample Print, 2-42
Print Image mode, 3-5
Cancel, 2-43
Print List, 2-51
Change Settings, 2-44
Print Screen, 2-8
Start Print, 2-43
Print settings
Sample Set, 1-30, 7-32
Erasing, 5-9
Cancel, 1-32
Recalling, 5-7
Change Settings, 1-32
Printing a document in the Confidential Fax
Appendix

Start Print, 1-32

Inbox, 6-11
Saturation, 4-79
Printing a document in the memory RX inbox,
Scan Image Check, 7-42
6-4
9 Printing documents stored in an inbox, 2-19
Scan mode
Erasing, 5-9
Process/Layout, 7-59
Scan Originals, 7-38
Scan Screen, 2-10
Scanning 2-Sided originals, 3-52
R Scanning with different XY zoom ratio, 3-18, 3-20
Recalling Scanning with the same XY zoom ratio, 3-17,
Copy settings, 5-7 3-18
Print settings, 5-7 Secure Watermark, 4-99, 7-67
Scan settings, 5-7 Select All, 2-21
Recalling previous copy jobs, 5-2, 7-34 Selected settings
Receiving confidential documents, 6-10 Canceling, 1-33
Receiving documents through I-Fax, 6-3 Changing, 1-33
Register Inbox Name, 8-18 Confirming, 1-33
Regular Copy Basic Features Screen, 1-4 Send Screen, 2-11
Remove Background, 4-75 Sending a document, 6-12

9-18 Index
Setting a Confidential Fax Inbox, 8-17 Stop key, 1-11
Setting a User Inbox, 8-14 Store
Setting Confirmation, 1-33 Color balance, 4-83
Setting for receiving documents in memory, 6-3 Copy mode, 5-4
Setting the X and Y axes independently, 3-21 Print mode, 5-4
Sharpness, 4-90, 7-80 Scan mode, 5-4
High, 4-90 Store In User Inbox, 4-122, 7-88
Low, 4-90 Storing a confidential fax inbox, 8-17
Shift, 7-55 Storing a User Inbox, 8-14
Using the arrow keys, 4-37 Storing Originals into an Inbox, 2-12
Using the numeric keys, 4-38 Storing originals while printing, 2-33
Shift center, 4-68, 4-71 Storing standard settings, 8-11
Shifted to a corner, 4-37 System Monitor, 1-19
Shifting the original image, 4-37
Shifted to a corner, 4-37
Shifted to center, 4-37 T
Special Features, 4-4
Tab Paper Creation, 4-72, 7-58
Copying, 4-4
Top Margin, 4-41
Mail Box, Printing, 4-8
Tranquil Colors, 4-87
Mail Box, Scanning, 4-6
Transparency Interleaving, 4-30, 7-76
Special Features Screen, Copy, 1-5

Appendix
Not printing on the insertion sheets, 4-30
Stack Bypass Settings, 1-24
Printing on the interleaf sheets, 4-31
Standard Key 1/2 Settings for Regular Screen,
8-6
Standard Key Settings for Express Copy Screen,
9
8-7
U
Standard scan settings, 8-16 User Inboxes Settings, 8-14
Standard settings, 8-11
Staple, 3-34, 3-40, 7-29
Corner, 3-34 V
Double, 3-34
Saddle Stitch, 3-35 Various copying features, 1-2
Start key, 1-11 Vivid Colors, 4-87
Start Send, 6-13
Status, 1-20
Stop a copy job W
Using the Stop Key, 1-18 Watermark, 7-53
Using the System Monitor Screen, 1-19
Using the Touch Panel Display, 1-18

Index 9-19
 X
XY Zoom, 3-22, 7-17
automatically, 3-22
manually, 3-22

Z
Zoom, 3-17
Zoom by percentage, 3-12, 7-12
Zoom program, 3-17, 7-15
Different XY copy (zoom) ratio, 3-18, 3-20
Same XY copy (zoom) ratio, 3-17, 3-18
Appendix

9-20 Index
 0

前付け
CANON INC.
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
CANON U.S.A., INC.
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.
CANON CANADA INC.
6390 Dixie Road Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1P7, Canada
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59-61 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
CANON FRANCE S.A.S.
17, quai du Président Paul Doumer 92414 Courbevoie Cedex, France
CANON (U.K.) LTD.
Woodhatch, Reigate, Surrey, RH2 8BF, United Kingdom
CANON DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Europark Fichtenhain A10, 47807 Krefeld, Germany
CANON ITALIA S.p.A.
Via Milano, 8 20097 San Donato Milanese (MI) Italy
CANON LATIN AMERICA, INC.
703 Waterford Way Suite 400 Miami, Florida 33126 U.S.A.
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney, N.S.W. 2113, Australia
CANON CHINA CO., LTD
15F Jinbao Building No.89 Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, China
CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.
1 HarbourFront Avenue #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632
CANON HONGKONG CO., LTD
19/F., The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong

FT5-0034 (000) © CANON INC. 2006 PRINTED IN JAPAN